11O101
11O102
11O103
Engineering Mathematics I*
Engineering Physics*
Engineering Chemistry*
Language Elective I
11O105
11L106
11L107
11O108
11O109
Course
Code No.
I,IV
#
I,II
I,II
I,II
b, d, e,
a, c, d
a
a
Total
3
3
3
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
4
2
3
0
0
21
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
2
0
2
2
6
4.0
3.0
3.5
1.0
1.0
25.0
3
3
3
1
0
1
0
0
0
3.5
3.0
3.5
3
3
2
3
2
0
22
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
2
0
2
2
6
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.0
26.0
Second Semester
Code No.
Course
11O201
11O202
11L204
11L205
11L206
11L207
11O208
11L209
Materials Science+
Principles of Electrical Engineering
Analog Electronics I
Networks and Transmission Lines
Engineering Graphics$
Workshop Practice
Common for EEE, ME, BT, FT, IT & TT (I Semester); AE, CE, CSE, ECE & EIE (II Semester)
Third Semester
Course
11O301
11L302
11L303
11L304
11L305
11L306
11L307
IV
b.j
1.5
11L308
I,III
a,c,h
1.5
11L309
I,III
a,d,f,i
1.5
Total
18
25.0
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
18
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
9
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
24.5
Code No.
3.5
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
Fourth Semester
Code No.
11L401
11L402
11L403
11L404
11L405
11L406
11L407
11L408
11L409
Course
Probability and Random Processes
Digital Signal Processing
Analog Communication
Microprocessors
CMOS VLSI Design
Control Systems
Digital Signal Processing Laboratory
Communication Systems Laboratory
Microprocessor Laboratory
Fifth Semester
Code No.
Course
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.0
11L501
11L502
11L503
11L504
11L505
Digital Communication
Measurements and Instrumentation
Microcontrollers
Embedded Systems
Electromagnetic Fields and Waveguides
Elective I1
11L507
I,II
a,f,g,h,i
1.5
11L508
III
a,d,f,g,k
1.5
11L509
11L510
Microcontrollers Laboratory
Technical Seminar I
I,IV
V,VI
a,b,d,e,h
k,l,m,n
Total
0
0
0
0
3
0
1.5
1.0
18
24.51
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.5
3.0
3.5
3.0
3.5
3.0
I,II
IV
V,VI
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
0
1.5
1.5
1.0
15
23.51
Sixth Semester
Code No.
Course
11L601
11L602
11L603
11L604
11L605
11L607
11L608
11L609
a,f,g,h,k
a,b,e,f,g
k,l,m,n
Total
Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of
depending upon the elective opted.
Seventh Semester
Code No.
Course
11O701
Engineering Economics*
11L702
11L703
ASIC Design
Optical Communication
11L704
11L707
11L708
11L709
3.0
3
3
0
0
0
0
3.0
3.0
I,II
a,f,g,h,k
3
3
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
3.5
3.0
3.0
I,II
a,f,g,h,i
1.5
III
V,VI
a,b,d,e,h
j,k,m,n
Total
0
0
0
0
3
0
1.5
3.0
18
24.52
2
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
2.0
3.0
3.0
V,VI
0
8
0
0
0
0
12.0
20.02
Eighth Semester
Code No.
Course
11O801
Professional Ethics*
Elective V2
Elective VI2
11L804
j, k,m ,n
Total
ELECTIVES
LANGUAGE ELECTIVES
L
3
3
0
0
0
0
3.0
3.0
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Language Elective I
11O10B
11O10C
Basic English I
Communicative English
Language Elective II
11O20B
11O20C
11O20G
11O20J
11O20F
11O20H
Basic English II
Advanced Communicative English
German
Japanese
French
Hindi
DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES
11L001
11L002
11L003
11L004
11L005
11L006
11L007
11L008
11L009
11L010
11L011
11L012
11L013
11L014
11L015
11L016
11L017
11L018
11L019
11L020
11L021
11L022
11L023
11L024
11L025
11L026
11L027
11L028
11L029
PHYSICS ELECTIVES
11O0PA
11O0PB
11O0PC
11O0PD
Vacuum Science and Deposition Techniques
11O0PE
Semi conducting materials and Devices
CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES
3
3
0
0
0
0
3.0
3.0
11O0YA
11O0YB
11O0YC
11O0YD
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3
3
0
0
0
0
3.0
3.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
ENTREPRENUERSHIP ELECTIVES$
11O001
11O002
Entrepreneurship Development I
Entrepreneurship Development II
RF ID
Sensor Networks
Nano Engineering
NS2/Qualnet/Opnet
Biometrics
Embedded Solutions Engineering
IE3D Software
ARM CORTEXM0+ Processor
Architecture and Programming
PLC and SCADA Programming
SPECIAL COURSES
11L0RA
11L0RB
Remember
20
20
Model
Examination2
20
Understand
40
40
40
40
Apply
30
30
30
30
Analyze/ Evaluate
10
10
10
10
Create
100
100
100
100
S. No
Total
Test I2
Test II2
Semester End
Examination
20
Remember
1. State Cayley Hamilton theorem.
2. Define Eigen value and Eigen vectors of the matrix.
3. Write the definition of Convergence & Divergence of the sequence.
4. State the necessary & sufficient condition for the differential equation to be exact.
5. Write the Radius of curvature in cartesian coordinates.
6. Define Evolute,Centre of curvature & Circle of curvature.
7. Write the Leibneitzs form of linear equation in y and in x.
8. Write the general form of Eulers & Legendre linear differential equation.
9. Define Convolution of two functions.
10. State the existence conditions for Laplace transforms.
Understand
2 2 0
2.
3.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Apply
Solve cos2 x
dy
+ y = tanx
dx
3 1 1
1 1 3
1 3 7
3 3.4 3.4.5
3. Test the convergence of the series
+
+
+ .....
4 4.6 4.6.8
1
4. Use Convolution theorem find inverse Laplace transform of
( s 1)( s 2)
5.
6.
7.
8.
1 x
dy
=1
dx
dy
y e 2 x ( x 1) 2
dx
t
e (sin 3t )
dt
10. Use Laplace Transform to evaluate,
t
0
9.
( x 1)
Analyze / Evaluate
1.
Reduce the quadratic form 8x 1 +7x 2 +3x 3 12x 1 x 2 8x 2 x 3 +4x 3 x 1 to canonical form by
orthogonal transformation and find the rank, signature, index and the nature.
2.
3.
Reduce 3x +5y +3z 2yz+2zx2xy to its canonical form through an orthogonal transformation
and find the rank, signature, index and the nature
Find the evolute of the cycloid : x = a( +sin ) ; y = a(1  cos )
4.
5.
a a
x y at ,
4 4
2 1 1
1 1 2
7.
8.
9.
1
.
x2
x y
1 , here a and b are connected by the relation a2 +
a b
b 2 = c2
10. Find the Laplace transform of the following functions
(1). (t + 2t2)2 (2) sin2 2t (3). sin 3t cos 2t (4). Cos (at+b)
Unit I
Matrices
Characteristic equation  eigen values and eigen vectors of a real matrix  properties of eigen values CayleyHamilton theorem Reduction of a real matrix to a diagonal form Orthogonal matrices Quadratic
form Reduction of a quadratic form to a canonical form by orthogonal transformationapplication to
engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Series and Differential Calculus
Series Convergences and divergence Comparison test Ratio test  Curvature in Cartesian CoordinatesCentre and radius of curvature  Circle of curvature Evolutes Envelopes application to engineering
problems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Differential Equation of First Order
Linear differential equation of first orderexactintegrating factor Eulers equationBernoullismodelingapplication to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Differential Equations of Higher Order
Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant and variablecoefficients  Cauchys
and Legendres linear differential equations  method of variation of parameters application to engineering
problems.
9 Hours
Unit V
Laplace Transforms
Laplace Transform conditions for existence(statement only) Transforms of standard functions properties
(statement only)  Transforms of derivatives and integrals  Initial and Final value theorems (statement
only)  Periodic functions  Inverse transforms  Convolution theorems(statement only)  Applications of
Laplace transforms for solving the ordinary differential equations up to second order with constant
coefficientsapplication to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book(s)
1.
2.
Reference (s)
1. Ramana B.V, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGrawHill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi, 2007.
2. Bali N.P and Manish Goyal, Text book of Engineering Mathematics,3rd Edition, Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd., 2008.
3. Ray Wylie C and Louis Barrett C, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGrawHill
Publishing Company Ltd, 2003.
4. Glyn James, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 3rd Edition,Wiley India, 2007
5. Greenberg M.D, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Second Edition, Pearson Education, Inc.
2002.
11O102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
(Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart fundamental knowledge in the areas of acoustics, crystallography and new engineering
materials.
To apply fundamental knowledge in the area of LASERS and fiber optics
To use the principles of quantum physics in the respective fields
At the end of the course the students are familiar with the basic principles and applications of
physics in various fields.
Program Outcome(s)
a.
able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering
Course Outcome(s)
1. Making to learn.
2. Study the working and applications of different types of laser.
3. Understanding the Schrdinger wave equation and scattering of Xrays.
4. Utilization of concept of air wedge in determining the thickness of a thin wire.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test 1
Test 2
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
20
25
20
20
15
100
Semester End
Examination
20
25
20
20
15
100
Remember
1. Give the classifications of sound.
2. Write a note on loudness.
3. Define decibel.
4. What is meant by reverberation time?
5. Define magnetostriction effect.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
10
11
Unit I
Acoustics and Ultrasonics
Acoustics: Classification of sound characteristics of musical sound loudness Weber Fechner law
decibel absorption coefficient reverberation reverberation time Sabines formula (growth & decay).
Factors affecting acoustics of buildings and their remedies. Ultrasonics: Ultrasonic production
magnetostriction  piezo electric methods. Applications: Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves
(acoustic grating)  SONAR.
The phenomenon of cavitation.
9 Hours
Unit II
Crystallography
Crystal Physics: Lattice unit cell Bravais lattices lattice planes Miller indices d spacing in cubic
lattice calculation of number of atoms per unit cell atomic radius coordination number packing
factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures  Xray Diffraction: Laues method powder crystal method.
Crystal defects.
9 Hours
Unit III
Waveoptics
Interference: Air wedge theory uses testing of flat surfaces thickness of a thin wire. LASER: Types
of lasers Nd YAG laser CO2 laser semiconductor laser (homojunction). Applications: Holography
construction reconstruction uses.
Fiber Optics: Principle of light transmission through fiber expression for acceptance angle and numerical aperture  types of optical fibers (refractive Index profile,
mode) fiber optic communication system (block diagram only)
Laser gas sensors .
9 Hours
Unit IV
Modern Physics
Quantum Physics: Development of quantum theory de Broglie wavelength Schrdingers wave
equation time dependent time independent wave equations physical significance applications
particle in a box (1d). Xrays: Scattering of Xrays Compton Effect theory and experimental
verification.
Degenerate and non degenerate.
9 Hours
Unit V
New Engineering Materials
Metallic glasses: Manufacturing properties uses. Shape Memory Alloys: Working principle shape
memory effect applications. Nanomaterials: Preparation method sol gel technique mechanical
magnetic characteristics uses. Ceramics: Manufacturing methods slip casting isostatic pressing
thermal and electrical properties  uses.
Carbon nano tubes and applications.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. V.Rajendran, Engineering Physics, TMH,New Delhi ,2011.
2. P. K. Palanisami, Physics for Engineers, Vol. 1, Scitech Pub. (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. M. N. Avadhanulu and P. G. Kshirsagar, A Textbook of Engineering Physics, S. Chand &
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2005
2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publication, New Delhi, 2006.
3. V. Rajendran and A. Marikani, Physics I, TMH, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Arthur Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics, TMH, 2008.
5. R. K. Gaur and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, New Delhi, 2006
12
Imparting knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment methods and industrial
applications.
Understanding the principles and application of electrochemistry and corrosion science.
Basic information and application of polymer chemistry, nanotechnology and analytical
techniques.
Program Outcome(s)
a.
able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understand the chemistry of water and its industrial & domestic application.
2. Utilization of electrochemistry principle in corrosion control and industrial application.
3. Understanding the various types of polymers and its industrial application.
4. Applications of nanotechnology and analytical techniques in day to day life.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
20
20
30
20
10
100
20
20
30
20
10
100
10
20
30
20
20
100
10
20
30
20
20
100
Total
Remember
1. Distinguish between alkaline and non alkaline hardness.
2. What is meant by priming? How it is prevented?
3. What is meant by caustic embrittlement?
4. What is the role of calgon conditioning in water treatment?
5. What is break point chlorination?
6. Write the significances of EMF series.
7. Define single electrode potential of an electrode.
8. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells.
9. What are the advantages of H2O2 fuel cell?
10. What are reference electrodes?
11. Mention the various factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
12. State PillingBedworth rule.
13. What are the constituents of water repellant paints?
14. What is pitting corrosion?
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted
to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment
will be calculated for 50 marks
13
14
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Distinguish between hardness and alkalinity.
2. Distinguish between battery and cell.
3. Corrosion phenomenon is known as thousand dollar thief  reason out.
4. What is the basic difference between polymers and oligomers?
5. How do you identify an organic molecule using IR spectrum?
Unit I
Chemistry of Water and its Industrial Applications
Hardness of water: Equivalents of calcium carbonate  Units of hardness  Degree of hardness and its
estimation (EDTA method)  Numerical problems on degree of hardness  pH value of water. Use of water
for industrial purposes: Boiler feed waterscalesludge  caustic embrittlement. Softening of hard water:
External conditioning zeolite  ion exchange methods  internal conditioning calgon  phosphate
methods. Desalination: Reverse osmosis  electrodialysis. Use of water for domestic purposes: Domestic
water treatment  Disinfection of water  break point chlorination.
Characterization of your campus water.
9 Hours
Unit II
Electrochemistry for Materials Processing
Introduction emf  Single electrode potential  Hydrogen electrode  Calomel electrode  Glass electrode
 pH measurement using glass electrode  Electrochemical series. Cells: Electrochemical cells Cell
reactions Daniel cell Reversible cells and irreversible cells  Difference between electrolytic cells and
electrochemical cells. Concept of electroplating: Electroplating of gold  electroless plating (Nickel).
Batteries: Secondary batteries  lead acid, nickel  cadmium and lithium batteries. Fuel cell: Hydrogen oxygen fuel cell.
Electricity assisted painting.
9 Hours
Unit III
Chemistry of Corrosion and its Control
Corrosion: Mechanism of corrosion Chemical and electrochemical  PillingBedworth rule  Oxygen
absorption Hydrogen evolution  Galvanic series. Types of corrosion: Galvanic corrosion  Differential
aeration corrosion  Examples  Factors influencing corrosion. Methods of corrosion control: Sacrificial
anodic protection  Impressed current method. Protective coatings: Paints  Constituents and Functions.
Special paints: Fire retardant  Water repellant paints.
Applications of vapour phase inhibitors.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to Polymer and Nanotechnology
Polymers: Monomer  functionality  Degree of polymerization  Classification based on source applications. Types of polymerization: Addition, condensation and copolymerization. Mechanism of free
radical polymerization. Thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics  Preparation, properties and applications:
Epoxy resins, TEFLON, nylon and bakelite. Compounding of plastics. Moulding methods: Injection and
extrusion. Nanomaterials: Introduction Nanoelectrodes  Carbon nanotubes  Nanopolymers Application.
A detailed survey on application of polymer in day to day life.
9 Hours
Unit V
Instrumental Techniques of Chemical Analysis
Beer Lamberts law  Problems. UV visible and IR spectroscopy: Principle Instrumentation (block
diagram only)  Applications. Colorimetry: Principle Instrumentation (block diagram only)  Estimation
of iron by colorimetry. Flame photometry: Principle  Instrumentation (block diagram only)  Estimation of
sodium by flame photometry. Atomic absorption spectroscopy: Principle  Instrumentation (block diagram
only)  Estimation of nickel by atomic absorption spectroscopy.
Applications of analytical instruments in medical field.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
15
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
3.
P. C. Jain and M. Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications., New Delhi, 2009.
R. Sivakumar and N. Sivakumar, Engineering Chemistry, TMH, New Delhi, 2009.
B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma and Madan S. Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Shoban Lal
Nagin Chand & Co., 2005.
Reference(s)
1. Sashi Chawla, Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi, 2003.
2. B. S. Bahl, G. D. Tuli and Arun Bahl, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, S. Chand & Company,
2008.
3. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, TMH, 2009.
4. C. P. Poole Jr., J. F. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley India Private Limited, 2007.
5. Andre Arsenault and Geoffrey A. Ozin, Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to
Nanomaterials, Royal Society of Chemistry, London, 2005.
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE I
3 0 0 3.0
11O105 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
4 0 0 4.0
Objective(s)
To impart basic knowledge in the field of Civil Engineering focusing building materials,
surveying, foundation and transportation Engineering
To impart basic knowledge in the field of Mechanical Engineering focusing on generation of
power from various natural resources and to know about various types of Boilers and Turbines
used for power generation and to understand the working of IC engines and basic manufacturing
processes
Program Outcome(s)
a.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to understand the fundamental philosophy of Civil engineering and enable them to work
together in a multidisciplinary technical team.
2. Able to identify the nature of building components, functions, construction practices and material
qualities
3. Able to demonstrate the manufacturing processes like casting, welding, machining operations
4. Able to demonstrate the construction and working of IC engines and refrigerators
5. Able to demonstrate the working principle of boilers, turbines and various power plants utilizing
conventional and nonconventional sources of energy
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
1
92
3
4
5
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze / Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
40
30
20
100
40
30
20
100
Model
Examination
40
30
20
100
Semester End
Examination
40
30
20
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks
will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated by giving equal weightage (50%) for
both Civil and Mechanical Engineering
16
Remember
1. What are the classifications of stones?
2. What is the frog in a brick?
3. What is quarrying?
4. What do you mean by dressing of stones?
5. What are the systems of bearing?
6. How the surveying is classified based on purpose?
7. Define Benchmark and state its effects.
8. What are the accessories used in chain surveying?
9. Define bearing of a line.
10. Define leveling & state its objectives.
11. State the objectives and requirement of good foundation.
12. Mention the site improvement techniques.
13. Define bearing capacity of soil.
14. How stone masonry is classified?
15. Define Beam, Column and Lintel.
16. What are the basic forms of roof?
17. How floors are classified based on floor finish?
18. List the materials used for damp proofing.
19. How roads are classified?
20. What do you mean by W.B. M. road?
21. Define Gauge.
22. What is a permanent way?
23. How bridges are classified?
24. What are the advantages of railways?
25. What are docks?
26. Classify sleepers.
27. What are the requirements of a sleeper?
28. What are the types of traffic signs?
29. What are the advantages of road signs?
30. What are the prohibitory signs?
31. What is the main function of hangars?
32. What are the sources of Energy Generation?
33. What are the accessories used in a boiler?
34. Define Turbine.
35. Compare and contrast fire tube and water tube boiler?
36. List the types of steam Turbines?
37. Classify the I.C engine.
38. List out the Part of the I.C. Engine.
39. Define the terms: Top Dead Center, Bottom Dead Center.
40. Define the term: Compression Ratio.
41. What are the different sources of energy?
42. Name four nonrenewable sources of energy.
43. Name some renewable sources of energy.
44. Name four solid/liquid/gaseous/ fuels.
45. Name two nuclear fuels.
46. What are the advantages of wind energy?
47. State some of the applications of steam boilers.
48. Classify different steam boilers.
49. What do you understand by Scavenging
50. What do you understand by the term IC engine?
51. What are the operations performed on a Lathe?
52. What is impulse turbine? Give example.
53. What is Reaction turbine? Give example.
54. Define Boiler.
17
18
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
Apply/Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
What is Hardness?
What are the operations to be performed while setting up a plane table at a station?
Explain the steps involved in measuring vertical angle of an object using theodolite
Explain the methods to improve bearing capacity of soil
What are the points to be observed in the construction of brick masonry?
Explain the method of construction of cement concrete flooring.
What are the methods of applying surface dressing in bituminous roads?
Explain the construction steps in bituminous macadam road.
How can you express the hardness number of stones?
Apply the concept of power generation and saving from other energy sources
Apply the concept of Refrigeration in Heat removal and Heat addition
Draw the pressurevelocity diagram for a single stage impulse turbine.
Unit I
Introduction to Civil Engineering
History, development and scope of Civil Engineering  Functions of Civil Engineers. Construction
Materials: Characteristics of good building materials such as stones  Bricks, A.C. sheets  G.I. sheets and
Ceramic tiles  Timber, cement  Aggregates and concrete. Surveying: Definition and purpose
Classification Basic principles Measurement of length by chains and tapes Calculation of area of a
plot Measurement of bearings and angles using a prismatic compass Leveling Contours
Application of contours
10 Hours
Unit II
General Concepts Relating to Buildings
Selection of site Basic functions of buildings Major components of buildings. Foundations: Purpose of
foundation Bearing capacity of soils Types of foundations. Proper methods of construction of: Brick
masonry Stone masonry Hollow Block masonry. Beams Lintels Columns Flooring Doors and
windows Roofing
Damp proof course Surface finishes
10 Hours
Unit III
Transportation Engineering
Classification of Highways Cross sections of water bound macadam  Bituminous and cement concrete
roads Traffic signs and signals. Importance of railways  Gauges Components of a permanent way
Classification of bridges Components of Airport
Examples of Marvelous Structures
10 Hours
Unit IV
Engineering Materials and Manufacturing Processes
Classification of Engineering materials, Mechanical properties and uses of cast iron, steel, and High Speed
Steel. Introduction to casting process, Green sand moulding  Pattern, Melting furnaces  Cupola and
Electric Furnace. Metal Forming  Forging Process. Introduction to Arc and Gas Welding. Centre Lathe 
19
Specifications  Principal parts  Operations  Straight turning, Step turning, Taper turning methods,
Knurling, Thread cutting methods, Facing, Boring, and Chamfering  Lathe tools and Materials. Drilling
Radial drilling machine  Specification and Operation
Milling operation
10 Hours
Unit V
Internal Combustion Engines and Refrigeration
Classification of IC engines, Main components of IC engines, working of a 4 stroke & 2 stroke petrol &
diesel engine, differences between 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine, Lubrication and Cooling systems in IC
Engines. Refrigeration: Working Principle of Vapour Compression & Vapour Absorption System,
Domestic refrigerator
Domestic air conditioning
10 Hours
Unit VI
Alternate Sources of Energy, Power Plants and Boilers
Solar, Wind, Tidal, Geothermal and Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC). Power Plant:
Classification of Power Plants Steam  Nuclear, Diesel, and Hydro Power Plants. Types of Boilers
Simple Vertical, Babcock and Wilcox and LaMont Boiler, Differences between fire tube and water tube
boiler. Types of steam turbines working of a single stage impulse and reaction turbines
Biomass and Biofuels in power generation
10 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Objective(s)
Program Outcome(s)
b.
d.
To understand the history of computer languages and the steps in the development of computer
program.
20
2.
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
20
20
30
20
10
100
20
20
30
20
10
100
Model
Examination
10
20
30
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
10
20
30
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. List out the five programming languages commonly used.
2. Define Algorithm and Flowchart
3. What is structured programming?
4. What is the general structure of a C program?
5. List out the rules for defining a variable.
6. What are the I/O functions in C?
7. What is a header file?
8. State the associativity property of an operator.
9. Define a ternary operator.
10. What are an array and a pointer?
11. What is the significance of function?
Understand
1. Compare while loop with do while Loop.
2. What are the advantages of using Macro?
3. Explain how recursive functions affect the run time efficiency.
4. Differentiate between Structure and Union in C.
5. How is memory managed in C?
6. How does garbage collection done in C?
Apply
1. Write a recursive function to calculate the factorial of number.
2. Write a C program to check whether the given number is palindrome or not.
3. Write a program to check whether the given number is prime or not.
4. Write a C program to find the roots of quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0.
5. Write a C program to find average of n numbers.
6. Write a program to generate the pay slip of an employee using Structure.
7. Write a C program to search for a specified element in an array.
8. Write a program to compute Matrix Multiplication.
9. Write a program to perform swapping of two numbers using pointers.
10. Write a program to read the content of the file and copy it to another file.
Analyze
1. Explain the difference between while and dowhile statements
2. Why are pointers so powerful? Analyze their efficiency giving an example?
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
21
3. Is there any advantage of using recursion over looping control structures? Give a suitable example.
4. Illustrate the Limitation of array of pointers to strings using a sample example.
Evaluate
1. Differentiate the keywords break and continue.
2. Justify the need for Type Casting over Type Conversion.
3. Compare and contrast I/O mapped I/O with Memory mapped I/O.
4. Summarize the various builtin String functions.
Create
1. Create a structure to store the following details: Rollno, Name, Mark1, Mark2, Mark3, Total,
Average, Result and Class. Write a program to read Rollno, name and 3 subject marks. Find out
the total, result and class as follows:
i. Total is the addition of 3 subject marks.
ii. Result is "Pass" if all subject marks are greater than or equal to 50 else "Fail".
iii. Class will be awarded for students who have cleared 3 subjects
iv. Class "Distinction" if average >=75
v. Class "First" if average lies between 60 to 74 (both inclusive)
vi. Class "Second" if average lies between 50 & 59 (both inclusive)
vii. Repeat the above program to manipulate 10 students' details and sort the structures as per
rank obtained by them.
Unit I
Introduction
Computer languages  Creating and Running ProgramsSystem Development  Flowchart  Introduction to
C language background  C Programs: Identifiers Types Variables  Constants  Input/output Structure of C ProgramExpressions Operator Precedence and Associatively Type Conversion.
Flowchart
6 Hours
Unit II
Control Structures
Selection  Making Decisions  Logical data and Operators  Two Way Selection  Multiway Selection More Standard Functions  Incremental Development Repetition Concept of Loop  Pretest and Post
Test loops Initialization and Updating.
Logical data and Operators
6 Hours
Unit III
Arrays and Strings
ArraysConceptsUsing arrays in C array ApplicationsSorting selection sort bubble sort  Searching of
ArraysTwo Dimensional ArraysStrings: String Concepts String Input/output Functions Arrays of
StringsString Manipulation Functions.
Array Applications
6 Hours
Unit IV
Functions and Pointers
FunctionsDesigning structured Programs Functions in C User Defined FunctionsStandard Functions Storage classes and Type Qualifier Introduction to Pointers Arrays with pointers Function with pointersPointers to Pointers.
Storage classes
6 Hours
Unit V
Structures, Union and Files
Structure and Union  Programming Application Text Input/Output: FilesStreamsStandard Library
Input/Output Functions Formatting Input/Output functions Character Input/Output functions.
Programming Application
6 Hours
Total: 30+30 Hours
[
22
Lab Component:
1. Programs Using DecisionMaking
2. Programs Using Looping Statements
3. Programs Using Functions
4. Programs Using Arrays
5. String Handling Programs
6. Programs Using Structures
7. Programs Using Pointers
Textbook (s)
1. Behrouz A.Forouzan and Richard F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structure program approach
using C, C engage learning, 2008
Reference(s)
1. D.M.Ritchie and B.W.Kernighan, C Programming Language, PHI, 2000
2. Deitel & Deitel, C How to program, PHI, 2001
3. Herbert Schildt, C The complete Reference, McGraw Hill, 2010
4. Gary J Bronson, First book of ANSI C, Thomson Learning, 2001
5. Byron S. Gottfried, Schaum's Outline of Programming with C, McGraw Hill, 1996
11L107 CIRCUIT THEORY
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To know the challenges of emerging trends in Network theorems
To study the DC and AC transient circuits.
To design and develop series and parallel Resonance
To obtain the concept of graph theory.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Identify the major issues for circuits problems
2. Explore the circuit theorems by researching key areas such as procedure, design and applications.
3. Design and test signals of dc transient circuits
4. Study the effect of attacks in resonance in ac circuits
5. Determine the dual network and convert graph network.
Assessment Pattern
Model
Blooms Taxonomy
Semester End
S.No
Test I Test II
(New Version)
Examination Examination
1
Remember
20
20
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
25
25
30
30
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
5
5
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
23
Remember
1. State the Kirchoffs laws.
2. Write the equation of real power and power factor.
3. Draw the equivalent circuit of Nortons theorem.
4. What are the limitations in Super position theorem?
5. What is the time constant of RL and RC circuits?
6. Names the signal of transient circuits.
7. Compare the series and parallel resonance.
8. Define the Qfactor.
9. Write the mesh equation for Index matrix.
10. Distinguish between the tree and branch of graph theory.
Understand
1. What is negative resistance? Can it give power amplification?
2. How does negative resistance cause stability problems?
3. How does excitation of a network by a specific signal give information about the
4. Characteristic network?
5. Define an ideal voltage source.
6. Define an ideal current source.
7. Explain how voltage source with a source resistance can be converted into an
8. equivalent current source.
9. Name the four different types of dependent sources in electric circuits.
10. Define R.M.S value.
Apply
1.
2.
Calculate a) the equivalent resistances across the terminals of the supply, b) total current supplied
by the source and c) power delivered to 16 ohm resistor in the circuit shown in figure.
3.
Using Nortons theorem, find current through 6 ohm resistance shown in figure.
24
Analyze
1. A series RLC circuit has R=20 ohm, L=0.005H and C = 0.2 x 106 F. It is fed from a 100V
variable frequency source. Find i) frequency at which current is maximum ii) impedance at this
frequency and iii) voltage across inductance at this frequency.
2. A series RLC circuit consists of R=100 ohm, L = 0.02 H and C = 0.02 microfarad. Calculate
frequency of resonance. A variable frequency sinusoidal voltage of constant RMS value of 50V is
applied to the circuit. Find the frequency at which voltage across L and C is maximum. Also
calculate voltage across L and C is maximum. Also calculate voltages across L and C at frequency
of resonance. Find maximum current in the circuit.
3. A resistance R and 2 microfarad capacitor are connected in series across a 200V direct supply.
Across the capacitor is a neon lamp that strikes at 120V. Calculate R to make the lamp strike 5 sec
after the switch has been closed. If R = 5Megohm, how long will it take the lamp to strike?
Evaluate
1. A Series RLC circuits has R=50 ohm, L= 0.2H, and C = 50 microfarad. Constant voltage of 100V
is impressed upon the circuit at t=0. Find the expression for the transient current assuming initially
relaxed conditions.
2. A Series RLC circuits with R=300 ohm, L=1H and C=100x106 F has a constant voltage of 50V
applied to it at t= 0. Find the maximum value of current ( Assume zero initial conditions)
3. For a source free RLC series circuit, the initial voltage across C is 10V and the initial current
through L is zero. If L = 20mH, C=0.5 microfarad and R=100 ohm. Evaluate i(t).
Create
1. Three load impedances are connected in star to a threephase supply with a line voltage of 208V.
The phase sequence is ABC. Given ZA = 10_0 _, ZB = 15_0 _and ZC = 10_30 _. Calculate
the three line currents IA, IB and IC and the voltage across the load impedances.
2. Three identical coils each having a resistance of 20 _ and a reactance of 20 _ are connected in i)
Star ii) Delta across 440 V, 3 phase supply. Calculate for each case, line current and reading in
each of the wattmeters connected to measure power.
Unit I
Basics of Circuit Analysis
Circuit elements and Kirchoffs laws. Phasor relationship for R, L and C. Impedance, Admittance. Solution
Methods: Mesh analysis super mesh analysis Nodal analysis super node analysis Source transformation
technique Star delta transformation. AC power  Average power, apparent power and power factor.
9 Hours
Unit II
Network Theorems
Thevenins theorem  Nortons theorem Super position theorem Maximum power transfer theoremReciprocity theorem  Compensation theorem Tellegens theorem Millman theorem.
9 Hours
Unit III
Transients
Differential Laplace Transform  Steady state and transient response: DC response of RL, RC and RLC
circuit  Sinusoidal response of RL, RC and RLC circuits.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Resonance and Coupled Circuits
Resonance: Natural frequency and Damping Ratio  Series Resonance  Parallel Resonance Quality
Factor. Coupled Circuits: Selfinductance  Mutual inductance Coupling Coefficient Transformer
Tuned Coupled Circuits.
9 Hours
Unit V
Concepts of Duality
Concept of duality, Dual network, Graphs of a network, Trees, twig, link and branches, Incidence matrix,
Tieset matrix and cutest matrix of a graph, Inverse networks and equalizers. Applications.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
25
Textbook(s)
1. William Hayt, J V Jack, E Kemmerly and Steven M Durbin, Engineering Circuits Analysis, Tata
McGrawHill, 2002.
2. Joseph Edminister and Mahmood Nahri, Theory and Problems of Electric Circuits Tata McGrawHill, 2002.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
A Sudhakar, S Shyammohan and Palli, Circuits and Network (Analysis and synthesis) Tata
McGrawHill, 2004.
L Robert Boylested, Experiments in Circuit Analysis to Accompany Introductory Circuit Analysis,
PHI , 2000.
M Russell, Mersereau and Joel R. Jackson, Circuit Analysis A System Approach, Pearson
Education, 2007.
11O108 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LABORATORY
(Common to all branches)
0 0 2 1.0
Objective(s)
To know how to execute experiments properly, presentation of observations and arrival of
conclusions.
It is an integral part of any science and technology program.
To view and realize the theoretical knowledge acquired by the students through experiments
At the end of the course, the students able to realize the theoretical knowledge acquired through
experiments.
Program Outcome(s)
a.
able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Preparation
Execution
Observation and Results
Record
Model Examination
Viva Voce
Total
Internal
Assessment
10
10
10
5
10
Semester End
Examination
15
15
15

5
50
5
50
Remember
1. Define rigidity modulus.
2. What is neutral axis?
3. Give an example for bad conductor.
4. What is frequency?
5. Define streamlined flow.
6. What is the principle of airwedge setup?
7. What is grating?
26
27
Why the radius of the wire to be measured more accurately in the determination of ?
Give the difference between longitudinal and linear stress.
Why the method is not suitable to determine the thermal conductivity of good conductor?
4.
5.
6.
7.
Experiment
Determination of moment of inertia and rigidity modulus of wire using torsion pendulum
(symmetrical masses method).
Determination of Youngs modulus by nonuniform bending.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lees disc.
Determination of frequency of vibrating rod using Meldes apparatus.
Determination of viscosity of a liquid  Poiseulles method.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire  air wedge method.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum grating.
Determination of refractive index of a liquid and solid using traveling microscope.
Determination of energy band gap of a semiconductor diode.
Determination of wavelength of LASER and particle size of a given powder.
Hours
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
28
9.
29
During absorption spectroscopy, complexing agents are added to colourless solution of given
species. Explain
10. Write the repeating unit of PVC and polystyrene.
11. What is meant by degree of polymerization?
Apply
1. What weight of oxalic acid is required to prepare 250 ml of 0.1N oxalic acid?
2. Derive the relationship between mg/l and ppm?
3. What is the significance of determining alkalinity of water?
4. Name the gases dissolved in water that cause corrosion.
5. Differentiate between acidity and alkalinity of water.
6. What is the significance of pH titration?
7. What are the advantages of conductometric titrations?
8. Give the significance of potentiometric titrations.
9. What is the significance of spectrophotometric studies?
10. Give some applications of UV Visible spectrophotometer in environmental pollution analysis.
11. Name two natural polymers which are used as textile fibres.
12. What is the molecular mass of polystyrene molecule containing 4000 monomers units?
13. What is the significance of determination of molecular weight of a polymer?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Is KMnO4 a primary standard? Give reason for your answer.
2. Why disodium salt of EDTA is chosen for determination of hardness?
3. Why does the color of the solution change from wine red to blue at the end point?
4. Why does hard water not lather with soap?
5. Which is the best method of hardness determination and why?
6. Why is the alkalinity of irrigation water determined?
7. Why is hydrogen electrode not generally used in pH measurements?
8. Why is ordinary water unsuitable for conductivity measurements?
9. Why should conductivity water be free of carbon dioxide?
10. Why cant absolute value of electrode potential be determined?
11. Why are sodium and potassium estimated in flame photometry?
12. Name the types of instruments employed in absorption measurements.
13. Why is the colour measured at 480 nm in the estimation of iron?
14. PVC is soft and flexible; whereas bakelite is hard and brittle. Why?
15. Are the polymeric materials polydisperse?
List of Experiments (Any ten experiments)
1. Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances oxalic acid, sodium
carbonate, sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid.
2. Determination of alkalinity in a water sample.
3. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometry method.
4. Determination of total, temporary and permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
5. Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.
6. Determination of strength of iron by potentiometric method using potassium dichromate.
7. Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method.
8. Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid by sodium hydroxide using pH meter.
9. Determination of sodium and potassium ions in water sample by flame photometric method.
10. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss measurements.
11. Comparison of alkalinities of the given water samples.
30
12. Comparison of total dissolved solids (TDS) and hardness of water in Bhavani river and Bannari
Amman Institute of Technology campus.
Total: 30 Hours
Practical Schedule
S.No
Experiment
Hours
Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances
oxalic acid, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid.
Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometry method.
Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.
Determination of strength of iron by potentiometric method using
potassium dichromate.
Determination of sodium and potassium ions in water sample by flame photometric method.
10
Comparison of total dissolved solids (TDS) and hardness of water in Bhavani river and Bannari
Amman Institute of Technology campus.
1
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze/ Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I3
Test II1
Model
Examination1
Semester End
Examination
20
40
20
40
20
40
30
10
100
30
10
100
30
10
100
20
40
30
10
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
Remember
1. Define Jacobian in two dimensions.
2. State Greens theorem.Define directional derivative of a vector point function.
3. Define analytic function.
4. What is the formula for finding the residue of a double pole?
5. State Cauchys integral formula.
6. Write the necessary condition for a function f (z) to be analytic.
7. Write the formula for unit normal vector?
8. Write all types of singularities.
9. State the sufficient conditions for a function of two variables to have an extremum at a point.
Understand
(u, v)
.
( x, y)
yx zx
u
u
u
2. If u f (
,
) showthat x 2
y2
z2
0.
xy
xz
x
y
z
1. If
2 x
f x, y dydx .
4.
5.
6.
7.
0 0
2
dw
given w = tan z.
dz
dz
9. Evaluate
where c is the circle z 1
2
(
z
3
)
c
4
10. Find the residue of the function f ( z ) 3
at its simple pole.
z ( z 2)
8.
Find
Apply
between
3.
them.
y 2 z 2 dxdydz taken
y 2 1 and 0 x 1 .
4.
2
F nds where F 4 xz i y j yz k
and S
is
5.
When the function f(z) = u + iv is analytic, show that U = constant and V = constant are
orthogonal.
31
1
.
z
6.
7.
8.
9.
where C is the boundary of the region defined by x=0, y=0 and x+y=1.
(3x
8 y 2 )dx (4 y 6 xy )dy
10. If
e z dz
where C is the Circle
( z 2 ) ( z 1) 2
z 3.
Analyze / Evaluate
x
1.
Prove that
2.
If
u
v
w
,y
,z
vw
wu
u v
2
2g 2g
2
2
2
4
(
x
y
)
u 2 v 2
x 2 y 2
xyzdxdydz
3.
4.
and
.
Evaluate the following integral by changing to spherical coordinates
x, y, z 0
x2 y 2 z 2 9
1 x 2
1 x 2 y 2
dxdydz
1 x2 y 2 z 2
5.
6.
7.
8.
cos 2
5 4 cos d .
Evaluate
9.
10. Expand
11.
f ( z)
z 1z 3
x2
dx
2
2
x 9 x 4
1 z 3 and 0 z 1 2
such that F
32
Unit I
Functions of Several Variables
Functions of two variables  Partial derivatives  Total differential  Derivative of implicit functions Maxima and minima  Constrained Maxima and Minima by Lagrangian Multiplier method  Jacobiansapplication to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Multiple Integrals
Double integration in cartesian and polar coordinates  Change of order of integration  change of
variables Area and volume by multiple integrals application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Vector Calculus
Gradient  divergence  curl line  surface and volume integrals  Greens  Gauss divergence and Stokes
theorems (statement only)  applications to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Analytic Functions
Analytic functions Necessary condition of analytic functionSufficient condition of analytic
function(statement only) properties  Determination of analytic function using Milne Thomsons method,
conformal mappings  Mappings of w= z + a, az, 1/z, ez bilinear transformation  application to
engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit V
Complex Integration
Cauchys fundamental theorem (statement only) and application of Cauchys integral formula(statement
only) Taylors and Laurents series classification of singularities Cauchys residue theorem (statement
only) Contour integration  circular and semi circular contours (excluding poles on the real axis)application to engineering problems
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi, 2000.
2. Kreyszig E, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008
Reference(s)
1. Ramana B.V, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGrawHill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi, 2007.
2. Bali N.P and Manish Goyal, Text book of Engineering Mathematics,3rd Edition, Laxmi
Publications(P)Ltd., 2008.
3. Glyn James. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 3rd Edition,Wiley India, 2007
4. George B. Thomas, Jr. and Ross L.Finney Calculus and Analytic Geometry, Addison Wesley
Publishing Company,1998.
5. Ray Wylie C and Barrett L.C, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, 2003.
11O202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
(Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
Imparting knowledge on principles of environmental science and engineering.
Understanding the concepts of ecosystem, biodiversity and impact of environmental pollution.
Awareness on value education, population and social issues.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate an awareness and understanding of professional, ethical, and social
responsibilities.
33
Course Outcome(s)
1. Awareness on natural resources and understanding environmental problems.
2. Realize the benefits of ecology and biodiversity.
3. Characterize and analyze different levels of pollution and its management techniques.
4. List human activities that may be responsible for global warming and cooling of earths
atmosphere and pave way for sustainable development.
5. Classify and understand about the relation between human population and environment.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
20
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
20
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
34
35
Unit I
Introduction to Environmental Studies and Natural Resources
Environment: Definition scope  importance need for public awareness. Forest resources: Use over
exploitation deforestation  case studies mining  effects on forests and tribal people. Water resources:
Use over utilization of surface and ground water floods drought  conflicts over water. Mineral
resources: Use exploitation  environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources  case
studies. Food resources: World food problems  changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing  effects of
modern agriculture fertilizerpesticide problems  water logging  salinity case studies. Energy resources:
Growing energy needs  renewable and non renewable energy sources. Land resources: Land as a resource land degradation  soil erosion. Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.
Documentation of the effect of degradation of forest resource.
9 Hours
Unit II
Ecosystems and Biodiversity
Concept of an ecosystem: Structure and function of an ecosystem producers  consumers decomposers
energy flow in the ecosystem ecological succession food chains  food webs and ecological pyramids.
Types of ecosystem: Introduction  characteristic features  forest ecosystem  grassland ecosystem  desert
ecosystem  aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries). Biodiversity:
Introduction definition (genetic  species ecosystem) diversity. Value of biodiversity: Consumptive use productive use social values ethical values  aesthetic values. Biodiversity level: Global  national local levels India as a mega diversity nation hotspots of biodiversity. Threats to biodiversity: Habitat loss
 poaching of wildlife man wildlife conflicts endangered and endemic species of India. Conservation of
biodiversity: Insitu and exsitu conservation of biodiversity  field study.
Documentation of the endangered flora and fauna in your native place.
9 Hours
Unit III
Environmental Pollution
Pollution: Definition air pollution  water pollution  soil pollution  marine pollution  noise pollution thermal pollution  nuclear hazards. Solid waste management: Causes  effects  control measures of urban
and industrial wastes. Role of an individual in prevention of pollution  pollution case studies. Disaster
management: Floods earthquake  cyclone  landslides. Electronic wastes.
Investigation on the pollution status of Bhavani river.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Social Issues and Environment
Sustainable development : Unsustainable to sustainable development urban problems related to energy.
Water conservation  rain water harvesting  watershed management. Resettlement and rehabilitation of
people. Environmental ethics: Issues  possible solutions climate change  global warming and its effects
on flora and fauna  acid rain  ozone layer depletion  nuclear accidents  nuclear holocaust  wasteland
reclamation  consumerism and waste products. Environment protection act: Air (Prevention and Control
of Pollution) act water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act wildlife protection act forest
conservation act issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation.
Analyze the recent steps taken by government of India to prevent pollution.
9 Hours
Unit V
Human Population and Environment
Human population: Population growth  variation among nations population explosion family welfare
programme and family planning environment and human health Human rights value education HIV/
36
AIDS, Swine flu women and child welfare . Role of information technology in environment and human
health.
Population explosion in India, China the present and future scenario.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2010 .
S. Divan, Environmental Law and Policy in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2001.
K. D. Wager, Environmental Management, W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.
W. P. Cunningham, Environmental Encyclopedia, Jaico Publising House, Mumbai, 2004.
http://unfccc.int/2860.php
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE II
3 1 0 3.5
11I204 MATERIALS SCIENCE
(Common to CSE, EEE, ECE, EIE and IT)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To explain the properties of conducting, semiconducting and dielectric materials.
To impart fundamental knowledge in optical materials.
To enable the students to understand the magnetic materials.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Making to learn electrical properties of metals, electron energies of metals and Fermi energy.
2. Study the different types of semiconductor based on carrier nature.
3. Understanding the various polarization mechanisms in dielectrics.
4. Utilization of domain theory to explain hysteresis loop.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Semester End
Examination
25
25
20
20
10

Model
Examination
20
25
20
20
15

100
100
100
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
20
25
20
20
15

The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
37
Remember
1. Define relaxation time and collision time.
2. Give the postulates of free electron theory.
3. Give the drawbacks of classical free electron theory.
4. Define drift velocity.
5. State DrudeLorentz theory.
6. What is the probability function f(E) of an electron occupying an energy level E?
7. What are intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors?
8. Give the broad classification of semiconductors based on carriers.
9. State Hall effect.
10. Define photovoltaic effect.
11. Mention the applications of pin photo diode.
12. Write a short note on dipole and dipole moment.
13. List the properties of dielectrics.
14. Write the expressions for electronic and ionic polarization.
15. What is meant by local field in solid dielectrics?
16. Write the ClausiusMosotti equation for a solid dielectric.
17. Define dielectric breakdown.
18. Define the term fluorescence.
19. What is the sufficient condition for the phosphorescence?
20. What is the principle of LED?
21. Define plastic encapsulation.
22. Write a note on liquid crystal state.
23. Write the drawbacks of LCD.
24. List the advantages of CDROM.
25. What is meant by magnetic flux density?
26. Write notes on (i) retentivity (ii) coercivity
27. What is meant by domain?
28. Mention the applications of soft magnetic materials.
29. Mention some materials used for magnetic recording.
Understand
1. How the free electron theory proved to be wrong in terms of thermal conductivity by WiedemannFranz law?
2. Explain the variation of FermiDirac distribution function with temperature.
3. Elucidate the significance of probability function when (i) f(E)=1 (ii) f(E)=0 (ii)f(E)=0.5
4. Calculate the density of electron at 0K.
5. What are the importances of Fermi energy?
6. Why the extrinsic semiconductors are preferred over intrinsic semiconductors?
7. Prove that the Fermi level lies at the middle of the energy gap in intrinsic semiconductor.
8. Give the importance of band gap energy.
9. What are the differences between donor ad acceptor energy level?
10. Is it possible to measure the magnetic field using Hall Effect? Explain.
11. How the photo voltaic effect is utilized in solar cells?
12. All the dielectrics are insulators, but why all the insulators are not dielectrics?
13. Why the orientation polarization occurs only in polar molecules?
14. Prove that the internal field of the atoms is larger than the applied field.
15. Why the chemical and electrochemical breakdowns have close relationship with thermal
breakdown?
16. What are the changes observed in BaTiO3 with change in temperature?
17. How can you increase the emission time in luminescence?
18. How the electroluminescence is used in LED?
19. Why the wavelength of the emitted photons in LED depends on energy gap in the semiconductor?
20. Why LCD comes under passive display device?
21. How the data in CDROM is read out?
38
22.
23.
24.
25.
Discuss the reasons for the failure of classical free electron theory.
What is the reason for low contribution of electrons to the heat capacity of metals?
Sketch the variation of Fermi level with temperature.
Explain how phosphorous atoms donate electrons to the conduction band?
Where are the donor and acceptor levels located in an impurity semiconductor? Why?
Explain how photo pin diodes are used in fiber optical communication?
Graphically explain frequency dependence of dielectrics.
Why at low temperature the total polarization is maximum?
Deduce ClausiusMosotti relation and explain its use in predicting the dielectric constant of the
solids.
Why phosphorescence is called delayed fluorescence?
Explain the reason for the formation of domain in ferromagnetism and how the hysteresis curve is
explained on the basis of the domain theory?
Discuss the bearing of domain theory in soft and hard magnetic materials.
Give an account of the origin of atomic magnetization and which source is important in the
ferromagnetic materials?
Explain the spontaneous magnetization possessed by ferromagnetic material below Curie point.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.
2. Differentiate ptype and ntype semiconductors.
3. Compare dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.
4. Differentiate soft and hard magnetic materials.
5. Compare LED and LCD.
Unit I
Electrical properties of Metals
Introduction  Derivation of microscopic form of Ohms law postulates of classical free electron theoryderivation of electrical conductivity of metals (Drude Lorentz theory) merits and demerits. Derivation of
thermal conductivity WiedemannFranz law verification. Electron energies in metal and Fermi energyFermiDirac distribution function and its variation with temperature density of energy states calculation of
density of electron and fermi energy at 0K average energy of free electron at 0K Importance of fermi
energy problems.
Quantum free electron theory and Band theory of solids.
9 Hours
Unit II
Semiconducting Materials & Devices
Introduction  elemental and compound semiconductors  Intrinsic semiconductors: density of electrons density of holes determination of carrier concentration and position of Fermi energy band gap energy
determination (quantitative treatment). Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration in ptype and ntype
semiconductors. Hall effect theory of Hall effect experimental determination of Hall voltageapplications. Semi conducting devices: solar cells (Photovoltaic effect) uses. Photo detectors: pin photo
diodes applications.
Variation of Fermi level with temperature and doping concentration in extrinsic semiconductors.
9 Hours
39
Unit III
Dielectrics
Introduction fundamental definitions in dielectrics expressions for electronic, ionic and orientation
polarization mechanisms space charge polarization Langevin Debye equation frequency and
temperature effects on polarization dielectric loss internal field expression for internal field (cubic
structure) derivation of ClausiusMosotti equation importance. Dielectric breakdown various
breakdown mechanisms with characteristics applications of dielectric materials and insulating materialsproblems.
Charging and discharging of capacitors.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Optical Materials
Introductionfluorescence and phosphorescence technique of increasing the emission time. Light Emitting
Diode: principle, construction and workingapplications. Liquid crystal display: general propertiesdynamic scattering display twisted nematic display applications comparison between LED and LCD.
Disk data storage recording and read out of data in CDROM principle  magneto optic disk.
Various data storage and retrieval techniques.
9 Hours
Unit V
Magnetic Materials
Introductionorbital magnetic moment and spin magnetic momentBohr magnetonbasic definitions
properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materialsdomain theory of ferro magnetismprocess of domain
magnetizationreversible and irreversible domainsexplanation of hysteresis curve based on domain theoryhard and soft magnetic materialsrecording and read out process in floppy disk and magnetic bubble
memorycomparison between floppy disk and bubble memoryproblems.
Magnetic shift register.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. V. Rajendran, Materials Science, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.
2. M. Arumugam, Physics II, Anuradha Publications, Kumbakonam, 2005.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2006.
M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2005.
P.K. Palanisami, Physics For Engineers, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 200
V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.
M. R. Srinivasan, Physics for Engineers, Reprint, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2002.
40
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Semester End
Examination
10
30
20
40

Model
Examination
10
30
20
40

100
100
100
Test I
Test II
10
30
20
40
100
10
30
20
40

Remember
1. State the principle of dc generator.
2. Define Motor.
3. List the types of generator.
4. Write the voltage and current relations for DC Generator and Motor.
5. Define armature reaction.
6. Draw the characteristics of DC Shunt Generator.
7. Define Transformation ratio.
8. List the properties of an Ideal Transformer.
9. What is meant by Voltage Regulation?
10. Mention the use of breather in transformer.
11. Is the rotor slot parallel to the shaft in three phase Induction motor? Justify with your answer.
12. Define Hunting in synchronous machine.
13. List the types of rotor in synchronous motor.
14. Write the EMF equation of alternator.
15. How hunting can be avoided in synchronous machine.
16. Distinguish between lap winding and wave winding used in dc machine.
17. Write the number of parallel paths in a lap and wave connected windings
18. What are the two types of 3phase induction motor?
19. Write the two extra features of slip ring induction motors.
20. Can we add extra resistance in series with squirrel cage rotor? State the reason?
21. What are slip rings?
22. Why synchronous motor is not self starting?
23. What are the methods employed for making the synchronous motor self starting?
24. What is synchronous condenser?
Understand
1. Draw the performance characteristics curve of DC shunt, series, compound generator.
2. Derive the EMF equation of DC generator.
3. Explain the different types of DC generators.
4. Derive the equation for torque developed in DC motor
5. Draw the mechanical and electrical characteristics of DC shunt, series, compound motors.
6. Explain the different types of induction motor.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
41
7.
8.
9.
10.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Analyze
1. Analyze the performance of given transformer and evaluate the core loss and copper loss
occurring in it.
2. Analyze the performance of given alternator and evaluate the voltage regulation of it by using
MMF and MMF methods
3. Why single phase induction motor is not self starting and how to start the motor?
Unit I
D.C. Machines
Constructional details EMF equation Methods of excitation Self and separately excited generators
Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators Principle of operation of D.C. motor Back
EMF and torque equation Characteristics of series, shunt and compound motors Starting of DC motors
Types of starters Speed control of DC shunt motors.
Application of DC Machines for battery charging applications
9 Hours
Unit II
Transformers
Constructional details Principle of operation emf equation Transformation ratio Transformer on no
load Parameters referred to HV/LV windings Equivalent circuit Transformer on load Regulation
Testing Load test, open circuit and short circuit tests.
.
Transformers connections
9 Hours
Unit III
Induction Motors
Construction Types Principle of operation of three phase induction motors Equivalent circuit
Performance calculation Starting and speed control Singlephase induction motors (only qualitative
treatment).
Construction, working and application of single phase Induction Motors
9 Hours
Unit IV
Synchronous Machines
Construction of synchronous machines Types EMF equation Voltage regulation; EMF and MMF
methods Brushless alternators Construction, principle and Methods of starting of synchronous motors
V curves and inverted V curves Hunting Synchronous Condenser.
Study of Synchronous motor
9 Hours
42
Unit V
Special Type of Machines
Starting methods  Reluctance motor Hysteresis motor Stepper motor Universal Motor Brushless
DC Motor Switched reluctance motor.
Applications and speed control of Special Machines
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
Mehta V.K. and Rohit Mehta, Principles of Electrical machines, S.Chand and Company Ltd,
Third Edition, 2011
Reference(s)
1. Bhattacharya S.K., Electrical Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company Ltd, second
edition, 1998.
2. Mehta V.K. and Rohit Mehta, Principles of Power System, S.Chand and Company Ltd, Third
Edition, 2012.
3. Wadhwa C.L., Electrical Machines, Wiley eastern Ltd India, 2008.
4. William Henry Timbie, Vannevar Bush, Principles of electrical engineering, Wiley, 2006
5. Kothari D.P. and Nagrath I.J., Basic Electrical Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, second edition, 2009.
11L206 ANALOG ELECTRONICSI
2 0 2 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand the working principle of different semiconductor devices..
To gain knowledge on special semiconductor devices and applications..
To aquair knowledge about transistor biasing
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results
Course Outcome(s)
1. Design of circuits using Diode.
2. Design a switch and amplifier using BJT
3. Design an inverter using FET
4. Design a regulated power supply for a given voltage using Zener diode.
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
examination
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
30
30
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
05
05
05
05
Total
100
100
100
100
1.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20.The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks
43
Remember
1. Why silicon is used rather than germanium?
2. Define forward bias and reverse bias
3. List the cutin voltages of germanium and silicon.
4. Differentiate between Avalanche break down and zener break down.
5. List the gain of different types of oscillator.
6. Mention the advantages of low frequency and high frequency oscillators.
7. List the specification of diode.
8. List the application of diode and zener diode.
9. Why zenerdiode is used as a regulator?
10. Why CE configuration is mostly used in the design of amplifiers?
11. What are different type of Configuration used in BJT and FET?
12. What is h Parameter?
13. Why h parameter is used in small signal analysis?
14. What is biasing?
15. Why FET is used mostly rather than BJT?
16. Differentiate AC and DC load line?
17. What is thyristor?
18. What is thermistor?
19. What is sensistor?
20. List the factor which effects the Q point of Load line?
Understand
1. Behavior of non linear characteristics of Diode.
2. Use of Coupling capacitors and bypass capacitor in amplifier circuit.
3. Significance of Reverse bias in zener diode.
4. What are the advantages of Tunnel diodes?
5. Role of stability analysis in BJT
6. What are the advantages of Voltage divider bias over other bias?
7. What is resistive region in FET?
8. Application of FET in Three different regions.
9. What is PIN diode?
10. What are the applications of Tunnel diode?
Apply
1.
2.
44
2.
3.
Design a Single stage MOS amplifier with overall voltage gain of a common source amplifiers for
which trans conductance = 2mA/V, ro = 50K RD = 10K, Rg = 10M
An AA flash light cell whose thevinen equivalent is a voltage source of 1.5 V and resistance of 1
is connected to the terminal of ideal diode what are the diode current and terminal voltage when
the connections between the diode cathode and positive terminal of the battery and vice versa.
Unit I
Semiconductor Diodes
Semiconductor diodes: Construction of PN junction diodes VI Characteristics  Quantitative theory of PN
diode current components Diode Resistance Transition and Diffusion capacitances  Effect of
temperature on PN junction diodes characteristics Model of Diode Diode specification Clipping &
Clamping Circuits Voltage multipliers using diodes Half wave and full wave rectifier,SMPS.
6 Hours
Unit II
Bipolar Junction Transistors
Bipolar Junction Transistors: Construction of a transistor Principle of transistor action Current
components input and output characteristics of a transistor in CE,CB,CC configurations cut off, active,
saturation and breakdown regions Current gain in CE,CB,CC configurations h parameter model for
BJT BJT specification
6 Hours
Unit III
Field Effect Transistors & UJT
Field Effect Transistors: Construction and characteristics of JFET parameters of JFET MOSFET
Depletion & enhancement modes FET in CS,CD,CG configurations equivalent circuits of FET at low
frequencies FET model at high Frequencies FET specification. Construction, Theory of operation &
characteristics of UJT, PUT
6 Hours
Unit IV
Special Semiconductor Device
Construction & Characteristics of Zener Diode, Tunnel Diode PIN Diode Varactor Diode. Construction
& Characteristics of SCR Two Transistor Equivalent Circuits Applications TRIAC &DIAC
Applications of Zener diode as voltage regulatorconcepts of regulations.
6 Hours
Unit V
Transistor Biasing
Operating pointBias StabilityCollectortoBase bias or Collector Feedback bias Emitter Feedback BiasCollector Emitter Feedback BiasSelf BiasEmitter Bias or Voltage Divider biasStabilization against
variations in VBE and for the Self Bias CircuitGeneral Remarks on Collector Current StabilityBias
CompensationBiasing Circuits for linear Integrated Circuitsthermistor and sensistor compensationThermal RunawayThermal Stability. Biasing the FET
6 Hours
Total: 30 + 30 Hours
Lab Components:
(Simulation using Pspice is required)
1. Diode characteristics.
2. Clipper and Clampers.
3. Rectifier circuits.
4. Characteristics of BJT.
5. Characteristics of FET and UJT.
Textbook(s)
1. J Millman, C. Halkias&Satyabrata JIT Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGrawHill,
2007.
2. L Robert Boylestead, Louis Nashelsky, "Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory" Pearson
Education 2006.
45
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Nandita Das Gupta and Amitava Das Gupta, Semiconductor Devices Modeling and
Technology, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
Donald A. Neaman, Semiconductor Physics and Devices Tata McGrawHill 2002.
Ben G. Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, SolidState Electronic Devices, Pearson Education 2000.
David A. Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
11L207 NETWORKS AND TRANSMISSION LINES
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To analyze and synthesize the two port networks.
To analyze the filters.
To become familiar with propagation of signals through lines.
To calculate various line parameters by conventional and graphical methods.
Need for impedance matching and different impedance matching techniques.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome(s)
1. Determine the characteristics Impedance and Propagation constant of various networks.
2. Determine various network parameters.
3. Synthesis RL & RC and LC networks.
4. Design all type of filters.
5. Calculate the input and load impedance /admittance
6. Determine the VSWR and Reflection coefficient
7. Evaluate reflection loss
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
30
25
20
15
10
0
100
25
25
20
15
10
05
100
Model
Examination
25
30
15
10
15
05
100
Semester End
Examination
25
30
15
10
15
05
100
Remember
1. Define two port Network.
2. List the different types of networks.
3. Define poles and zeros of 2 port network.
4. List the equation for Z, Y, h, T parameters.
5. Whether pole or zero determines the response of a system, why?
The marks secured in Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks
46
Z 0 69212o ohms.
3.
4.
Create
1. Design a BPF for a upper cut off frequency as 20KHz and lower cut off frequency of 2KHz.
2. Design a single stub match for a load of 150 +j 225 ohms for a 75 ohms line at
500MHz using smith chart.
Unit I
Network Analysis and TwoPort Parameters
Terminal polls  'Network functions for one part and two port Ladder network  General networks  Poles
47
and zeros of network functions Time domain behavior from the poles and zero plot  Inter Relationship of
two port variables Open circuit impedance parameters, short circuit admittance parameters . Transmission,
(T) parameters  Hybrid (h) parameters  Inverse hybrid (h) and transmission parameters and
representation  Lattice networks  Image parameters.
9 Hours
Unit II
Network Synthesis
Hurwitz polynomials  Positive real functions  Synthesis of reactive one port by Foster and Cauer method Synthesis of RL, RC, and LC networks by Foster and  Cauer methods.
9 Hours
Unit III
Filters
First order low pass and high pass c filters  Band pass and band reject filters All pass filters  Higher
order active filters  Design of constant  K, M  derived and composite filters.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Transmission Line Theory
Different types of transmission lines Definition of characteristic impedance the transmission line as a
cascade of TSections  Definition of Propagation Constant.General Solution of the transmission line physical significance of the equation and the infinite line  wavelength and velocity of
propagation.Waveform distortion distortion less transmission line the telephone cable Inductance
loading of telephone cables. Input impedance of lossless lines reflection on a line not terminated by Zo Meaning of reflection coefficient reflection factor and reflection loss.
9 Hours
Unit V
The Line at Radio Frequencies
Standing waves and standing wave ratio on a line Input impedance of a lossless line terminated by
impedance One eighth wave line The quarter wave line and impedance matching the half wave line.
The circle diagram for the dissipation less line The Smith Chart Application of the Smith Chart single
stub matching and double stub matching.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. J.D.Ryder, Networks, Lines and Fields, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2010.
2. M.E. Van Valkenburg., "Networks Analysis ", Prentice Hall of India, 2005.
Reference(s)
1. A. Sudhakar and S.P.Shyammohan, "Circuits and Networks  Analysis and Synthesis", Tata
McGraw Hill, 2001.
2. UmeshSinha, "Network Analysis and Synthesis", SatyaPrakashan, 1997.
3. UmeshSinha, "Transmission lines and Networks", SatyaPrakashan, 2005.
4. FrankelinKuo, " Network analysis & Synthesis", McGrawHiII, 1990.
11O208 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
Common for CE,EEE,ME,BT,IT & TT (I Semester); AE,CSE,ECE,EIE & FT (II Semester)
2 0 2 3.0
Objective(s)
Understand and appreciate the importance of Engineering Graphics in Engineering
Understand the basic principles of Technical/Engineering Drawing
Understand the different steps in producing drawings according to BIS conventions
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
48
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Preparation
Remember
Understand
Apply
Observation and Results
Analyze
Evaluate
Record
Miniproject/ Model examination / Vivavoce
Total
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
15
15
10
25
10
15
10
50
50
Remember
1. Define Graphic communication or Drawing.
2. List the different drawing instruments.
3. What is blueprint?
4. What are the applications of engineering graphics?
5. What are the two types of drawings?
6. What are the different types of projections?
7. Define Orthographic projection.
8. What do you mean by I angle projection?
9. What is III angle projection?
10. Define Plan.
11. What is Elevation?
12. List the various types of lines.
13. What do you mean by a Plane?
14. Name the five standard sizes of drawing sheets that are specified by BIS.
15. Give the BIS codes for Lettering, Dimensioning and lines.
16. State few important dimensioning rules.
17. What are the two types of Solids?
18. What is Representative Fraction (RF)?
19. What is a Frustum?
20. Define Truncation.
21. Define Section Plane and give its types.
22. What do you mean by development of surfaces?
23. State the principle of Isometric projection.
24. What is Isometric View?
25. Define Isometric scale.
Understand
1. When an object is said to be in III quadrant?
2. Why are the projectors perpendicular to the Projection Plane in the Orthographic projection?
3. What is the Shape of the section obtained when a cone is cut by a plane passing through the apex
and center of the base of the cone?
4. Why II and IV angle projections are not used in industries?
49
5.
6.
7.
What are the differences between I angle and III angle projections?
Which method is suitable for developing a truncated prism?
Why is a hexagonal headed bolt and nut more common in use as compared to square headed bolt
and nut?
8. Which is the most suitable method for drawing the Perspective Projection?
9. What are the prerequisites for Free hand sketching?
10. What are the two methods used to obtain the Isometric view of a circle?
11. Why CAD is preferred over Conventional drafting?
Apply/Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
How will you project a point which is above HP and in front of VP?
How will you project a point which is below HP and behind VP?
What is the method used to determine the True length and inclination of a line inclined to both the
planes?
4. How will you project a prism whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP by Change of
Position method?
5. How will you project a cylinder when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to HP by change of
position method?
6. How will you project a pyramid whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP by Change of
Position method?
7. How will you project a cone when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to HP by change of
position method?
8. How will you obtain the Sectional view of solids in simple vertical position cut by planes inclined
to any one reference plane?
9. How will you develop the lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids?
10. How will you develop the complete surfaces of Frustums?
Create
1. Construct an isometric scale.
2. A cricket ball thrown from the ground level reaches the wicket keepers gloves. Maximum height
reached by the ball is 5m. The ball travels a horizontal distance of 11m from the point of
projection. Trace the path of the ball.
3. The Pictorial view of an object is shown below. Draw the following views to full size scale.
a) Elevation in the direction of arrow
b) Left end elevation
c) Plan
4.
Read the dimensioned drawing shown below. Redraw the figure to full size and dimension it as
per Indian Standards.
50
Unit I
Concepts and Conventions
Use of drafting instruments BIS conventions and specifications Size, layout and folding of drawing
sheets Lettering and dimensioning. General principles of orthographic projection First angle projection
Layout of views Projection of points, located in all quadrant and straight lines located in the first
quadrant Determination of true lengths and true inclinations. Conics: Different types and applications
Construction by Eccentricity method.
6 Hours
Unit II
Projections of Solids
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one
reference plane by change of position method. Projection of Planes inclined to any one reference plane.
6 Hours
Unit III
Sections of Solids and Development of Surfaces
Sectioning of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical position by cutting planes
inclined to one Reference: plane Obtaining the true shape of section. Development of lateral surfaces of
simple solids prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Intersection of Solids.
6 Hours
Unit IV
Isometric Projection and Perspective Projection
Principles of isometric projection isometric scale isometric projections of simple solids, pyramids,
cylinders and cones. Orthographic projection  Systems of orthographic projection  First angle
orthographic projection  Conversion of pictorial to orthographic views (Free hand).
Perspective projections: Perspective projection of solids by vanishing point method.
6 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to AutoCAD and 2D Modelling
Starting AutoCAD Interfaces Menus Tool bars Coordinates Limits Units 2D commands
Drawing Commands  Creating a Point, Construction of Lines, Polyline, Multiline, Circles, Arcs,
Rectangle, Polygon, Ellipse, Hatch, Text, Mtext, Linetypes Edit and Modify commands  Copy, Move,
51
Erase, Mirror, Zoom, Pan, Arrays, Trim, Break, Fillet, Chamfer, Redraw, Regen, Dimensioning, Colors,
Layers Exercises. Introduction to 3D modeling.
6 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. K. V. Natarajan, A Textbook: of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2006.
Reference(s)
1. S. Julyes Jaisingh, Engineering Graphics, Tri Sea Publishers, 2010
2. V. Rameshbabu, Engineering Graphics, VRB Publishers Pvt Ltd., 2009.
3. K. Venugopal, Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002.
4. N. D. Bhatt, Engineering Drawing, Charotar publishing House 2003.
5. K. L. Narayana and P. Kannaiah, Engineering Graphics, Scitech Publications (Pvt) Limited2002
Total: 30 +30 Hours
List of Experiments
1.
2.
3.
4.
Experiment
Hours
Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the
planes.
Projection of Solids when the axis is inclined to one reference plane by change
of position method.
Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using
AutoCAD.
10
52
53
54
Understand
1. Compare the Refrigeration system with air Condition system?
2. How the refrigeration system works?
3. How will you select the suitable welding process for various materials?
4. How will make a V joint in the given MS flat?
5. How will you make a green sand mould using solid pattern? How gadget like chair, sofa,table, cell
phone stand by using welding joints?
6. How will make English letters from A to Z by using carpentry tools with screw, bolt and nut?
7. How metals are manufactured by using casting process?
8. How cavity is formed by using pattern?
9. How the wires are joined by soldering?
Apply / Evaluate
1. Sketch the line diagram of the plumbing work carried out in your house.
2. Sketch the wiring diagram for a room consist of two fans, three tubelights, and one plug point.
3. Sketch all the wooden furniture present in your house in three dimensional view.
4. How will make a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps?
5. How will form Staircase and Godown wiring?
Create
1. Prepare a hexagonal shape pen stand by using power tools.
2. Prepare a cover with handle by using sheet metal to cover a motor.
3. Prepare a small trolley to carry wastage by using welding work.
List of Experiments
1. Forming of simple objects using sheet metal.
2. Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat.
3. Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump.
4. Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints.
5. Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power tools.
6. Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps.
7. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Washing Machine/ Refrigerator and Window
Air Conditioner.
8. Study of Discrete components and bread board.
9. Demonstration of Storage Oscilloscopes and Function Generator.
10. Soldering Practice
11. Verification of Ohms law, Kirchhoff Voltage and Current laws.
12. Verification of Superposition, Thevinen and Nortons Theorems
Total: 30 Hours
Practical Schedule
SI. No.
Experiment
1
Forming of simple objects using sheet metal.
Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat.
2
Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump.
3
Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints.
4
Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power tools.
5
Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Hou
rs
3
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
To obtain the knowledge of expressing periodic functions as Fourier series, Fourier transform and
Z transform which is used to analyze signals in signal processing.
Ability to solve boundary value problems in heat and wave equation using partial differential
equations.
Programme Outcome(s)
a.
able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering
Course Outcome(s)
1. Acquire more knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics.
2. To improve problem evaluation technique.
3. Choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem.
Assessment pattern
S. No
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
1
2
3
4
5
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze/ Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I4
Test II1
Model
Examination1
20
40
20
40
20
40
30
10
100
30
10
100
30
10
100
Semester
End
Examination
20
40
30
10
100
Remember
1. State the Dirichlets Conditions
2. Define even and odd function graphically
3. Write down the complex Fourier transform pair
4. State convolution theorem in Fourier transform
5. Define unilateral and bilateral Ztransform of {f(n)}
6. State initial value theorem in Ztransform
7. Define complete solution of a partial differential equation
8. Write the complementary function of non homogeneous second order equations of distinct and
repeated roots
9. What does a2 represent in the equation ytt = a2yxx ?
10. Write any two solutions of the Laplace equation obtained by the method of separation of variables
Understand
1.
2.
3.
Solve
p y x
2DD D z x y e
2
z2 q z y 2 x 2 .
2n 1
n 0
x y
.
Find the halfrange cosine series for the function
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
55
4.
x
f ( x)
2 x
0 x 1
1 x 2
5.
1
.
2
n 1, 3, 5,.. n
Hence evaluate
1 x
f x
0
sin x
0 x dx and
for x 1
.
for  x  1
4
sin x
x dx.
0
6.
f ( x) cos x dx = e
4z3
7. Find inverse transform
2 z 12 z 1
2n 3
8. Find Z transform of
.
n 1n 2
9.
8z 2
2 z 14 z 1
10. Give a function which is self reciprocal under Fourier sine and cosine transform.
Apply
1.
Find the PDE of all planes having equal intercepts on the x and y axis.
2.
3.
4.
A function y=f(x) is given by the following table of values. Make the harmonic analysis
of the function in (0,T) up to the second harmonic.
X
0
T/6
T/3
T/2
2T/3
5T/6
T
Y
0
9.2
14.4
17.8
17.3
11.7
0
5.
6.
Obtain the constant term and the first harmonic in the Fourier series expansion in (0,12) for the
function y = f(x) defined by the table below
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
f (x)
1.8
1.1
0.3
0.16
0.5
1.5
2.16
1.88
1.25 1.30 1.76 2.00
A taut string of length L is fastened at both ends. The midpoint of the string is taken to a height of
b and then released from rest in this position. Find the displacement of the string at any time t.
7. A string is stretched between two fixed points at a distance 2L apart and the points of the string
are given initial velocities v where
v = cx /L
0 < x <L
= c ( 2L  x) /L
L < x < 2L . x being the distance from an end point. Find the
displacement of the string at any subsequent time.
8. A rod 30 cm long, has its ends A and B at 20C and 80C respectively, until steady state conditions
prevail. The temperature at the end B is then suddenly reduced to 60 C and at the end A is raised
to 40 C and maintained so. Find the resulting temperature u (x,t).
56
9.
A rectangular plate with insulated surface is 10 cm wide so long compared to its width that it may
be considered infinite length .If the temperature along the short edge y=0 is given by 8 sin(x ) ,
10
while the two long edges x=0 and x=10 as well as the other short edge are kept at 0 0c . Find the
steady state temperature.
10. Solve the equation y n 2 7 y n1 12 y n 2 , given that y0 y1 0 .
n
Analyze/ Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
Evaluate
dx
using transform method.
x a x2 b2
5.
Evaluate
x
0
6.
7.
8.
dx
2
and
2 2
x 2 dx
2
a2
ax
Find Fourier sine transform of e
, a >0.
x
Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of eax , a > 0 and hence find Fourier sine and
cosine transform of x eax.
a2 x2
x2
2
57
solution of twodimensional heat equation (Insulated edges excluded ) Fourier series solutions in
Cartesian coordinates .
9Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. B. S .Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi ,2000.
2. Kreyszig E, Advanced Engineering Mathematics , 8th Edition , John Wiley & Sons,
Inc,Singapore (2008).
Reference Book(s)
1. Ramana B.V, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGrawHill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2007.
2. Bali N.P and Manish Goyal, Text book of Engineering Mathematics,3rd Edition, Laxmi
Publications(P)Ltd., 2008.
3. Ray Wylie C and Louis Barrett C, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGrawHill Publishing
Company Ltd, 2003.
4. Glyn James. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 3rd Edition,Wiley India, 2007
11L302 DATA STRUCTURES
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To learn the basics of abstract data types in data structures.
To learn the principles of linear and non linear data structures.
To build an application using sorting and searching.
Program Outcome(s)
b. able to demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
d. able to demonstrate critical reasoning and problem solving abilities including the use of
simulation software for designing and troubleshooting.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to understand the model of Abstract Data Type, calculation of algorithm efficiency and
designing of recursive algorithms.
2. Able to understand the concepts and applications of Stack, Queue and Linked list.
3. Able to analyze various sorting and searching algorithms.
4. Able to know the usage of NonLinear Data structures in the application of trees such as Binary
Search tree, AVL Search tree and Heap tree.
5. Able to find the shortest path and minimum spanning tree for the given graph.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
20
20
30
20
10
100
20
20
30
20
10
100
Model
Examination
10
20
30
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
10
20
30
20
10
10
100
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
58
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Apply
1.
Analyze
1. Differentiate linear and non linear data structure.
2. Contrast ADT implementation of array and linked list.
3. Compare internal and external sorting.
4. Differentiate between binary tree and binary search tree.
5. Compare linear and binary search.
6. Distinguish DFS and BFS.
Evaluate
1. Evaluate the best case and worst case complexity for searching algorithms.
2. Can stack be used to perform queue operations? Judge.
59
Create
1. Develop an application using a stack /Queue /List /Tree that reflects on real world problem.
Unit I
Introduction
Pseudo codeAbstract Data typesModel for an ADTADT ImplementationsAlgorithm EfficiencyDesigning Recursive AlgorithmsRecursive Examples.
Analysis of various algorithm
9 Hours
Unit II
Linear List: Stacks, Queues and Lists
Arrays Basic Stack OperationStack ADT  Applications of Stack Queues Operations Queue ADT
Queue ApplicationsList ADT CircularDoubly Linked List.
Analysis of Stack, Array and Lists
9 Hours
Unit III
Sorting and Searching
Sorting: Insertion SortSelection SortBubble Sort  Merge sort Quick sort Heap sortshell sortExternal
Sorts.Searching: Sequential search Binary Search.  Hashing General Idea Hash Function Separate
Chaining Open Addressing Linear Probing.
Analysis of various sorting algorithms
9 Hours
Unit IV
Non Linear List: Trees
Basic Tree concepts  Binary Trees Tree Traversals Expression TreesBinary Search Trees AVL
Search TreesHeap conceptsImplementationHeap ADTHeap Applications: Priority Queue.
Analysis between binary and AVL trees
9 Hours
Unit V
Graphs
Definitions Traverse Graph: Depth first TraversalBreadth first TraversalShortest Path Algorithms:
Unweighted Shortest Paths Dijkstras Algorithm. Minimum Spanning Tree: Prims Algorithm Kruskals
Algorithm.
Applications of Dijkstras Algorithm
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. A. Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Pearson Education, 2009.
Reference(s)
1. F.RichardGilberg, A.Behrouz. Forouzan, Data Structures A Pseudocode Approach with C,
Thomson,2007.
2. Y.Langsam, M. J.Augenstein and A. M.Tenenbaum, Data Structures using C, Pearson Education,
2004.
3. A. M.AhoHopcroft and J.D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson education, 2000.
11L303 SIGNAL AND SYSTEMS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To make the students to understand Continuous time and discrete time signals and systems.
To analyze the signals and systems using different transforms
To acquire the basic knowledge of FIR and IIR systems
Program Outcome(s)
a.
60
g.
h.
able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments a
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
j. able to demonstrate critical reasoning and problem solving abilities including the use of
simulation software for designing and troubleshooting.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
Able to identify and differentiate the various types of signals, their responses and properties.
Able to analyze the continuous time signals and systems using Fourier series and Fourier
transform and also to understand their properties in order to solve the frequency response of LTICT systems.
3. Able to explore the discrete time signals and systems using Fourier series and Fourier transform
and also to understand their properties in order to solve the frequency response of LTIDT
systems.
4. Able to apply Nyquist criteria for sampling the continuous time signal to get an appropriate
discrete time signal and to study the reconstruction of a signal and aliasing effects.
5. Able to realize the system structure using Ztransform and Laplace Transform.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
20
20
30
20
10
100
20
20
30
20
10
100
Model
Examination
10
20
30
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
10
20
30
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. Define Signal and Systems
2. Give the properties of signals and systems
3. Give the broad classification of signals.
4. Define continuous and discrete time signal.
5. Define signal power and energy.
6. What is the relation between unit impulse, unit step, unit ramp?
7. Define sinc function.
8. Give the broad classification of systems.
9. State Superposition principle.
10. Define an anticipative system.
11. State the BIBO Criterion for stability.
12. Find the Fourier series for half wave rectifier sine wave
13. List the properties of Fourier series and Fourier Transform.
14. Write the expression for direct and indirect Fourier transform.
15. Define Sampling Theorem
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
61
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
62
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8. X(z)=
X(Z)=
Z<1
n
14. Find the parallel and cascade realization of a discrete time system represented by the transfer
function H(z) as
15. Determine the unilateral laplace transform of each of the following signal and specify the ROC
a. x(t)=e2tu(t)
b. x(t)=e2tu(t)+ e4tu(t)
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare deterministic and random signals.
2. Differentiate finite and infinite impulse response.
3. Differentiate recursive and non recursive systems.
4. Compare the complexities involved to perform FFT and DFT.
Create
1. Apply sampling theorem in Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM), Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM).
2. Using Discrete Fourier Transform design FIR filter.
Unit I
Representation of Signals and Systems
Classification of Signals: Continuous and discrete time signalsStandard Signals Basic Operations on
Signals Basic properties of systems: Linearity, Causality, time invariance, stability  convolution integral
and sum  LTI systems Characterization using differential and difference equation  Properties of
convolution and the interconnection of LTI Systems Block diagram representation.
Analysis of continuous and discrete time signals and systems.
9 Hours
63
Unit II
Analysis of Continuous Time Signals and Systems
Determination of Fourier series representation of continuous time signals  Properties  Continuous time
Fourier transform properties of the Continuous time Fourier Transform, Parsevals relation and
convolution in time and frequency domains. Magnitude and Phase representations of frequency response of
LTI CT systems
Applications of the transforms in the image processing
9 Hours
Unit III
Analysis of Discrete Time Signals and Systems
Determination of Fourier series representation of discrete time signals Properties  Discrete Time Fourier
Transform (DTFT) Properties Parsevals relation and convolution in time and frequency domainsFrequency response of LTI DT systems.
Applications of the transforms in the signal processing
9 Hours
Unit IV
Sampling Theorem
Representation of continuous time signals by its sample  Sampling theorem Reconstruction of a Signal
from its
samples, aliasing discrete time processing of continuous time signals, sampling of band pass
signals.
By the applications transforms analyzingthe input and output impedance of the circuit design.
9 Hours
Unit V
Laplace Transform and ZTransform
Laplace Transform basic properties Inverse Laplace Transform  Computations of impulse response and
transfer function using Laplace transform  Z  transform and Inverse Transform  Computation of Impulse
response & Transfer function using Z Transform  region of convergence properties of ROC
Relationship between ztransform and Fourier transform.
Relationship between ztransform and Fourier transform and applications of the transforms in the image
processing
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. V. Alan.Oppenheim, Alan S.Willsky with S.HamidNawab, Signals & Systems, Pearson Education,
2006.
2. H Monsoon Hays, Digital Signal Processing, schaums outlines, Tata McGrawHill, 2004.
Reference(s)
1. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen, Signals and Systems, John Wiley, 2003
2. M J Roberts, Signalsand Systems Analysis using Transform method and MATLAB, Tata McGrawHill, 2007.
3. H P Hsu, Signals and systems, Schaums outlines, Tata McGrawHill, 2006
4. John G Proakis and Dimitris G Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms and
Applications, PHI, 2004
5. K Lindner, Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill, 2004.
6. Ashok Amhardar, Analog and Digital Signal Processing, Thomson, 2002.
11L304 ANALOG ELECTRONICS II
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To gain knowledge on large signal power amplifiers and tuned circuits.
To acquire knowledge about feedback amplifiers and oscillators.
To study the characteristics of operational amplifier and special function ICs.
To gain knowledge on different types of Multivibrator.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to create a basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
64
c.
h.
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
65
Understand
1. Define gate width.
2. Comparison of series and parallel resonant circuit.
3. What is the need for parallel resonant circuit?
4. What are the advantages of double tuned amplifier?
5. What are the advantages of RC phase shift oscillator?
6. What are the advantages of Wein bridge oscillator?
7. What is a Twin T network?
8. Define Franklin oscillator.
9. What is unloaded Q?
10. What are the applications of mixer circuits?
11. What is up converter?
12. What is a Multivibrator?
13. Name the types of Multivibrators?
14. How many stable states do bistableMultivibrator have?
15. When will the circuit change from stable state in bistableMultivibrator ?
16. What are the different names of bistableMultivibrator?
17. What are the applications of bistableMultivibrator?
18. What are the other names of monostableMultivibrator?
19. Why is monostableMultivibrator called gating circuit?
20. Why is monostableMultivibrator called delay circuit?
21. What is the main characteristics of AstableMultivibrator?
22. What is the other name of AstableMultivibrator why is it called so?
23. What are the two types of transistor bistableMultivibrator?
24. Why does one of the transistors start conducting ahead of other?
25. What are the two stable states of bistableMultivibrator?
26. What finally decides the shape of the waveform for bistablemultivibrator?
27. How are the values R1, R2 and VBB chosen in bistableMultivibrator?
28. What is the self biasedMultivibrator?
29. What are the other names of speed up capacitors?
30. Define transition time
31. What is the value of commutating capacitor?
32. Define resolving time.
Apply
1. A class C amplifier has a base bias voltage of 5Vand Vcc = 30 V. It is determined that a peak
input voltage of 9.8V
2. at 1MHZ is required to derive the transistor to its saturation current of 1.8 A.
3. If the DC current gain of a transistor is 100, determine dc and dc?
4. For a given type of transistor, can dc be considered to be a constant?
5. What is the voltage gain of a transistor amplifier that has an output of 5v rms and input of 250 mv
rms.
66
Create
1.
2.
3.
Design a emitter follower circuit with Vcc=10V,I=100ma, and RL=100. If the output
voltage 8 V peak sinusoid find the power delivered th the load.
Design a Class B Push Pull amplifier with Vcc = 50V, total power dissipation of 40 W find
the conversion efficiency.
Design an RC phase shift oscillator for a frequency of 2 KHz.
Unit I
67
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
68
69
100 Hz. Calculate the maximum peak amplitude of the input sinusoidal signal frequency 100kHz
for an undistorted output.
3. Derive the slew rate equation of an opamp.
4. Discuss how a log and antilog amplifiers are realized with opamp circuitry.
5. Design a Schmitt trigger for UTP=0.5V and LTP=0.5V.
6. For noninverting opamp with input resistance 10k and the feedback resistance 900k,find the
effect of an output voltage due to common mode voltage ,the input voltage changes by 1V.Assume
CMRR as 70 dB.
7. Design a narrow bandpass filter fc=3 kHz, Q=30 and Af=20.
8. Design second order Butterworth low pass filter at cut off frequency of 1kHz.
9. For a circuit of log amplifier, determine V0 given R1=10k, Boltzmann constant k= 1.38X1023J/oK,
T=298K.
10. Design an opamp differentiator that will differentiate an input signal with fmax=200Hz. Draw the
output waveform for a sine wave 2V peak at 200Hz applied. Repeat it for square wave input.
11. In the circuit of opamp integrator R1C1= 1second and the input is a square wave and sine wave.
Determine the output and sketch it. Assume that the opamp is initially nulled.
12. What output voltage would be produced by a D/A converter whose output range is 0V to 10V and
whose input binary number is
a. 01[2 bit D/A]
b. 0111 [4 bit D/A]
c. 10111100 [8 bit D/A]
13. Find out step size and analog output for 4 bit R2R ladder DAC when input is 0111 and 1111.
a. Assume Vref =+5V.
14. An analog voltage signal whose highest significant frequency is 1kHz is to be digitally coded with a
resolution of 0.01 percent covering a voltage range of 010V.Determine
a. Minimum number of bits in the digital code.
b. Analog value of LSB
c. Rms value of the quantization error
d. Aperture time required for the A/D converter
e. Dynamic range of converter in dB
15. Design a monostable for a pulse width of 8ms by using IC555.
16. A 555 timer is configured to run an astable mode with RA =5k , RB =5k and
C=0.01F.Determine the frequency of the output and duty cycle.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. One differential amplifier has CMRR of 200 dB and another has CMRR of 50 dB. Which is
preferable? State the reason.
2. An operational amplifier has a slew rate of 2V/sec. If the peak output is 15V, what is the power
bandwidth?
3. Draw the circuit diagram of a Wilson current source and derive an expression for its output
current.
4. Draw the circuit diagram of a Widlar current source and derive an expression for its output
current.
5. Draw the circuit diagram of a symmetrical emitter coupled differential amplifier and show that a
very high CMRR will result if the differential amplifier is supplied constant current bias.
6. What is the difference between basic comparator and Schmitt trigger?
7. Draw and explain the transfer characteristics of a Schmitt trigger.
8. Distinguish between triangular wave generator and sawtooth wave generator.
9. A PLL has a free running frequency of 500kHz and bandwidth of the low pass filter is 10kHz.Will
the loop acquire lock for an input signal of 600kHz? Justify .
10. Explain the logantilog method used to build multiplier.
11. How 565PLL used as a FSK demodulator?
12. What is the difference between A/D and D/A converters?
13. Which is the faster ADC? Why?
14. An 8 bit D/A converter has an output voltage range of 0.5 volt. Calculate the change in its output
voltage when the least significant bit of the input changes.
70
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Create
1.
2.
Unit I
Characteristics of Operational Amplifier
Analysis of current sources Characteristics of OP AMP Open Loop OP AMPFrequency response of OP
AMP Slew Rate
Monolithic IC operational amplifier.
9 Hours
Unit II
Operational Amplifier Circuits
Inverting and Non inverting Amplifiers Differentiator Integrator Voltage to current converterInstrumentation amplifierSine wave Oscillator Lowpass and bandpass filters ComparatorMultivibrators and Schmitt trigger Triangular wave generator Precision rectifier.
Log and Antilog amplifiers.
9Hours
Unit III
Analog Multiplier and PLL
Analysis of four quadrant (Gilbert cell) and variable transconductance multipliers Voltage controlled
Oscillator Closed loop analysis of PLL, AM, PM and FSK modulators and demodulators.
Frequency synthesizers and Compounder
9 Hours
Unit IV
Analog To Digital And Digital To Analog Converters
Analog switchesHigh speed sample and hold circuits sample and hold ICsTypes of D/A converterCurrent driven DAC Switches for DAC A/D converterFlash Single slope Dual slopeSuccessive
approximation Delta Sigma Modulation.
Voltage to Time converters.
9 Hours
Unit V
Multivibrators and Tuned amplifiers
Astable and MonostableMultivibrators using 555 TimerVoltage regulatorslinear and switched mode
types Switched capacitor filter Frequency to Voltage converters Tuned amplifiers Power amplifiers and
Isolation Amplifiers.
Video amplifiers.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. RamakantA.Gayakwad, OPAMP and Linear ICs , Prentice Hall of India, 2002
2. D.RoyChoudhry, Shail Jain, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sergio France, Design with opearational amplifers and analog integrated circuits, McGrawHill 2002
David L.Terrell,Op AmpsDesign, Application, and Troubleshooting, Elsevier publications 2005.
Taub and Schilling, Digital Integrated Electronics, McGrawHill, 1997.
William D.Stanely, Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits. Pearson Education, 2004.
71
Program Outcome(s)
c.
d.
f.
g.
k.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Realization of Boolean expression using universal gates
2. Design of different types of register and flip flop
3. Design a n bit synchronous up/ down counter
4. Study the effect of hazards in asynchronous circuits
5. Design the test bench for combinational and sequential circuits
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Test I Test II
(New Version)
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
2
Understand
25
20
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
4
Analyze
15
15
15
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
6
Create
05
10
10
Total
100
100
100
Remember
1. What do u mean by numeric codes?
2. Define weighted and nonweighted codes?
3. What are the different classifications of binary codes?
4. Define Logic Gates.
5. Define Duality Property.
6. State Demorgans theorem.
7. What are called dont care conditions?
8. What does the base of a number system indicate?
9. Name some positionalweighted system?
10. What is prime implicant?
11. What are minterms and maxterms?
Semester End
Examination
20
25
20
15
10
10
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
72
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Understand
1. Find the Octal equivalent of the decimal number 25
2. Find the Decimal equivalent of the Octal Number number 64
3. Express x+yz as the sum of minterms.
4. Find the value of X = A B C (A+D) if A=0; B=0; C=1 and D=1
5. Find the complement of x+yz.
6. How will you use a 4 input NAND gate as a 2 input NAND gate?
7. Implement EXOR gate and OR gate using NOR gate,
8. List the truth table of the function: F = x y + x y + y z
9. Design the combinational circuit with 3 inputs and 1 output. The output is 1 when the
10. binary value of the inputs is less than 3.The output is 0 otherwise
11. What are the various types of triggering of flipflops?
12. Write down the truth table of a half subtractor.
13. Draw the circuit of half adder.
14. Derive the characteristic equation of a T flip flop
15. Draw the state diagram of T FF, D FF
16. How will you convert a JK flip flop into a D flip flop.
17. How many parity bits are required to form Hamming code if message bits are 6?
18. Generate the even parity hamming codes for the following binary data 1101, 1001
19. Draw the wave forms showing static 1 hazard?
20. Derive the characteristic equation of a T flip flop.
21. Derive the characteristic equation of a SR flip flop.
22. What are the steps for the analysis of asynchronous sequential circuit?
23. What are the advantages of totem pole output?
24. What do you meant by interfacing?
25. Generate the Vhdl code for full adder.
26. What do you meant by concurrent constructs?
Apply
1.
2.
Why are NAND and NOR gates are known as Universal gates?
Simplify using Kmap to obtain a minimum POS expression:
(A + B+C+D) (A+B+C+D) (A+B+C+D) (A+B+C+D) (A+B+C+D) (A+B+C+D)
3. Find the Minterm expansion of f(a,b,c,d) = a(b+d) + acd
4. Show that if all the gates in a two level ANDOR gate networks are replaced by
NAND gates the output function does not change.
5. Implement Y = (A+C) (A+D) ( A+B+C) using NOR gates only
6. Using a single 7483, Draw the logic diagram of a 4 bit adder/sub tractor
7. Realize a BCD to Excess 3 code conversion circuit starting from its truth table
8. Implement the switching function F= m (0,1,3,4,7) using a 4 input MUX
9. Design a switching circuit that converts a 4 bit binary code into a 4 bit Gray code using
ROM array
10. Design a synchronous counter with states 0,1, 2,3,0,1 . Using JK FF.
11. Using SR flip flops, design a parallel counter which counts in the sequence
73
000,111,101,110,001,010,000 .
12. Design an asynchronous sequential circuit with two inputs X and Y and with one output Z.
Whenever Y is 1, input X is transferred to Z.When Y is 0, the output does not change for
any change in X.
13. How will you minimize the number of rows in the primitive state table of an incompletely
specified sequential machine
14. Implement the switching functions:
Z1 = abde + abce + bc + de
Z2 = ace,
Z3 = bc +de+cde+bd and
Z4 = ace +ce Using a 5*8*4 PLA
15. Why are MOS ICs especially sensitive to static charges?
16. Design the equivalent circuit for various inputs of CMOS Nand gate.
17. Implement an two input ECL OR/NOR gate circuit when both input are at logic 0.
18. Design an entity and architecture statements for a 8bit comparator.
19. Implement an 8bit ripple carry adder using VHDL entity.
20. Design a program for a 16X1 multiplexer having time to input as 1ns.
Analyze / Evaluate
1.
2.
Construct the state diagram and primitive flow table for an asynchronous network that has two
inputs and output. The input sequence X1X2 = 00, 01, 11 causes the output to become 1.The next
input change then causes the output to return to 0.No other inputs will produce a 1 output.
Develop the state diagram and primitive flow table for a logic system that has 2 inputs x and y and
an outputz.And reduce primitive flow table. The behavior of the circuit is stated as follows.
Initially x=y=0 Whenever x=1 and y = 0 then z=1, whenever x = 0 and y = 1 then z = 0.When x =
y = 0 or x = y = 1 no change in z it remains in the previous state. The logic system has edge
triggered inputs with out having a clock 1 .the logic system changes state on the rising edges of the
2 inputs. Static input values are not to have any effect in changing the Z output.
Create
1. Develop a sequence detector using DFFs which generates an output z=1 whenever the string is
0110 and generates a 0 at all other times where overlapping sequence are detected.
2. Design an traffic light controller
Unit I
Number Systems And Boolean Algebra
Review of binary, octal and hexadecimal number systems  conversion methodsnumber representations signed, unsigned, fixed point, floating point numbers computer codes  BCD, Gray code  error detection
and correction codes  parity codes Hamming codes Boolean algebra basic postulates, theorems switching functions, canonical formslogic gates.
Inhibit circuits and pulsed operation of logic gates
9 Hours
Unit II
Combinational Logic Design
Standard representation of logic functionsincompletely specified functions simplification of logic
functions through Kmaps and QuineMcClusky method  implementation using logic gates  Decoders,
encoders, multiplexers and demultiplexers  implementation of combinational circuits using multiplexers Binary/ BCD adders, subtractors Carry look ahead adder magnitude comparator.
Excess3 adder and subractor
9 Hours
Unit III
Sequential Circuits
General model of sequential circuits flipflops latches  level triggering, edge triggering master slave
configuration  Mealy/Moore models  state diagram  state table, state reduction procedures by partitioning
and implication chartDesign of synchronous sequential circuits up/down, modulus counters  shift
registers  Ring counter  Johnson counter  timing diagram  parity checker  sequence detector.
Dynamic shift register
9 Hours
74
Unit IV
Asynchronous Sequential Circuits and IC logic Families
Asynchronous sequential logic: Race conditions and Cycles Hazards in combinational circuits Hazard
free realization. Characteristics of Digital ICs Terminologyvoltage and current ratingsNoise marginpropagation delaypower dissipation Characteristics of digital ICs TTL logic familytotem pole, open
collector and tristate outputswired output operations  MOS Technologies Digital MOSFET Circuits
CMOS LogicCMOS Series Characteristics Low Voltage Technologies Open Collector/ OpenDrain
Outputs Tristate(Three State) Logic OutputsHighSpeed Bus Interface Logic
9 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to VHDL
Introduction to VHDL Behavioral, Data Flow and Structural Model  Operators Data objects  Data
types, Attributes Delay models  Concurrent constructs  Sequential constructs  Subprogram  Functions
Procedure Package Configuration and Generics Test Benches Simple programs (Using Gates, Mux,
Demux, Adders, Subtractors, Encoders, Decoders, Comparators)
Simple programs for parity generator and parity checker
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. A. Anand Kumar, Fundamentals of Digital Circuits PHI, 2010.
2. ZainalabedinNavabhi, VHDL Analysis and Modeling of Digital Systems,McGraw Hill, 1998.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
D. Donald Givone, Digital principles and design, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
H. Charles Roth Jr, Fundamentals of Logic Design Thomson Learning/Brookscole, 2004.
H. Charles Roth Jr, Digital System Design using VHDL Thomson/ Brookscole, 2005.
J.RonaldTocci, S.NealWidmer, Digital Systems: Principles and Applications, PHI, 2003.
11L307 DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To understand the concept of stacks and queues
To implement various search algorithms in the data structures
To Know the tree and graph traversal techniques
Program Outcome(s)
b.
j.
Semester End
Examination
15
20
15
50
75
Remember
1. What is a data structure?
2. What is an array?
3. What is a linked list?
4. What is stack top?
5. What is queue front and queue rear?
6. What is big O notation?
7. What are the notations used in Evaluation of Arithmetic Expressions using prefix postfix and
prefix forms?
8. What is an ADT?
9. Specify the basic operations of stack and queue.
10. List out the applications of stack and queue.
11. What is tree and List out few of the applications of tree datastructure?
12. List the various types of sorting algorithms.
13. What is searching?
14. Specify the properties of binary search tree.
15. What is minimum spanning tree?
Understand
1. What is the minimum number of queues needed to implement the priority queue?
2. When does stack overflow and underflow condition occurs?
3. When does queue overflow and underflow condition occurs?
4. If you are using C language to implement the heterogeneous linked list, what pointer type will you
use?
5. How will you implement stack and queue using array and linked list?
6. Describe a situation where storing items in an array is clearly better than storing items on a linked
list.
7. Describe the operations of creating, inserting, searching and deleting a node in singly and doubly
linked list.
8. Suppose that p is a reference to an IntNode in a linked list, and it is not the tail node. What are the
steps to removing the node after p?
9. What are the steps to inserting a new item at the head of a linked list?
10. Sort the given values using Quick Sort, Heap sort, Selection and bubble sort both in ascending and
descending order.65 70 75 80 85 60 55 50 45
11. Search the following list using binary and linear search.25 63 1 0 9 55 2 96
12. Describe the time complexity of sorting and searching algorithms
13. What is the suitable efficient data structure for constructing a tree?
14. How do you traverse a given tree using Inorder, Preorder and Postorder traversals.
15. Describe the traversals followed in DFS and BFS.
Apply
1. Sort the given values using Quick Sort, Heap sort, Selection and bubble sort both in ascending and
descending order.65 70 75 80 85 60 55 50 45
2. Search the following list using binary and linear search.25 63 1 0 9 55 2 96
3. Build a heap structure for the following list42,23,74,11,65,58,94,36,99,87
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Write a program implementing stack and queue operations.
2. Write a program to evaluate the given expression using stack and queue operations.
3. How to traverse in a singly and doubly linked list?
4. Write a program to perform the polynomial addition & multiplication using linear linked list.
5. Write a program for Inorder, preorder and, Postorder traversal of binary tree.
6. Write a program to insert & delete a node in a binary tree.
7. Identify the shortest distance between nodes in a graph using BFS & DFS.
8. Trace the shortest path in a graph using Dijkstras algorithm.
9. Write a program to perform the following operations:
a. Infix to postfix
b. Infix to prefix
76
Create
1. Develop a mini project on applications of stack
2. Develop a component implementing rat in the maze.
List of Experiments
1. Program to perform various operations such as creation, insertion, deletion, search of node and
display on singly linked list.
2. Program to perform various operations such as creation, insertion, deletion, search of node and
display on doubly linked list.
3. Array Implementation of stack and queue with pre and post conditions.
4. Linked List Implementation of stack and queue .
5. Program to sort the elements in ascending order using selection sort and bubble sort
6. Program to sort the elements in ascending order using quick sort
7. Implementation of descending order to sort the elements using Heap sort.
8. Develop a program to perform linear and binary search
9. Implementation of binary tree traversal
10. Write a program to perform infix into postfix expression, prefix to postfix expression
11. Implementation of breadth first search and depth first search techniques.
12. Design a postfix calculator (So 1 3 2 4 + *  should calculate 1  (3 * (2+4)).) using stack
13. Design a Palindrome Checker using Deque
14. Generate a random list of integers. Draw the binary search tree resulting from inserting the
integers on the list.
15. Using a random number generator, create a list of 500 integers. Perform a benchmark analysis
using quick sort and heap sort. What is the difference in execution speeds
16. Write a program that solves the following problem: Three missionaries and three cannibals come
to a river and find a boat that holds two people. Everyone must get across the river to continue on
the journey. However, if the cannibals ever outnumber the missionaries on either bank, the
missionaries will be eaten. Find a series of crossings that will get everyone safely to the other side
of the river.
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
S.No
Experiment
Hours
1
Array Implementation of stack and queue.
6
2
Linked List Implementation of stack and queue.
6
3
Program to perform various operations such as creation, insertion, deletion, search
3
of node and display on singly linked list.
4
Program to perform various operations such as creation, insertion, deletion, search
3
of node and display on doubly linked list.
5
Program to sort the elements in ascending order using selection sort and bubble
3
sort
6
Implementation of quick sort.
3
7
Implementation of descending order to sort the elements using Heap sort.
3
8
Develop a program to perform linear and binary search
3
9
Implementation of binary tree traversal
3
10 Write a program to perform infix into postfix expression, prefix to postfix
3
expression
11 Implementation of breadth first search and depth first search techniques
3
11L308 ANALOG ELECTRONICS AND INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY
0 0 3 1. 5
Objective(s)
To gain knowledge on large signal power amplifiers and tuned circuits.
To acquire knowledge about feedback amplifiers and oscillators.
To study the characteristics of operational amplifier and special function ICs.
To gain knowledge on different types of Multivibrator.
To acquire knowledge about Special function ICs.
77
Program Outcome(s)
a.
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
10
15
10
15
50
15
20
15
50
78
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A class C amplifier has a base bias voltage of 5Vand Vcc = 30 V. It is determined that a peak
input voltage of 9.8V at 1MHZ is required to derive the transistor to its saturation current of 1.8 A.
If the DC current gain of a transistor is 100, determine dc and dc?
For a given type of transistor, can dc be considered to be a constant?
What is the voltage gain of a transistor amplifier that has an output of 5v rms and input of 250 mv
rms.Under what condition VCE=VCC in the transistor?
For maximum Vcc where should the Qpoint be placed.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Create
1. Determine the rate of change of the output voltage in the response to the step input to the ideal
integrator vin=5v.
79
2.
A triangular waveform of vin=5v & t=5us is applied to the input of the ideal differentiator in the
figure shown below .Determine what the output should be, and draw its wave form in relation to
the input.
3.
Find the output voltage when the input voltage V1=2v, V2=3v,V3=4v,V4=5v are applied to the
scaling adder. What is the current through the RF=10K..
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
80
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Experiment
Frequency Response of ClassB Power Amplifier
Frequency Response of ClassC Complementary symmetry Power Amplifier
Feedback amplifier circuitscurrent series.
Frequency Response of Tuned Amplifiers.
Feedback amplifier circuitsvoltage shunt.
Linear OpAmp circuits Inverting and Non inverting Amplifiers, Voltage
Follower, Differentiator, Integrator subtractor, summer.
Design of power regulated supply using op amps.
Comparator circuits zero crossing detector and Schmitt trigger.
Active filters using OpAmps 2nd order LPF, HPF, BPF and BRF
Multivibrators using IC 555.
Characteristics of PLL using IC565.
Oscillators using OpAmps
.
Design
Experiments
Application Experiments
Mini projects
Hours
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
2
3
Program Outcome(s)
a.
d.
f.
i.
able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
81
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
Internal
Semester End
(New Version)
Assessment
Examination
Preparation
Remember
10
15
Understand
Apply
Observation & Results
15
20
Analyze
Evaluate
10
Record
15
15
MiniProject/Model Examination/VivaVoce
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Define positive logic and negative logic
2. What are different number systems?
3. Why NAND and NOR gates are called universal gates
4. What is meant by demorgens law?
5. Define flipflops.
Understand
1. How numbers are converted from binary to BCD and vice versa?
2. How numbers are converted from binary to gray and vice versa?
3. List the difference between flipflop and latch
4. Mention the uses of preset and clear signals in flipflops
5. What is meant by divide by 2 counters?
6. What is meant by data selector?
7. List the characteristics of various flipflops
Apply / Evaluate
1. Design single bit full adder using half adder
2. Design 2 input XOR gate using minimum number of NAND gates
3. Count the sequence 1, 2, 1 using various flipflops
4. Design 2 input XNOR using Multiplexer
5. How do you calculate delay in flipflops?
6. Write VHDL code for state machines
Create
1. Design a program to convert the BCD to 7 SEGMENT display.
2. Design 4 bit multiplier.
3. Design traffic light controller
List of Experiments
1. Design and implementation of Adders and Subtractors using logic gates.
2. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates
(i) BCD to excess3 code and vice versa
(ii) Binary to gray and viceversa
3. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ subtractor and BCD adder.
4. Design and implementation of 2 Bit Magnitude Comparator using logic gates, 8 Bit Magnitude
Comparator.
5. Using test bench program, design and implement a 16 bit odd/even parity generator & checker
using VHDL
6. Using test bench program, design and implement a Multiplexer and Demultiplexer using VHDL
7. Using test bench program, design and implement an encoder and decoder using VHDL
8. Design Experiments
9. Application Experiments
10. Mini projects
Total: 45 Hours
82
83
Practical Schedule
Sl.No
Experiment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Hou
rs
3
6
6
6
3
Using test bench program, design and implement a Multiplexer and Demultiplexer using
VHDL
Using test bench program, design and implement an encoder and decoder using VHDL
Design Experiments
(i) Design a sequential circuit using ROMs and PLAs.
(ii) Design flip flops (JK,SR,D and T) VHDL using data level of abstraction
Application Experiments
Mini projects
11L401 PROBABILITY AND RANDOM PROCESSES
4
7
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To introduce the mathematical foundations on theory of probability, random variables and
distributions
It provides insight into the classifications of random processes and acquire knowledge on spectral
density this describes the average frequency content of a random process.
Programme Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Acquire skills in handling more than one random variable and functions of random variables.
2. Be able to analysis the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.
3. Able to characterize phenomena which evolve with respect to time in probabilistic manner.
4. Choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem.
Assessment pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
S. No
Test I5
Test II5
(New Version)
Examination5
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
40
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze/ Evaluate
10
10
10
10
5
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
3
4
Remember
1. Define Random Variable.
2. Write the formula for Exponential Distribution.
3. Define a random process and give an example of a random process.
4. State Bayes theorem.
5. State the central limit theorem.
6. Define a random process which is stationary in the wide sense.
7. Define Markov Chain and onestep transition probability.
8. Define ensemble average and time average of a random process {x (t)}.
9. Define power spectral density.
Understand
1.
If A and B are events in S such that P (A B) =1/4, P ( A ) =2/3 and P (A B) =3/4. Find P
2.
( A /B).
If X is a uniform random variable in [2, 2], find the p. d. f. of X and var (X).
( x2 y 2 )
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Apply
1.
If at least one child in a family of three children is a boy, what is the probability that all three are
boys?
2. In a class of 100 students 75 are boys and 25 are girls. The chance that a boy gets a firstclass is
0.25 and the probability that a girl gets first class is 0.21. Find the probability that a student
selected at random gets a first class.
3. The overall percentage of failure in a certain examination is 40. What is the probability that out
of a group of 6 candidates at least 4 passed the examination.
4. In a newly constructed township, 2000 electric lamps are installed with an average life of 1000
burning hours and standard deviation of 200 hours. Assuming the life of the lamps follows normal
distribution, find the number of lamps expected to fail during the first 700 hours.
5. From a sack of fruits containing 3 oranges, 2 apples and 3 bananas, a random sample of 4 pieces
of fruit is selected. If X is the number of oranges and Y is the number of apples in the
sample, find P ( X +Y 2 ) .
6. The two equations of the variables X and Y are x = 19.13  0.87y and y = 11.64  0.50x. Find
the correlation coefficient between X and Y.
7. If a radioactive source emits particles at a rate of 5 per minute in accordance with Poisson process.
Each particle emitted has a probability 0.6 of being recorded. Find the probability that 10 particles
are recorded in 4min period. P[N(4)=10]=0.104.
8. If customers arrive at a counter in accordance with a poisson process with a mean rate of 2 per
minute, Find the probability that the interval between 2 consecutive arrivals is between 1 and 2
minutes P (1 < T < 2) = 0.233.
9. The spectral density of a random process X (t) is S ( ) = k, < 1 and = 0 otherwise. Find R
().
10. If R () = e 2 is the auto correlation function of a random process X(t), obtain the
spectral density of X(t).
84
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. A given lot of ICchips contains 2% defective chips. Each is tested before delivery. The tester
itself is not totally reliable. Probability of tester says the chip is good when it is really good is
0.95 and the probability of tester says chip is effective when it is actually defective is 0.94.If a
tested device is indicated to be defective, what is the probability that it is actually defective ?
2. A passenger arrives at a bus stop at 10.00A.M, knowing that the bus will arrive at sometime
uniformly distributed between 10.00A.M and 10.30A.M.What is the probability that he will have
to wait longer than 10 min ? If at 10.15A.M the bus has not yet arrived, what is the probability
that he will have to wait atleast 10 additional minutes ?
.
3. In a certain factory turning razor blades, there is a small chance of 1/500 for any blade to be
defective. The blades are in packets of 10. Use Poisson distribution to calculate the approximate
number of packets containing i) 1 defective ii) 2 defective blades respectively in a consignment
of packets.
4. If X and Y are two random variables having joint density function
1
(6 x y );
0 x 2, 2 y 4
.
f ( x, y ) 8
0
:
otherwise
7.
4.
7.
0.08
8.
0.10
5.
6.
9.
10. 0.05
11. 0.20
12. 0.25
13. 2
14. 0.03
15. 0.12
16. 0.15
r x 2 y 2 and
9.
8.
0.02
3.
1
2
P( ) =
0
elsewhere
Show that the first and second moment of x (t) is independent of time.
If x(t ) y cos ( t ) where y and are independent random variables and
distributed in ( ,
10. If
y
x
tan 1 .
is uniformly
1
2
Px(t ) n =
i=
at
,
1 at
(at ) n 1
,
(1 at ) n 1
n0 .
n = 1, 2.,
85
Unit I
Probability and Random Variables
Axioms of probability  Conditional probability  Total probability Bayes theorem  Random variable Probability mass function  Probability density functions Properties Moments  Moment generating
functions and their properties
9 Hours
Unit II
Standard Distributions
Binomial Poisson Geometric Uniform Exponential  Gamma and Normal distributions and their
properties. Functionsofa random variable.
9 Hours
Unit III
Two Dimensional Random Variables
Joint distributions  Marginal and conditional distributions Covariance  Correlation and regression Transformation of random variables  Central limit theorem (without proof).
9 Hours
Unit IV
Classification of Random Processes
Definition and examples  first order, second order, strictly stationary, wide sense stationary and Ergodic
processes  Markov process  Poisson and Normal processes  Sine wave process.
9 Hours
Unit V
Correlation and Spectral Densities
Auto correlation  Cross correlation  Properties Power spectral density Cross spectral density Properties WienerKhintchine relation Relationship between cross power spectrum and cross
correlation function  Linear time invariant system  System transfer function Linear systems with random
inputs Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
Peyton J R and Peebles Z, Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles, Tata
McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2002.
Stark H and Woods J.W, Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gupta S.C and Kapur J. N, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, Sultan Chand and Co.,
New Delhi, 2002.
Och M.K, Applied Probability and Stochastic Process, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Athanasios Papoulis, UnniKrishna Pillai. S, Probability , Random Variables and Stochastic
Processes, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2002
Johnson R.A, Miller & Freunds Probability and Statistics for Engineers, Seventh Edition,
Pearson Education, Delhi, 2009.
11L402 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
86
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
Course Outcome(s)
1. able to compute DFT using FFT algorithms.
2. able to design IIR filter
3. able to design FIR Filter
4. able to understand the quantization errors and multirate sampling
5. able to understand and write program using DSP Processors
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. Define signal.
2. Define Fourier transform of a sequence.
3. Distinguish DTFT from DFT.
4. State Parsevalsenergy theorem.
5. What is meant by quantization noise?
6. What is aliasing effect?
7. What are the features of TMS320C54 DSP Processor?
8. What is the need for scaling in digital filters?
9. Give the relationship between impulse invariant and bilinear transformation.
10. What is meant by limit cycle oscillation?
11. Define warping effect.
12. What are the types of windowing technique?
13. List the well known design technique for linear phase FIR filter.
14. What is meant by Interpolation and Decimation?
15. What are all the addressing modes in TMS320C5X?
Understand
1. What is the difference between continuous time signal and discrete time signal?
2. What is the effect of varying order of N on magnitude and phase response?
3. How to overcome aliasing?
4. Distinguish the difference between Butterworth and Chebyshev filter.
5. For what type of filters frequency sampling method is suitable?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
87
88
Decimation by an integer factor  Interpolation by an integer factor  Sampling rate conversion by a rational
factor.
Number representation of binary and floating point
9 Hours
Unit V
Digital Signal Processors
Introduction to DSP architecture Harvard architecture  Dedicated MAC unit  Multiple ALUs,
addressing modes, Pipelining, Overview of instruction set of TMS320C5X and simple programming
examples.
Instruction set of TMS320C5X
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
John G Proakis, Dimtris G Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and
Application, PHI, 2000.
B.Venkataramani& M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processor Architecture, Programming and
Application, TMH 2002.
Reference(s)
1.
Alan V Oppenheim, Ronald W Schafer, John R Beck, Discrete Time Signal Processing, PHI,
2000, Avtarsingh, S.Srinivasan, DSP Implementation using DSP microprocessor with Examples
from TMS32C54XX Thamson / Brooks cole Publishers, 2003
2. S.Salivahanan, A.Vallavaraj, Gnanapriya, Digital Signal Processing, McGrawHill / TMH, 2000
3. JohnyR.Johnson, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 1984.
4. S.K.Mitra, Digital Signal Processing A Computer based approach, Tata McGrawHill, 2003,
New Delhi.
11L403 ANALOG COMMUNICATION
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
Program Outcome(s)
a.
j.
k.
able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
able to demonstrate critical reasoning and problem solving abilities including the use of
simulation software for designing and troubleshooting.
able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
89
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
15
25
25
20
10
05
100
20
25
20
20
10
05
100
Model
Examination
10
30
20
10
10
20
100
Semester End
Examination
10
30
20
10
10
20
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Understand
1.
2.
*
Differentiate AM and FM
Give the classification of modulation.
The marks are secured in Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted
to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment
will be calculated for 50 marks
90
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Apply
1.
How much power is saved in DSBSCAM and SSBAM? Define modulation index and frequency
deviation of FM Mention four demodulation methods for DSBSC Modulation
What is single tone and multi tone modulation?
Compare AM with DSBSC and SSBSC.
Compare WBFM and NBFM.
List the properties of the Bessel function.
When do you say that two signals x (t) and y(t) are orthogonal and orthonormal?
What is modulation index? What happens if it is greater than unity?
What are the steps taken in commercial TV broadcasting to ensure that the distortion arising in the
detected video signal owing the use of an envelope detector is within the tolerable limits?
How is a phaselocked loop (PLL) useful in detecting the FM signal?
Why is a limiter stage used in the super heterodyne FM broadcast receiver? Explain the principles
of the working of the limiter. Sketch the transfer function of a hard limiter.
Name the important sections of a transmitter.
A 10 MHz carrier is modulated with 5 KHz sine wave. What is the bandwidth of transmitted AM
signal?
2. What is the bandwidth requirement to transmit an FM signal with a modulating frequency of 10
KHz and a carrier deviation of 30 KHz?
3. Calculate the SNR at receiver output assuming that the bandwidth is 10 MHz.
4. Calculate the capacity of a channel, which has a bandwidth of 3.4 kHz for a signal to noise ratio of
30dB.
5. Compute the differential entropy of a random variable x, distributed over the interval [0,a].
6. The antenna current of an AM transmitter is 8A when only carrier is sent. It increases to 8.93A
when the carrier is modulated by a single sine wave. Find the percentage modulation.
7. A transmitter supplies 8 Kw to the antenna when modulated. Determine the total power radiated
when modulated to 30%.
8. What are the drawbacks of emitter modulator?
9. A carrier Signal is sinusoidally modulated to a depth of m=0.8. What percentage of the total power
of the modulated signal is in the two side bands?
10. A superheterodyne receiver has an IF of 460 kHz. Its RF amplifier is tuned to an incoming signal
of 700 kHz carrier frequency. If at this frequency the tuned circuit of the RF amplifier has a Q of
60, determine the image frequency rejection in rejection in db.
Analyze
1. The intermediate frequency of a super heterodyne receiver is 450 kHz. If it is tuned to 1200 kHz,
what would be the image frequency?
2. For a FM transmission with a frequency deviation of 20 KHz. Determine the percent modulation
for commercial FM station.
3. What do you meant by multitone modulation?
4. How FM wave can be converted to PM wave?
5. How PM wave can be converted to FM wave?
6. What is diagonal Clipping? How can it be avoided?
7. In the filter method of generation of an SSBSC signal, why do we have to use initially a low
frequency carrier?
8. A double conversion receiver is tuned to an incoming signal of 25 MHz at which frequency its tank
circuit has a Q of 65,The receiver is using a first IF of 1.5MHz and a second IF of
150kHz.Calculate (in decibels) the image frequency rejection. Make reasonable assumptions, if
necessary.
9. An Am transmitter is used to send a message signal with x2 =0.5 and a bandwidth of 5 MHz over a
channel which introduces additive white noise with a power spectral density of 1012 W/Hz. The
modulation index is equal to 1.if the channel introduces aa loss of 100 dB, and if the average
transmitted power is 200w. Find the destination signalto noise ratio that can be obtained.
10. Justify the use of log(1/p) as the measure of information given by the occurrence of an event whose
probability of occurrence is p.
91
Evaluate
1. An event has six possible Outcome(s) with probabilities p1=1/2, p2=1/4,p3=1/8, p4=1/16,
p5=p6=1/32. Find entropy of the system.
2. A Discrete memoryless source has an alphabet of x=[x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7] with the statistics P=[
.35 .3 .2 .1 .04 .005 .005].
a. Compute the Huffman code and its average length.
b. Compute the entropy of the source
c. Evaluate the efficiency of the code.
3. A carrier of frequency fc=100 kHz DSBSC modulated by a message signal
x(t)=cos2000*pi*t+2cos4000*pi*t to give a modulated signal x c(t)=50x(t)cos2*pi*105t
a. Sketch the spectrum of xc(t), the modulated signal.
b. Find the average powers of all the frequency components in xc(t).
4. A DSBSC signal is transmitted over a channel with additive white noise of twosided PSD of (
/2)=0.5* 1012 W/Hz. if the received signal power is SR =20*1019 W and the message bandwidth
W=5*106 Hz, find the destination SNR.
5. Two binary symmetric channels with a transition probability of 0.1 and the other with a transition
probability of 0.2 are connected in cascade. Determine the equivalent channel.
6. A voicegrade channel of the telephone network has a bandwidth of 3.5kHz.
a) Calculate the information capacity of this telephone channel for a signaltonoise ratio of
40dB.
b) Calculate the minimum signaltonoise ratio required if information is to be transmitted
through the channel at the rate of 9.6kbps.
Create
1. Making use of the Bessel function tables, sketch the spectrum of an anglemodulated signal for
fm=5 kHz and =smallest value of for which the carrier components vanishes. Sketch the 2sided
spectrum up to the 3rd sidefrequency component.
2. It is proposed to transmit a message signal whose amplitude is uniformly distributed over [1,1]
and whose bandwidth is 1.5 MHz over a channel with an additive white noise twosided PSD of
0.5*10+13 W/Hz and introducing a loss of 80 dB between the transmitter and receiver. if
destination SNR of 40 dB is desired, for each of the following cases, determine the transmitter
power that will be required.
3. A discrete memoryless source has the symbol A, B, C and D as its alphabet. What is maximum
information that can be associated with each symbol?
4. A source produces five output symbol A, B, C, D and E with probabilities 0.35, 0.25, 0.20, 0.15
and 0.5 respectively. Assuming successive symbols to be statistically independent, determine (i)
the information associated with each one of the symbols, (ii) The entropy of the source.
5. For a BSC, the input binary symbols 0 and 1 occur with probabilities 0.25 and 0.75. Find the
probabilities of the binary symbols 0 and 1 appearing at the output.
Unit I
Amplitude Modulation Systems
Generation and demodulation of AM, DSBSC, SSBSC, VSB Signals, Filtering of sidebands, Comparison
of Amplitude modulation systems, Frequency translation, Frequency Division multiplexing, AM
transmitters, AM receivers.
Generation of AM using LabVIEW
9 Hours
Unit II
Frequency Modulation Systems
Angle modulation, frequency modulation, Narrowband and wideband FM, transmission bandwidth of FM
signals, Generation of FM signal Direct FM indirect FM, Demodulation of FM signals, FM stereo
multiplexing, PLL Nonlinear model and linear model of PLL, Nonlinear effects in FM systems, FM
Broadcast receivers,
FM stereo receiver.
9 Hours
92
Unit III
Noise Performance of DSB, SSB Receivers
Noise Shot noise, thermal noise, White noise, Noise equivalent Bandwidth, Narrowband noise,
Representation of Narrowband noise in terms of envelope and phase components, Sine wave plus
Narrowband Noise, Receiver model,
Noise in DSBSC receiver, Noise in SSB receiver.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Noise Performance of AM And FM Receivers
Noise in AM receivers threshold effect, Noise in FM receivers capture effect, FM threshold effect, FM
threshold reduction, Preemphasis and deemphasis in FM, Comparison of performance of AM and FM
systems.
Performance analysis of AM & FM in the presence of Noise using LabVIEW
9 Hours
Unit V
Analog Pulse Modulation
Sampling of Band limited Low pass signals, ideal and practical sampling, Anti aliasing and reconstruction
filters, PAM, and Time division Multiplexing, Pulse Time Modulation systems, generation , Detection
Cross talk in PTM, Bandwidth
Performnce of Analog Pulse Modulation Systems.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Objective(s)
Program Outcome(s)
a.
d.
j.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Identify the various types of microprocessors.
2. Enhancement of programming skills.
3. Computation of assembly language programs
4. Interfacing with peripherals
93
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
15
25
25
20
10
05
100
20
25
20
20
10
05
100
Model
Examination
10
30
20
10
10
20
100
Semester End
Examination
10
30
20
10
10
20
100
Remember
1. Define microprocessor
.
2. List out various addressing modes of 8086 microprocessors.
3. Recall classifications of 8086 instruction set.
4. Name the different types of memories used in microprocessor and ColdFire processors.
5. List different types of interrupts of ColdFire processors and S12X.
6. Recall the number and names of various peripherals of 8086 microprocessor.
7. Define T state, machine cycle and instruction cycle.
8. What are the difference between Compiler and Interpreter?
9. Name the three buses of a microprocessor.
10. Recall the register organization of 8086.
11. Recall the pins of 8086.
12. Name the assembly directives of 8086.
13. Define maskable and non maskable interrupts.
14. Name various condition and non conditional branch instructuions.
15. Define interrupt.
16. Recall various constituents in Interrupt vector table.
17. Name various blocks of supervisor mode of ColdFire
18. Name various blocks of user mode of ColdFire
Understand
1. Distinguish memory mapped I/O devices and I/O mapped memory devices.
2. Discuss the function of instruction queue in 8086.
3. Explain the predefined interrupts of 8086.
4. Discuss the conditional and unconditional flags of 8086
5. State the significance of LOCK signal in 8086.
6. Explain Interrupt service routine of 8086.
7. Describe the process control instructions of microprocessor.
8. Distinguish the POP and PUSH, Wait and Halt instructions.
9. Explain ALIGN & ASSUME.
10. Discuss the need of debugging in ALP.
11. Recognize the various blocks in the architectures of ColdFire processors.
12. Distinguish User and Supervisor model in ColdFire processors.
13. Discuss MACROS in 8086.
14. Explain various pin attributes of 8086
15. Recognize the formation of physical address
16. Differences between microprocessors and controllers.
*
The marks are secured in Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted
to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment
will be calculated for 50 marks
94
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Apply timing diagram to calculate the time required to execute MOV A,B.
Use rotate instruction for multiplication operation.
Illustrate the timing states of SIM and RIM instructions.
Demonstrate the position SP after the pop instruction.
Illustrate the 2 K memory construction with flip flops.
Illustrate the block diagrams of microprocessors.
Apply the read and write cycles to any given instruction.
Illustrates various types of interrupts.
Demonstrate I/O read and I/O write cylices for a given instruction
Practice the conditional jump instructions of 8086.
Use various addressing modes a write program for addition of two numbers.
Multiply two given numbers without using MUL instruction.
Demonstrate the utility of external memory in microprocessors.
Illustrate various types of DMA transfer.
Use the processor to convert hex code to decimal code.
Illustrate the timing diagram for minimum and maximum modes of operation for 8086.
Demonstrate the memory read and memory write cycles for a given instruction.
Illustrate various attributes of ADC of ColdFire
Illustrate the timing diagram in minimum and maximum modes of operation.
Analyze
1. Distinguish Clock generation, Reset generation & synchronization,
2. Test the wait state computation & generation, Ready synchronization.
3. Inspect interfacing of RAM and EPROM memories.
4. Analyze the Modes of I/O data transfer.
5. Calculate the physical address from the segment address 6055H and offset address as 3000H.
6. How do we select minimum versus maximum modes.
7. Distinguish the addressing modes of 8086 and ColdFire processors.
8. Analyze NEAR and FAR Call.
9. Compare UART functionalities in 8086 and ColdFire
10. Inspect the stack operations in 8086.
11. Distinguish NOP and HALT instructions
12. Inspect on rotate instruction.
Evaluate
1. Evaluate the contents of BX by 4 using shift instructions.
2. Judge which arithmetic instruction should be used with carry.
3. Compare memory mapped and I/O mapped memories.
4. Judge the contents of carry and Auxiliary carry flags when carry occurs.
5. Assess the prerequisite for a conditional jump.
6. Evaluate LIFO, LILO, FIFO and FILO.
7. Determine the memory address accessed by each of the following instructions in real mode
operations, if DS = 1000H ,SS = 2000H, BP = 1000H and DI = 0100H.
8. Compare DMA and eDMA in ColdFire.
9. Appraise the exception vector table of ColdFire processor.
10. Assess the power management of ADC in ColdFire.
Create
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
95
Unit I
INTEL 8086 Microprocessor
Introduction to Microprocessors, 8086 Architecture  Register organization of 8086, Modes of Operation Physical Memory organization  I/O addressing capability  Special Processor activities, Addressing modes
of 8086  Instruction set of 8086  Assembler directives and operators.
9 Hours
Unit II
X86 Peripherals and Interfacing
Memory interfacing, Interfacing with 8255 PIO (Programmable InputOutput Port), Interfacing with ADC
and DAC, Programmable interval timer 8253, Keyboard/Display controller (8279).
Interfacing with ADC and DAC, Keyboard Interfacing (8279)
9 Hours
Unit III
X86 Assembly Language Programming
Programming with an assembler  Assembly language example programs. Special architecture features and
related programming: Introduction to stack  Stack structure of 8086  Interrupt and Interrupt service
routines  Interrupt cycle of 8086  Nonmaskable interrupt  Maskable Interrupt (INTR)  Software
interrupts, Macros. Programming 8086 with Traffic Light Controller.
Programming 8086 with Traffic Light Controller
9 Hours
Unit IV
Freescale Cold Fire 32 bit Processor Core
Introduction to Cold Fire Core  User, Supervisor, EMAC and Interrupt Programming Models, Addressing
modes, Exception processing sequence, Exception Vector Table, Interrupt Controller, Interrupt Vector
Generation, Reset Controller Module, Clock Module, System Control Module, Chip Configuration Module
Programming with S12X processor
9 Hours
Unit V
FreescaleColdFire 32 bit Processor Peripherals and Programming
Analog to Digital Converters, Universal Asynchronous Transmitter Receiver, Timer Unit, Queued Serial
Peripheral Interface, Fast Ethernet controller, Tools and Software. C programming examples with CodeWarrior tools.
Embeddded C Programming for UART.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Ramesh Goankar, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with 8085,
Penram International, 2009.
2. A.K.Ray, K.M.Bhurchandi, AdvancedMicroprocessors and Peripherals Architecture,
Programming and Interface, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
Reference(s)
1. V.Douglas Hall, Microprocessorsand Interfacing Programming and Hardware, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2002.
2. ColdFire Microprocessors & Microcontrollers, MunirBannoura, Rudan Bettelheim and Richard
Soja, AMT Publishing, 2007.
3. ColdFire Family Programmers Reference Manual, Free scale Semiconductors, 2005.
96
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
30
20
20
05
100
25
30
15
20
05
05
100
Model
Examination
25
30
15
20
05
05
100
Semester End
Examination
25
30
15
20
05
05
100
Remember
1. Give the drain current equation for a MOS transistor.
2. List the electrical properties of a MOS transistor.
3. What is body effect?
4. What is Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductor?
5. What is CMOS Technology?
6. Give the advantages of CMOS IC?
7. What are four generations of Integration Circuits?
8. Give the variety of Integrated Circuits?
9. Why NMOS technology is preferred more than PMOS technology?
10. What are the different MOS layers?
11. What are the different layers in MOS transistor?
12. What is Enhancement mode transistor?
13. What is Depletion mode device?
14. When the channel is said to be pinched off?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
97
98
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
Apply
1.
2.
What are the main differences between the real inverter and the ideal inverter?
Define delay, rise time, and fall time. Show them with the help of input and output waveforms of
an inverting circuit.
3. Consider a CMOS inverter. Draw the schematic diagram of a CMOS inverter with a 15fF load
connected at the output node. Label your diagram.
4. Sketch a voltage transfer characteristic (VTC) curve of a CMOS inverter and label all five critical
voltages on the curve. Discuss qualitatively their role in determining the noise margins of CMOS
inverter.
5. How a CMOS inverter is different from a resistive load inverter? Which is preferred in design and
why?
6. What do you understand by symmetrical CMOS inverter? Is it desirable or not?
7. Discuss the effect of increasing number of inverters on the frequency of oscillation of Ring
Oscillator?
8. If one reduces the power supply from 2V to 600mV, how much dynamic switching power
consumption reduces due to that if other parameters remain constant?
9. Discuss qualitatively , how reduction in capacitive load value reduces the dynamic switching
power?
10. Discuss the importance of power delay product?
11. The nMOS transistor is replaced by pMOS device in an inverter, sized so that kp is equal t to knof
the original nMOS. Will the resulting structure be faster? Explain why or why not?
12. Sometimes the substrate is connected to a voltage called substrate bias to alter the threshold
voltage of the nMOS transistor. If it is required to raise the threshold voltage of the transistor,
should a positive or negative substrate bias be used?
13. Why gradual approximation fails in case of short channel devices?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. The inverter is one of the most primitive CMOS circuits that are widely used in digital IC design,
e.g. dynamic logic, astable circuits, etc. Oscillator is a circuit that may employ inverters as the
core of its circuitry. Designing an oscillator at low frequency is a straightforward task, but a high
performance oscillator at highperformance oscillator at high frequency requires more careful
99
design approach. A few aspects such as reliability, robustness, and noise performance need to be
critically dealt with. Noise margin and VTC information could give us insights on whether the
circuit meets the specifications at high frequency.
a) Sketch the voltage transfer characteristic (VTS) of a CMOS inverter for
b) Ideal gate and
c) real inverter.
d) On the VTC of a real inverter, label the state/operating regions of pMOS and nMOS
devices in the five
distinct regions.
2. Calculate the nave threshold voltage for an ntransistor 3000k for a process with a Si substrate
with NA=1.80X1016, a SiO2 gate oxide with thickness 200 A0.(Assume ms=0.9 V, Qfc=0)
Create
1.
2.
What will you do to compensate the current driving loss in PMOS transistor, due to lower mobility
of hole, of MOS inverter? In a design assignment, a designer has proposed two design approaches
for resistive load inverter with RL=1k & RL=3k. which resistive load inverter will give lower
propagation delay and why?
How can one reduce the propagation delay of CMOS inverter and What prize one will pay for
that?
Unit I
Introduction to MOS Technology
An overview of Silicon Semiconductor technology NMOS fabrication.CMOS fabrication: nwell, pwell Twin tub and SOI Process CMOS n well / p well design rules Stick diagrams simple layout examples Sheet Resistance Area capacitance Driving Large Capacitance loads Wiring Capacitance.
Comparison of MOS with BI polar Technnology
9 Hours
UnitII
MOS Circuit Design Process
Basic MOS transistors: symbols, Enhancement mode  Depletion mode transistor operation  Threshold
voltage derivation  body effect  Drain current Vs voltage derivation  channel length modulation. NMOS
inverter CMOS inverter  DC Characteristics Switching Characteristics Power dissipationDetermination of pull up to pull down ratio for an NMOS inverter.
Study of channel length effects
9 Hours
UnitIII
CMOS Logic Design
Pass Transistor and Transmission Gate static CMOS design, TriState Circuits Pseudo nMOS, and
dynamic CMOS logic Clocked CMOS logic Precharged domino logic Memories DRAM, SRAM and
Flash Memory  Design of logic gates
Design of logic gates with different techniques
9 Hours
UnitIV
Clocking and Testing
CMOS clocking styles  pipelined systems FloorplaningRouting  Reliability and Testing of VLSI
circuits  General concepts  CMOS testing  Test generation methodsDAlgorithm, Boolean difference
method, Path sensitization method, with examples problems.
Synthesis of logic gates
9 Hours
UnitV
VLSI Subsystem Design
Introduction  Design of Adders: carry look ahead  carry select  carry save. Parity generators. PLA design
Arithmetic logic unit design Design of multipliers: Array  Braun array Baugh  Wooley Array Wallace tree Multiplier.
Design of multipliers
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
100
Textbook(s)
1. Kamran Eshraghian, Douglas A. Pucknell, Essentials of VLSI Circuits and Systems, Prentice Hall
of India, 2008
2. John P.Uyemura, Introduction to VLSI circuits and systems, John Wiley & Sons,2003
Reference(s)
1. Weste&Eshraghian, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Addison Wesley, 1993
2. E. Fabricious, Introduction to VLSI Design, McGraw Hill, 1990.
3. Keng,Lablebick,CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999.
4. Jan M Rabaey, Digital Integrated Circuits A Design, Prenitice Hall, 2004
11L406 CONTROL SYSTEMS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To gain knowledge on system representation and time response of a system.
To understand the various time domain and frequency domain tools for analysis and design of
linear control systems.
To analyze the frequency response and state variables.
To study the methods to analyze the stability of systems from transfer function forms.
To analyze the frequency response and state variables.
Program Outcome(s)
a. an ability to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering
design and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. an ability to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
f. an ability to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication
systems.
k. an ability to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications
and requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Determine the transfer function of systems
2. Identify the major issues that affect the stability of the system.
3. Determine the time domain specifications, type and order of systems, Error constants and error
series
4. Demonstrate the frequency system
5. Diagnose the cause of failure of stability
Assessment Pattern
Model
S.
Blooms Taxonomy
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
No.
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define damping ratio.
2. What do you meant by control system?
3. State Newtons law of motion for mechanical translation system?
4. What are the types of system?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks
101
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Understand
1. Draw the block diagram and signal flow graph for field controlled DC motor.
2. What is electrical zero position of a synchro transmitter?
3. Draw the block diagram and signal flow graph for armature controlled DC motor.
4. Derive the transfer function of hydralic systems.
5. What is the advantage of block diagram?
6. Derive the response of under damped and over damped second order system with unit ramp input.
7. Give the relation between static and dynamic error coefficients.
8. Derive the response of critically damped second order system with unit step input.
9. What is the effect of a PI controller on the system performance?
10. Derive the expressions for time domain specifications of second order under damped system with
unit step input.
11. Explain the different types of controllers.
12. What is the effect adding zeros to G(s)H(s) on the root locus?
13. Give the advantages of generalised error coefficients.
14. Explain the step by step procedure to obtain the bode plot.
15. Explain the magnitude plot and phase plot of the polar plot.
16. How to improve the phase margin and gain margin?
17. What are the advantages of Bode plot?
18. What is characteristic equation?
19. What are the steps to obtain the root locus?
20. How can the transfer function of a system obtained from its state diagram?
Apply
1. Determine the type and order of the system for G(s)H(s) = K(s+3) / s^2 (s+2)(s+5)
2. A unity feedback control system has an open loop transfer function, G(s)= 25/ s(s+5). Find the rise
time, percentage overshoot, peak time and settling time for a step input of 12 units.
3. Determine the time domain specifications for the damping ratio = 0.5 and natural frequency = 8
rad/sec
4. Determine the range of values of K for the system to be stable s^4 + 20 s^3 + 15 s^2 +2s + K=0
5. Sketch the bode plot of the transfer function and determine the system gain K for the gain cross
over frequency to be 8 rad/sec. G(s) = Ks^2 / (1+.5s)(2+5s)
6. Construct the Routh array and determine the stability of the system whose characteristic equation
s^7 + 3s^6 + 5s^4 + s^3 + 2s^2 + s =0. Also determine the number of roots lying on right half of
splane.
102
7.
The
open
G( s)
loop
transfer
function
of
unity
feedback
system
is
given
103
by,
K ( s 1)
. Determine the value of K and a so that the system oscillates at a
s as 2 2s 1
3
frequency of 2 rad/sec.
Sketch the root locus for the unity feedback system whose open loop transfer function is G(s)H(s)
= K/ s(s+5)( s^2 + 3s + 10)
9. Sketch the polar plot of the transfer function and determine whether the plot crosses the real axis.
If so, determine the frequency at which the plot cross the real axis and and corresponding
magnitude G(j). Determine the phase margin and gain margin for the same. G(s) = 1 / s
(1+s)(1+5s)
10. Determine the openloop transfer function for the system whose characteristics equation is given
by s^2 + s(2+k) + 4k.
11. Draw the bode plot to determine gain and phase margin for the system G(s)H(s) = K(s+4) / (s1)(s2)
12. Determine the frequency response indices for a second order system yielding Mp= 0.2 and tp =
0.3 ms
13. Sketch the Nyquist plot and comment on the stability of the closed loop system whose open loop
transfer function is G(s)H(s) = K(s4) / (s+1)^2
14. Determine the value of k so that the gain margin is 6 dB and the phase margin is 40 for an open
loop system G(s) = K / s(1+0.1s)(1+s)
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare the open loop system and closed loop system.
2. In what way the bode plot differ from polar plot?
3. For the given block diagram how transfer function is obtained?
4. For the given signal flow graph how transfer function is obtained?
5. Compare time domain and frequency domain specifications.
6. Compare P, PI and PID controllers.
Create
1. Construct the PID controller.
2. Draw one mechanical translational system and obtain the transfer function using signal flow
graph.
Unit I
System Representation
Open loop and closed loop systems Terminology and basic structure Elements of closed loop systems
Transfer function concept Modelling of mechanical, thermal, hydraulic systems electrical circuits
Transfer function of DC generator, DC motor, AC servomotor, and synchro Block diagram reduction
techniques Signal flow graphs Masons gain formula
Gear trains
9 Hours
Unit II
Time Response analysis
Standard test signals Time response of First and Second order system for step input and ramp input
time response specifications Type of systems Steady state error constants, generalized error series
Basics ofPD, PI, PID Controller
Dominant pole of control system
9 Hours
Unit III
Stability of Systems
Characteristic equation Bounded input Bounded output stability Stability and the roots of characteristic
equation Routh Hurwitz criterion of stability Range for parameters conditionally stable systems
Root locus technique Rules for root locus plot Stability analysis.
Application of Routhstability criterion to linear feedback
9 Hours
8.
104
Unit IV
Frequency Response Analysis
Frequency domain specifications Peak resonance, resonant frequency, bandwidth and cutoff rate Polar
plot Bode plot Gain plot, phase plot, gain margin and phase margin Nyquist plots Stability in
frequency domain Nyquist criterion Stability using Bode plot
AllPass and MinimumPhase Systems
9 Hours
Unit V
State Variable Analysis
Introduction to state space analysis State model of linear systems State phase representation using
physical variables, phase variable and canonical variables  State transition matrix Solution of second
order Linear Time Invariant systems using state equations
Controllability of linear systems
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. I.J.Nagrath, and M.Gopal, Control Engineering, New Age International, 2007.
Reference(s)
1. Ogata K Modern Control Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.
2. D.RoyChoudhury, Modern Control Engineering, PHI, 2006.
3. M.N.Bandyapadhyay, Control Engineering, PHI, 2003.
11L407 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To make the students understand the behavior and response of the filter using different methods.
To compute the output response of the system, sampling rate conversion and FFT spectrum.
To know the generation of the signals and arithmetic operations using TMS320C5X DSP Processor.
Program Outcome(s)
a. an ability to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering
design and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. an ability to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
h. an ability to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments
as well as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome(s)
1. Design of digital filter
2. Generation of various signals
3. Analysis of signal and system properties
4. Computation of circular and linear convolution
5. Determine the frequency transformation
6. Analysis of sampling rate
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
Internal
Semester End
(New Version)
Assessment
Examination
Preparation
Observation & Results
Record
MiniProject/Model Examination/VivaVoce
Total
10
15
10
15
50
15
20
15
50
105
Remember
1. Define signal
2. List the properties of signals and systems.
3. State Sampling theorem
4. Define Fourier transform of a sequence
5. State parsevals energy theorem
6. What is meant by quantization noise?
7. What are the features of TMS320C54 DSP Processor?
8. Give the relationship between impulse invariant and bilinear transformation
9. Define warping effect
10. What are the types of windowing technique?
11. List the well known design technique for linear phase FIR filter
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Apply / Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Create
1. Noise Cancellation in Speech Signal
List of Experiments
1. Generation of Signals.
2. Properties of Discrete time Systems.
3. Design and Implement Linear and Circular Convolution
4. Correlation and its properties.
5. Impement and Simulate sampling and sampling rate conversion.
6. Design, Implement and Simulate IIR and FIR filters.
7. Power spectrum estimation.
8. Generation of waveform using Processor.
9. DFT of a signal
10. Signal Enhancement and Denoising using adaptive Filters
11. Analysis of LTI filter using GUI
12. Mini ProjectApplication and Design oriented experiments
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl.No
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Experiment
Generation of Signals.
Properties of Discrete time Systems.
Design and Implement Linear and Circular Convolution
Correlation and its properties.
Impement and Simulate sampling and sampling rate conversion.
Design, Implement and Simulate IIR and FIR filters.
Power spectrum estimation.
Generation of waveform using Processor.
DFT of a signal
Signal Enhancement and Denoising using adaptive Filters
Analysis of LTI filter using GUI
Hours
3
3
6
3
6
9
3
3
3
3
3
106
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Create
1.
2.
Design of Transistor based Amplitude modulator using BC147, envelope detector and to calculate
the modulation index for various modulating voltages whose transistor gain is 300.
Design of Frequency modulator using ICXR2206, demodulator using IC565 and calculate the
modulation index for various modulating voltages whose modulating frequency is 1KHZ
List of Experiments
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
107
Practical Schedule
Sl.No
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Experiment
Generation of basic signals using MATLAB.
Simulate and Design a transistor based Amplitude modulator and
envelope detector.
Simulate and Design an Amplitute Modulator using Ring modulator and
plot its spectrum.
Hours
3
3
6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Program Outcome(s)
d.
e.
f.
an ability to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded
microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel
language programs.
an ability to acquire a working knowledge of computer hardware, software and networking skills.
an ability to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
10
15
10
15
50
15
20
15
50
Preparation
108
Remember
1. Define a microprocessor.
2. State machine and instruction cycles.
3. Differentiate the various number systems.
4. What are the difference between packed and unpacked BCD numbers?
5. List various interrupts of 8086.
6. Recall the process of addition and subtraction of 8 and 16 bitnumbers in a microprocessor.
7. Why the operational codes are in hexadecimal system?
8. Name the different types of jump instructions in 8085 and 8086.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Analyze /Evaluate
1. Inspect a program to convert ASCI code for tamil letters.
2. Use of tools for debugging, develop techniques for testing, and use of trace analysis and timing for
evaluation.
3. Use of Logic analyzers, oscilloscopes, logic probes, multimeters with microprocessor.
List of Experiments
Microprocessor (8086)
1. String and Sorting Operations
2. Array Operations
3. Graphical Display Interface
4. DAC& ADC measuremet
5. Elevator controller
6. Real time clock.
7. DMA interfacing
Cold Fire
1. UART Programming
2. DMA Controller Programming
3. Timer Interrupt Servicing
4. Keypad Interface
5. ADC using PWM input
6. Real time clock and alarm
Total: 45 Hours
109
Practical Schedule
Sl.No
1
Experiment
Assembly language programming with 8086
Hours
30
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
110
Remember
1. State Channel Coding Theorem.
2. State Channel Capacity theorem.
3. What are prefix codes?
4. State the balance property of maximum length sequence.
5. Define entropy.
6. Draw the structure of a typical correlation receiver.
7. State the Nyquists criterion for distortionless baseband data transmission.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Draw the binary onoff signaling waveform for a binary sequence 11011010.
Distinguish between bit versus symbol error probabilities.
Generate a maximal length sequence of period 7 using 3stage feedback shift register.
Find the differentially encoded sequence when the binary sequence 1100100 is applied to the
DPSK transmitter. Compare the power spectra of binary phase shift keying and frequency shift
keying modulation schemes.
Consider the (5,1) repetition code. Construct the generator and parity check matrices.
The Generator Polynomial a (15,11) Hamming code is defined by
g(D)
1
D
D4 . Develop the encoder for this code.
Find the transfer function of a rate , constraint length 3, convolutional Encoder with generator
sequences g(1) =( 1 0 1) , g(2) =( 1 1 0) and g(3) = (1 1 1). Construct the trellis diagram of the
Convolution encoder for message length of 4.
Prove that the output signal of a matched filter is proportional to the shifted version of the
autocorrelation function of the input signal.
Apply
1.
Calculate the capacity of a channel, which has a bandwidth of 3.4 kHz for a signal to noise ratio of
30dB.
2. Consider a discrete memoryless source with source alphabets S=[S1,S2,S3,S4] with probabilities
P=[.25 .25 .25 .25].Calculate the entropy of second order extension of the source S.
3. Find the syndrome using syndrome calculator for (7,4) cyclic hamming code of a given
polynomial g(D)
1
D
D3 assuming that the received code word is 0111001.
4. A PN Sequence is generated using a Feedback shift register of length m=4. The chip rate is 107
chips/sec. Find the PN Sequence period of the sequence.
5. The binary data stream 001101 is applied to the input of a duo binary system. Construct the duo
binary coder output.
6. Compute the differential entropy of a random variable x, distributed over the interval [0,a].
7. A spread spectrum communication system has information bit duration
8. T 4.095msec b
and PN Chip duration
1
sec c T .Compute the processing gain.
9. Determine the transmission bandwidth of the base band binary PAM system with raised cosine
spectrum at the rate of 56Kbps. Assume that roll off factor
0.5
10. Find the minimum value of n of a (n,k) linear block code with a minimum distance of three and
message block size K=8.
Analyze
1. Analyze the BER performance of the following binary modulation schemes.
a. Binary Phase Shift keying
b. Amplitude Shift Keying
c. Frequency Shift Keying
2. A Binary wave uses on off signaling to transmit symbols 1 and 0. The symbol 1 is represented
by a rectangular pulse of amplitude A and duration Tb sec. The additive noise at the receiver input
is white and Gaussian with zero mean and Power spectral density / 2 O N .Assuming that symbols
1 and 0 occur with equal probability. Analyze the BER performance of this system.
111
3.
Derive the expressions for Probability of error, Jamming Margin and Processing Gain of a Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum system.
4. Derive an expression for the probability of error of Mary PSK modulation scheme.
Evaluate
1. A PCM system uses a uniform quantizer followed by a 8 bit binary encoder. The bit rate of the
system is 64Mbps. What is the maximum message bandwidth for which the system operates
satisfactorily?
2. The sinusoidal signal x(t)
sin(2 (2000)t) is applied to a delta modulator and the sampling
duration is 20ms. Calculate the minimum step size required to avoid the slope overload distortion.
3. A Discrete memoryless source has an alphabet of x=[x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7] with the statistics P=[
.35 .3 .2 .1 .04 .005 .005].
a. Compute the Huffman code and its average length.
b. Compute the entropy of the source
c. Evaluate the efficiency of the code.
4. The binary data 011100101 are applied to the input of a modified duo binary System.
5. Construct the modified duo binary coder output and corresponding Receiver output without a precoder.
Unit I
Pulse Modulation
Sampling process SNRNoise trade off Quantization PCM Noise considerations in PCM SystemsTDM Digital multiplexersVirtues, Limitation and modification of PCMDelta modulation Linear
prediction differential pulse code modulation .
Adaptive differential pulse code modulation.
9 Hours
Unit II
Baseband Pulse Transmission
Matched Filter Error Rate due to noise Intersymbol Interference Nyquists criterion for Distortion less
Base band Binary Transmission Correlative level coding Baseband Mary PAM transmission Adaptive
Equalization.
Eye patterns.
9 Hours
Unit III
Passband Data Transmission
Introduction Pass band Transmission model Generation, Detection, Signal space diagram, bit error
probability and Power spectra of BPSK, QPSK, QAM, FSK and MSK schemes Differential phase shift
keying Comparison of Digital modulation systems using a single carrier.
Synchronization.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Information Theory and Coding
Uncertainty, Information and entropy, Source coding theorem, Data compaction, Discrete memory less
channels, mutual information, channel capacity, channel coding theorem, Differential entropy, and mutual
information for continuous ensembles, rate distortion theory, Compression of information.Information
capacity theorem, Linear block codes  Cyclic codes  Convolutional codes Maximum likelihood
decoding of convolutional codesViterbi Algorithm.
Distance properties of Convolutional codes Sequential decoding of Convolutional codesTrellis codesTurbo codes Applications.
9 Hours
Unit V
Spread Spectrum Modulation
Pseudo noise sequences a notion of spread spectrum Direct sequence spread spectrum with coherent
binary phase shift keying Signal space Dimensionality and processing gain Probability of error.
Frequency hop spread spectrum and Applications.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
112
Textbook(s)
1. Simon Haykins, Communication Systems John Wiley, 2001
Reference(s)
1. Simon Haykins, Digital Communication John Wiley, 2001
2. Sam K.ShanmugamAnalog & Digital Communication John Wiley, 2007.
3. John G.Proakis, Digital Communication McGraw Hill, 1995
4. Taub& Schilling , Principles of Digital Communication, Tata McGrawHill, 2003
5. Bernard Sklar, Digital Communication, Pearson Education,2000
11L502 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To learn the use of DC and AC bridges for measuring R, L and C
To learn the use of different types of analog meters for measuring electrical quantities such as
current, voltage, power, energy, power factor and frequency
To learn the principle of working and applications of CRO and other electronic measuring devices
To learn the graphical programming palettes and tools in virtual instrumentation
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as well
as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome(s)
1) Able to understand the evolution and history of Units and Standards.
2) Able to learn different Bridge configurations and their applications.
3) Able to design different Embedded Projects using Transducers and Sensors.
4) Able to analyze the working of different Equipments used in Instrumentation.
5) Able to design different Virtual Instruments using LabVIEW Software.
6) Able to interface different analog components to a Computer controlled Instrumentation System.
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
1
Remember
2
Understand
3
Apply
4
Analyze
5
Evaluate
6
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
113
Remember
1. Define a simple measurement technique.
2. Mention four types of measurement errors.
3. State the need for calibration.
4. When static characteristics are important? State few of them?
5. When dynamic characteristics are important? State few of them?
6. Define accuracy.
7. What is precision?
8. What is sensitivity? State its units.
9. What is tolerance?
10. What is the difference between range and span of an instrument?
Understand
1. Explain the functional elements of measurement system with block diagram.
2. Discuss the static and dynamic characteristics of instruments.
3. Describe the construction and working of PMMC instrument.
4. Derive the torque equation for moving iron instrument
5. Draw and explain the basic block diagram of DMM.
6. What is digital frequency meter? Explain with block diagram.
7. What is XY recorders? Explain the working of XY recorders with neat sketch.
8. Draw and Explain the block diagram of digital storage oscilloscope.
9. Describe the various types of printers.
10. Discuss about the pressure measurement techniques.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A set of reading obtained in an experiment is, 49.7, 50.1, 50 , 49.6, 49.7. Determine arithmetic
mean, mean deviation, standard deviation and variance.
A moving coil voltmeter ha a uniform scale with 100 divisions, the full scale reading is 200V and
1/10 of scale division can be estimated with a fair degree of certainty. Determine the resolution of
instrument in volt.
A moving coil instrument has the following data: number of turns=100, width of coil=20mm,depth
of coil=30 mm,flux density in air gap 0.1Wb/m2. Calculate the deflection torque when a carrying
current of 10mA. Also calculate the deflection if spring constant is 2*10 6 Nm/degrees.
A moving coil ballistic galvanometer of 200 resistance gives a throw of 70 divisions when the
flux through a search coil to which it is connected is reversed. Find the flux density given that the
galvanometer constant is 100C per division and the search coil has 1200 turns, a mean area of
60cm2 and a resistance of 15
The digital input for a 4bit DAC is 0110. Calculate the final output voltage.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Formulate the relation between Digital and Analog Meter.
2. In what way platinum RTD differs from copper RTD?
Create
1. Construct the bridges to measure the unknown resistance, capacitance and inductance.
Unit I
Measurement Concepts & Indicating Equipments
Principles of operation and construction of PMMC Static and dynamic characteristics units and
standards of measurements error analysis moving coil, moving iron meters multi meters True RMS
meters Bridge measurements Maxwell, Kelvin, Hay, Schering, Anderson and Wien bridge Q meters .
Vector meters and distortion meters.
9 Hours
114
Unit II
Transducers
Classification of transducersselecting a transducer strain gaugestemperature transducerLVDT
Advantages and disadvantages capacitive transducersPiezo electric transducers optoelectronic
transducers.
Measurement of Pressure, Temperature, and velocity
9 Hours
Unit III
Function Generators & Analyzers
Function generators RF signal generators Sweep generators Frequency synthesizer wave analyzer
Harmonic distortion analyzer spectrum analyzerheterodyne wave analyzer frequency counterstime
interval measurementmeasurement of voltage, current, phase and frequency using CRO.
Special type of CRO.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Virtual Instrumentation
Introduction block diagram of a virtual instrument physical quantities and analog interfaceshardware and
soft ware user interfaceadvantages over conventional instruments architecture of a virtual instruments
and its relation to the operating system overview of softwarelab view graphical user interface controls
and indicatorslabels and texts data types format data flow programmingediting debugging and running
a virtual instrument graphical programming palettes and tools.
Front panel objects functions and libraries.
9 Hours
Unit V
Modern measurement techniques
A/D &D/A convertersElements of a digital data acquisition system interfacing of transducers
multiplexing Use of recorders in digital systemsdigital recording systemliquid crystal displaycomputer
controlled instrumentation IEEE 488 bus fiber optic measurements for power and system loss.
Optical time domains reflect meter.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Ernest, Doeblin, Dhanesh and N.Manik, Measurement Systems Application and Design, Tata
McGrawHill, 2007.
2. Albert D.Helfrick and William D.Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement
Techniques, PHI, 2003.
Reference(s)
1. B.C.Nakara, K.K.Chaudhry, Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis, Tata McGrawHill , 2004.
2. Jovitha Jerome, Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW, PHI, 2010.
3. Sanjay Gupta, Virtual Instrumentation, LABVIEW, Tata McGrawHill, 2003.
4. Joseph J.Carr, Elements of Electronics Instrumentation and Measurement, PHI, 2003.
5. Alan. S. Morris, Principles of Measurements and Instrumentation, PHI, 2003.
11L503 MICROCONTROLLERS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
115
Program Outcome(s)
a.
b.
d.
e.
h.
Course Outcome(s)
1) Able to understand the evolution and history of Units and Standards.
2) Able to learn different Bridge configurations and their applications.
3) Able to design different Embedded Projects using Transducers and Sensors.
4) Able to analyze the working of different Equipments used in Instrumentation.
5) Able to design different Virtual Instruments using LabVIEW Software.
6) Able to interface different analog components to a Computer controlled Instrumentation System.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. What is Microcontroller?
2. What is the difference between the Microprocessors and Microcontrollers?
3. How the other interrupt can be enabled when the HCS12 is servicing an Interrupt currently?
4. List the features of CAN bus.
5. Compare Microchips PIC and Free scales S12x microcontrollers.
6. Write an assembly language programming to add two 8 bit numbers in S12X Microcontroller?
7. What is mean by loop time subroutine in PIC microcontroller?
8. What do you mean by pre scaling of PIC timers? What is the advantage of doing so? What is the
use of post scaling?
9. State the application of PORTB change interrupt. How to enable this interrupt.
10. What are the various addressing modes in PIC microcontroller? What is the role of INDF in
indirect addressing mode?
11. What is mean by loop time subroutine in PIC microcontroller?
12. What do you mean by pre scaling of PIC timers? What is the advantage of doing so? What is the
use of post scaling?
13. What are the essential items needed to make up a development system for programming
microcontroller.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
116
Understand
1. Write the steps to (i) Enable Timer 1 Interrupt and External hardware Interrupt 1 (ii)Disable Timer
1 Interrupt
2. What should be the value of TI and RI bits to enable Transmission and Reception?
3. How the other interrupt can be enabled when the HCS12 is servicing an Interrupt currently?
4. Name four major differences between microprocessors and Microcontrollers
5. Find the baud rate for serial port in mode 0 for a 6 MHz crystal.
6. How many operating modes available in S12/S12x microcontroller? List.
7. What is use of I2c interface? What is the main advantage?
8. What is the role of INDF in indirect addressing mode?
9. What is mean by loop time subroutine in PIC microcontroller?
10. What do you mean by pre scaling of PIC timers? What is the advantage of doing so? What is the
use of post scaling?
11. State the application of PORTB change interrupt. How to enable this interrupt.
12. What are the essential items needed to make up a development system for programming
microcontrollers?
13. Compare Microchips PIC and Free scales S12x microcontrollers.
Apply
1.
An automotive company wish to use a microcontroller based stepper motor controller in one of its
product. If you are the development Engineer for such a product, which development tools would
you use? Which microcontroller would you select for that product? Explain in detail the stages in
the process of developing, giving the name of tools used and controller selected and justify your
selection of the controller for that product?
Analyze
1. Write the notes on architectural based difference between 8051, HS12,PIC, MSP430?
2. Compare the peripheral modules of, HS12,PIC, MSP430
Evaluate
1. Write an assembly language programming to divide two 16 bit numbers in PIC16CXX
microcontroller
2. Write an assembly language programming to add two 8 bit numbers in S12X Microcontroller
3. A device which is having a characteristic of changing its resistance when the intensity of incident
light varies is connected to channel number 4.Configure the registers of S12X controller to sense
the variation in resistance and display the result digitally.
Create
1. Design, implementation, and demonstration of a model of a conveyor control system. It includes
frequency measurement and motor control using PWM technique.
Unit I
Freescale S12X Microcontroller
Introduction to the S12 and S12X Microcontroller, S12 Assembly Programming, Interrupts, Clock
Generation, Resets, and Operation Modes, Parallel Ports.
9 Hours
Unit II
Freescale S12X Microcontroller Peripherals
AnalogtoDigital Converter, Controller Area Network (CAN), Internal Memory Configuration and
External Memory Expansion, Hardware and Software Development Tools.
9 Hours
Unit III
PIC Microcontroller
PIC Microcontroller: CPU Architecture and instruction sets: Hardware architecture and pipelining program memory consideration register file structure and addressing modes CPU Register instruction
set.
Loop time subroutine.
9 Hours
117
Unit IV
Microcontroller Timer and Interrupts
Timer and interrupts: timer use interrupt logic timer2 scalar initialization. External interrupts and
timers: timer0 compare / capture mode timer1/ CCP programmable period scalar. Timer1 and sleep
mode PWM O/P
Port B Change interrupts.
9 Hours
Unit V
MSP430 Microcontroller
MSP430  Functional Block Diagram Pin Diagram Low Power Modes CPU Architecture Functions
and Subroutines Calling, Parameter passing and Returning Interrupts Timers Analog Interfaces
Serial Communications SPI, I2C, UART Programming  C Language Examples.
Simple System Design.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. John B.Peatman, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. Han.Way Huang, The HCS2/9S12 An Introduction to Hardware and Software Interfacing,
Thomson Delmar Cengage Learning, 2005.
2. John H.Davies, MSP430 Microcontroller Basics, Newnes Publishers, 2008.
11L504 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded
microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel
language programs.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
1) Able to know about the issues and challenges in embedded system design.
2) Able to design embedded processor architecture.
3) Able to know about the difference between RISC and CISC architecture and VLIW & DSP
processor.
4) Able to write C program for interrupts and I2C and UART.
5) Able to demonstrate the basic difference between OS and RTOS.
118
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
1
Remember
2
Understand
3
Apply
4
Analyze
5
Evaluate
6
Create
Total
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Understand
1. What are the issues and challenges in embedded system design?
2. Differentiate configurable processors and multicore processors.
3. What are the levels in instruction set architecture?
4. Define RISC architecture.
5. What is VLIW processor?
6. List the types of addressing modes in RISC processors.
7. What do you mean by cache coherency problem?
8. What is a linker?
9. Give some of the system boot up codes.
10. How peripherals are programmed using embedded software?
11. Define embedded tool chain.
12. What is flash memory?
13. Differentiate NOR and NAND flash memory.
14. List the bus devices for embedded processors.
15. Give some advantages of cold fire processor.
16. What is TPU?
17. Define Interrupt.
18. What is OSless system?
19. How CPU is managed in embedded systems?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
119
Apply
1. Write a C programming example for generating interrupts in HCS12 processor.
2. Write a C program for UART in HCS12 processor.
3. C program for interfacing CAN bus in cold fire processor.
Analyze
1.
2.
Evaluate
1.
Create
1.
Unit I
Embedded System Introduction
Introduction to Embedded Computing, Issues and Challenges in Embedded System Design, Trends: SOC,
custom designed chips, configurable processors and multicore processors. Embedded Processor
Architecture: General concepts Instruction Set Architecture, Levels in architecture, Functional
description.
Hardware/software tradeoff.
9 Hours
Unit II
Embedded Hardware
Introduction to RISC architecture, pipelining, Instruction issue and execution, Instruction formats,
Addressing modes, Data alignment and byte ordering, Introduction to VLIW and DSP processors. Memory
model hierarchy and management, virtual memory concepts, protection, cache and SPM, Introduction to
the cache coherency problem. C Programming examples for interrupts, UART.
Input and Output in S12X processor
9 Hours
Unit III
Embedded System Software
Components of an embedded software system, system boot up and downloading code, System memory
map, allocating sections through linker command file, Programming peripherals and ISRs, Embedded tool
chain. Mixing C and Assembly concurrent software.
Memory management and system initialization
9 Hours
Unit IV
Peripherals and BUS devices
SRAM, DRAM, SDRAM, DDR, NOR and NAND Flash, Ethernet, TPU, UART, USB, I2C bus, SPI bus,
CAN bus. C Programming examples for Interrupts, I2C, CAN.
TPU and Ethernet in Cold Fire processor
9 Hours
Unit V
Operating System
Embedded Operating Systems OSless system, Introduction to RTOS Special considerations in an RTOS,
CPU management.
MicroC/OSII RTOS.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
120
121
Textbook(s)
1. Embedded Systems Architecture: A Comprehensive Guide for Engineers and Programmers by
Tammy NoergaardMicroC/OSII: The RealTime Kernel by Jean J. Labrosse
Reference(s)
1. MicroC/OSII: The RealTime Kernel by Jean J. Labrosse
2. Embedded System design, Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis, Johnwiley.
3. The HCS12/9S12, An Introduction to Hardware and Software Interfacing By HanWay Huang
4. An Embedded Software Primer, David ESimson, Pearson education.
5. ColdFire Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, MunirBannoura, Rudan Bettelheim, Richard Soja
6. HCS12 microcontrollers reference manual, Freescale semiconductor
7. ColdFire processor reference manual, Freescale semiconductor.
11L505 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS AND WAVEGUIDES
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To understand the concepts of Coordinate systems
To gain knowledge on electric fields and magnetic fields associated with laws
To know the concepts of electric and magnetic fields in materials
To study time varying electric and magnetic fields
To acquire basic knowledge of Guided waves
To make the students to understand the concepts of rectangular and circular waveguides.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
1) Able to calculate static electric field due to discrete charges.
2) Able to calculate static magnetic field intensity due to loops.
3) Able to design and interpret boundary conditions for electric and magnetic fields.
4) Able to design rectangular and circular waveguide to meet the frequency requirements.
5) Able to analyze Q factor for rectangular and circular cavity resonator.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
30
30
25
10
5
100
30
30
25
10
5
100
25
25
25
15
5
5
100
25
25
25
15
5
5
100
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
Remember
1. State Divergence theorem.
2. Define Curl.
3. State Gauss law and electric flux density.
4. Define Electric field Intensity.
5. State Coulombs law and express it in vector form.
6. Define gradient and write its mathematical expression in cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates.
7. GivenvectorsA=3ax+4ay+az and B=2ay5 az, find the angle between A and B.
8. Find the force in Newtons on charge Q1=20C situated at (0, 1, 2) m due to charge Q2=300C
situated at (2, 0, 0)m
9. What is the difference between scalar and magnetic potential?
10. State BiotSavart law and express it in vector form.
11. Define Faradays Law and write its equation
12. Differentiate between electric and magnetic fields.
13. Define Magnetization.
14. State Poissons equation and mention the conditions under which it reduces to Laplace equation.
15. State Faraday's law for a moving charge in a constant magnetic field.
16. Provide the boundary condition for the normal component of the magnetic field intensity vector at
the interface between two magnetic materials
17. Define Poynting vector.
18. Derive Laplaces and Poissons equations from fundamentals?
19. Write the four Maxwells equation for time varying fields.
20. What is skin effect and skin depth?
21. Write the intrinsic impedance for the free space.
22. Define the Quality factor of a resonator.
23. What are the characteristics of TEM waves?
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Apply the Amperes law into infinite sheet of current & find the magnetic field intensity
Convertpoint P (2, 6,3) fromcartesiantocylindrical and sphericalcoordinates.
A current of 2 A is flowing in an inductor of inductance 100 mH. What is the energy stored in the
inductor?
122
3.
4.
5.
6.
A plane wave traveling in air is normally incident on a block of paraffin with r=2.2. Find the
reflection and transmission coefficient.
A coaxial cable contains an insulating material of conductivity . If the radius of the central wire
is a and thickness is b, find the conductance of the cable per unit length.
Determine the circulation of D= 2z a + 3z sin a  4 cos az . Verify the Stokess theorem
for the open surface defined by z=1 , 2 < < 3, 0 < < 45 o
A circular ring of radius a carries uniform charge LC/m and is placed on the xy plane. Show that
E (0,0, h)
L ah
2 0 [h 2 a 2 ]3 / 2
az
7.
8.
123
Unit III
Electric and Magnetic Fields in Materials
Poissons and Laplaces equation Electric PolarizationNature of dielectric materials Definition of
Capacitance Capacitance of various geometries using Laplaces equation Electrostatic energy and
energy density Boundary conditions for electric fields Electric current Current density point form of
ohms law continuity equation for current. Definition of Inductance Inductance of loops and solenoids
Definition of mutual inductance simple examples.Energy density in magnetic fields.
Magnetic boundary conditions.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Rectangular Waveguides
Waves between parallel planes of perfect conductorsTransverse Magnetic Waves in Rectangular Wave
guides Transverse Electric Waves in Rectangular Waveguides characteristic of TE and TM Waves
Cutoff wavelength and phase velocity Impossibility of TEM waves in waveguides Dominant mode in
rectangular waveguide Attenuation of TE and TM modes in rectangular waveguides  Wave impedances.
Excitation of TE20, TE11, TM11, TE10 modes.
9 Hours
Unit V
Circular Wave Guides and Resonators
Bessel functions Solution of field equations in cylindrical coordinates TM and TE waves in circular
guides wave impedances Dominant mode in circular waveguide excitation of TE01 mode Microwave
cavities, Rectangular cavity resonators, circular cavity resonator.
Q factor of a cavity resonator for TE101 mode.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
3.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ramo, Whinnery and Van Duzer: Fields and Waves in Communications Electronics John Wiley & Sons
(3rd edition 2003)
NarayanaRao, N : Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics 4 th edition, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 1998.
David K.Cherp: Field and Wave Electromagnetics  Second EditionPearson Edition.
David J.Grithiths: Introduction to Electrodynamics III EditionPHI.
Ramo, Whineery and Van Duzer: Fields and Waves in Communication Electronics John Wiley,2003.
ELECTIVE I
3 0 0 3.0
11L507 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
Program Outcome(s)
a.
f.
g.
able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
124
h.
able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as well
as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
Internal
Semester End
(New Version)
Assessment
Examination
Preparation
Remember
10
15
Understand
Apply
Observation & Results
15
20
Analyze
Evaluate
10
Record
15
15
MiniProject/Model Examination/ VivaVoce
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. State sampling theorem.
2. Define Nyquist rate.
3. What is the need of encoder in PCM?
4. What is meant by quarter nary system?
5. How is PDM Wave converted into PPM systems?
6. What is meant by quantization?
7. What are the various digital data formats and compare them?
8. What are Eye patterns?
9. Why is the quantization noise present in PCM System?
10. What is aperture effect?
11. Define TDM.
12. Define Delta modulation.
13. Define Bipolar encoding.
14. Define Unipolar encoding.
15. Define PAM, PPM, and PWM.
16. At which factor the bandwidth of PPM depends?
17. Define synchronous TDM.
18. Why line coding is required in digital communication?
19. What is meant by aliasing effect? How to rectify it?
20. List the properties of Additive white Gaussian noise.
21. What type of signaling technique is used in binary PCM system? Explain it.
22. Given the data stream 111010100011, sketch the transmitted sequence of pulses for each of the
following line codes Polar NRZ Manchester code.
23. What is correlative coding? Where is it applied?
24. What is raised cosine pulse?
25. Obtain the signal constellation of a BPSK and BFSK signals.
26. Which is the suitable multiple access technique for digital communication. Justify.
27. List the properties of PN sequence.
125
Understand
1. Why the Synchronization is importance in TDM Systems?
2. What is the purpose of sampling?
3. How to reconstruct the signal from samples?
4. How to avoid aliasing effect
5. What do you mean by natural sampling?
6. List the advantages of Delta modulation Over PCM.
7. Give the Application of dipole antenna.
8. Give the Application of yagiuda antenna
9. Which antenna is to be used for TV Transmission?
10. Merits and Demerits of TDMA.
11. Differentiate between RZ,NRZSpace,NRZ Mark, Manchester codes.
12. What is mean by line coding?
13. What is the use of modulation?
14. How to design RF filters using RF simulator?
15. Why is ASK called as ONOFF keying?
16. What is the difference between PSK and FSK
17. Define Sampling theorem.
18. List the advantages of PCM.
19. Name the two fundamental processes involved in the generation of binary PCM wave and explain.
20. Explain the term Quantization noise.
21. Draw the block diagram of TDM system.
22. Which noise is occurs in PCM?
23. What is quantization?
24. Compare RZ with NRZ coding scheme.
25. Define Inter symbol Interference.
26. Differentiate Binary and Mary PAM transmission.
27. Draw the fundamental model of Pass band data transmission system.
28. Define Bit Error Rate.
29. Give the expression for basis function for BPSK signaling and explain.
Apply / Evaluate
1.
2. Transfer 01101001 in to ,NRZ,NRZ Space, NRZ Mark and Manchester line code formats
3. What will happen to PAM if frequency of modulating signal is changed?
4. Using the Nyquist theorem, calculate the sampling rate for the analog signal with the frequency
range from 2000 to 6000 hz
5. If PWM wave is given to integrator circuit obtain the output waveform for RC<<T
6. If PWM wave is given to Differentiator, what will be the output?
7. Consider a binary input ,output channel shown below
0.8
X1
X2
0.2
1
Y1
Y2
0.3
0.7
X3
Create
1. A conversation is to be transmitted by PN spread spectrum. Y3
Assuming the spectrum of speech
waveform is band limited to 4kHz.Fing chip rate required to obtain a PG of 20 db. Give that
sequence length is greater than 5 hrs, find no. of shift register stages required.
2. A recorded conversation is to be transmitted by PN spread spectrum. Assuming the spectrum of
speech waveform is band limited to 3kHz.Fing chip rate required to obtain a PG of 20 db.
3. A rate 2/3 convolution code is described by g1=[1 0 1 1, g2=[1 1 0 1],
g3=[1 0 1 0] . O/P of
demodulator detector is (01011111110111),usingviterbi algorithm, find surviving path.
126
4.
127
A convolutional code is described by g1=[1 0 0], g2=[1 0 1],g3=[1 1 1] Find the advance transfer
function and the free distance of this code
List of Experiments
1. Digital modulation ASK, PSK, FSK.
2. Pulse Code Modulation
3. Time division multiplexing.
4. Line coding & Decoding.
5. Delta modulation, Delta sigma Modulation, Adaptive Delta Modulation
6. Scrambler and Unscrambler
7. Implementation of Encoder and Decoder circuits for Linear Block Codes
8. Implementation of Encoder and Decoder circuits for Convolutional Codes
9. Implementation of Encoder and Decoder circuits for Cyclic Codes
10. PN Sequence Generation
11. Design and implementation of Equalizers
Simulator Experiments (Using Simtel)
1. Simulation of Digital Modulation techniques (ASK,FSK,PSK,QAM)
2. Simulation of TDM
3. Simulation of Line coding and Decoding Techniques
4. Simulation of Delta modulation, Delta sigma Modulation, Adaptive Delta Modulation
5. Simulation of Different types of Encoding Techniques
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl.No
Experiment
Hours
1
Digital modulation ASK, PSK, FSK
3
2
Pulse Code Modulation,Time division multiplexing.
6
3
Line coding & Decoding.
3
4
Delta modulation, Delta sigma Modulation, Adaptive Delta Modulation
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
k.
able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as well
as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
10
15
10
15
50
15
20
15
50
Preparation
Observation & Results
Record
MiniProject/Model Examination/VivaVoce
Total
Remember
1. What is true value?
2. What is fidelity?
3. What is settling time of an instrument?
4. What is an absolute instrument?
5. What is secondary instrument?
6. Define limiting error?
7. What are the various elements of measuring system?.
8. How are errors classified?
9. Define sensitivity and zero drift.
10. What are systematic errors?
Understand
1. What is probable error?
2. Define standard deviation.
3. List the advantages of electronic voltmeter
4. What is Phase meter? State its two types.
5. What is GUI?
6. Define debugging.
7. What is the difference between functions and libraries?
8. List the elements of data acquisition system.
Apply / Evaluate
1. An a.c bridge has the following constants
a. Arm AB Capacitor of .5F in parallel with 1K resistance.
b. Arm ADResistance of 2K
c. Arm BC Capacitor of .5F
d. Arm CD Unknown Cx and Rx in series.
e. Frequency 1 KHz Determine the unknown capacitance and dissipation factor.
2. An a.c voltmeter uses half wave rectifier and the basic meter with full scale deflection of 1mA and
meter resistance of 200. Calculate the multiplier resistance for a 10V rms range on the voltmeter.
3. An 8bit DAC has an output voltage range of 0 2.55V. Define its resolution.
4. Find out the step size and analog output for 4bit R2R ladder DAC when input is 1000 and 1111.
Assume Vref = +5V.
5. What is the acceptance angle of a fiber with a core index of refraction 1.49 and a cladding index of
1.47. Also find the numerical aperture of a fiber.
128
Create
1.
A PMMC type full wave bridge rectifier ammeter is used to measure current in a load connected
across a supply voltage of V =5 Sin + 0.6 Sin 3. Determine the reading on the ammeter if its
resistance is 30 . Assume dynamic resistance of each diode as 35 under forward bias
condition.
List of Experiments
1. Schering Bridge and Maxwells Inductance Bridge
2. Wheatstone Bridge and Kelvin Double Bridge
3. Measurement of frequency through Wien bridge
4. Characteristics of LVDT, I/P Converter and P/I converter
5. Temperature measurement using RTD, Thermistor and IC AD590
6. Thermocouple based ONOFF controller
7. Measurement of Physical quantities Strain, torque and angle
Simulator Experiments
1. Introduction to Lab VIEW Programming (Creating, Editing and debugging a VI )
2. Programming Techniques in LabVIEW
3. Basic Concepts of Data Acquisition and Terminology
4. Analog Input, Analog Output, and Digital I/O based Data Acquisition
5. Temperature measurement using LabVIEW
6. Vibration and Harmonics measurement using LabVIEW
7. Schering Bridge and Maxwells Inductance Bridge using LabVIEW
8. Wheatstone Bridge and Kelvin Double Bridge using LabVIEW
9. Measurement of frequency through Wien bridge using LabVIEW
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl.No
Experiment
Hours
1
2
3
3
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
6
3
6
3
3
3
6
3
3
129
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
b. able to demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
e. able to acquire a working knowledge of computer hardware, software and networking skills.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as well
as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome(s)
1. Implementation of various assembly language programs
2. Interfacing the peripherals for various application in microcontrollers
3. Knowledge of design on interfacing the application module with project board
4. Knowledge of ports interfacing
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
Internal
Semester End
(New Version)
Assessment
Examination
Preparation
Remember
10
15
Understand
Apply
Observation & Results
15
20
Analyze
Evaluate
10
Record
15
15
MiniProject/Model Examination/ VivaVoce
Total
50
50
Remember
1. What is the difference between the Microprocessors and Microcontrollers?
2. How the other interrupt can be enabled when the HCS12 is servicing an Interrupt currently?
3. List the features of CAN bus.
4. Compare Microchips PIC and Free scales S12x microcontrollers.
5. Write an assembly language programming to add two 8 bit numbers in S12X
Microcontroller.
6. What is mean by loop time subroutine in PIC microcontroller?
7. What do you mean by pre scaling of PIC timers? What is the advantage of doing so? What is the
use of post scaling?
8. State the application of PORTB change interrupt. How to enable this interrupt.
9. What are the various addressing modes in PIC microcontroller?
10. What is the role of INDF in indirect addressing mode?
11. What is mean by loop time subroutine in PIC microcontroller?
12. What do you mean by pre scaling of PIC timers? What is the advantage of doing so? What is the
use of post scaling?
13. What are the essential items needed to make up a development system for programming
microcontrollers?
Understand
1. Calculate the time taken by a program to execute from the instructions used.
2. Describe the process of converting numbers from binary to BCD and vice versa.
3. How numbers are converted from binary to decimal and vice versa?
4. State the differences between microprocessor and microcontrollers.
5. Explain the various types of interrupts in S12x
6. Recognize the advantage of using a higher bit processor.
7. Explain the process of Analog to digital conversion in S12x controller
130
Apply / Evaluate
1. Write an ALP to rotate the stepper motor in anti clockwise direction using MSP430
2. Write a C program to interface LED in the project board using S12X controller.
3. Write a C program to interface Seven Segment LED through MCP23016 with PIC16F877 and
display the message BIT .
4. A device which is having a characteristic of changing its resistance when the intensity of incident
light varies is connected to channel number .Configure the registers of S12X controller to sense
the variation in resistance and display the result digitally.
Create
1. Implementation of engineering application in Microcontrollers
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PIC
I2C Interfacing
Interrupt Programming
ADC Programming
Key Pad Switch
S12X
I/O Ports Interfacing
CAN Interfacing
Programming Serial Communication Modules
Sensor and Potentiometer Interfacing
MSP430
Timer Module experiments
SPI Programming
Stepper Motor Interfacing
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl.No
Experiment
Hours
1
Arithmetic Operation
3
2
Code conversion
6
3
Sorting Algorithm
3
4
7 Segment Display Interface
3
5
I2C Interfacing
3
6
Interrupt Programming
3
7
ADC Programming
3
8
I/O Ports Interfacing
6
9
CAN Interfacing
3
10
Programming Serial Communication Modules
3
11
Timer Module experiments
3
12
SPI Programming
3
13
Stepper Motor Interfacing
3
11L601 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
131
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
Able to acquire knowledge about image fundamentals and mathematical transforms required
for image processing.
2. Able to perform image analysis by designing spatial and frequency domain filters.
3. Able to understand the concepts of image segmentation and pattern recognition and to develop an
object recognition system.
4. Able to learn the concepts of image compression and to compress an image using lossy and
lossless compression scheme.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. Define Weber ratio.
2. What is brightness adaptation?
3. What is brightness discrimination?
4. What is mach band effect?
5. What do you meant by pixels?
6. Define 8connectivity.
7. What is called euclidean distance?
8. Define orthogonal matrix and unitary matrix.
9. Give some properties of Haar transform.
10. What is meant by Kl transform?
11. What is point processing?
12. What is meant by gray level slicing?
13. What is meant by bit plane slicing?
14. What is histogram equalization?
15. Write the equation for wiener filtering.
16. Draw 3*3 sobelmask.
17. Draw 3*3 prewittmask.
18. State Parsevals theorem.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
132
Perform the linear convolution between the two matrices x(m,n) and h(m,n) given below.
2.
X(m,n)=
3.
Compute the 2D dft of the 4*4 gray scale image given below
4.
5.
i. f(x,y)=
Compute the Haar basis for N=8
Compute the discrete cosine transform (DCT)matrix or N=4
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
h(m,n)=
133
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
1.
2.
Create
1. Determine the Hadamard matrix of order N=8 and obtain its inverse.
2.
is orthogonal.
3. Compute the median value for the pixels shown in the matrix
.
Unit I
Digital Image Fundamentals and Image Transforms
Elements of digital image processing systems, Elements of Visual perception, Image sampling and
quantization, Basic Relationships between pixels. Cosine, Hadamard, Haar, Walsh, Slant transform.
KL transform and their properties.
9 Hours
Unit II
Image Analysis
Histogram Equalization and specification techniques, Basics of spatial Filtering Smoothing spatial filters
and Sharpening spatial filters, Smoothing and sharpening Frequency Domain Filters.
Homomorphic filtering
9 Hours
Unit III
Image Segmentation
Point ,Line and edge detectionDetection and Isolated points, Line Detection, Edge Models, Basic edge
detection, Edge linking and boundary detection , Thersholding, RegionBased segmentationRegion
growing.
Region splitting and merging.
9 Hours
134
Unit IV
Image Restoration and Recognition
Image degradation model, Noise models, RestorationSpatial Filtering, Constrained Least square filtering,
inverse filtering, Wiener Filtering, Pattern Classes, Minimum Distance classifiers, Training by Back
Propagation.
Applications of neural networks in image processing
9 Hours
Unit V
Image Compression
Huffman coding, arithmetic coding, Lossless and Lossy predictive coding, transform coding, wavelet
coding, JPEG. MPEG Standards.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. C.Rafeal Gonzalez and E.Richard Woods, Digital Image Processing, Pearson Education 2007.
2. Anil K.Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, PHI, 1997.
Reference(s)
1. K.William Pratt, Digital Image Processing, John Wiley, 1997.
2. M.A.Sid Ahmed, Image Processing Theory, Algorithm and Architectures, McGrawHill, 1995
3. S Jayaraman, S Esakkirajan T Veerakumar, Digital Image Processing , McGrawHill.2010
11L602 COMPUTER NETWORKS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand the stateoftheart in network protocols, architectures and applications.
To study the functions of different layers.
To familiarize the various aspects of computer networks.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
b. able to demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
e. able to acquire a working knowledge of computer hardware, software and networking skills.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Demonstrate the networking strategies.
2. Identify the technical issues related to networking technologies.
3. Design and build a network using routers.
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
135
Remember
1. Define network
2. What are the key design issues of a computer network?
3. List the advantages of optical fiber.
4. What is circuit switching and what are its chief characteristics?
5. List the encapsulation involved in the creation of an Ethernet frame.
6. What is the difference between routable and non routable protocols?
7. What is multicast routing?
8. What is a DNS resource record?
9. What are the two interfaces provided by protocols?
10. What is redundancy?
11. What are the functions of MAC?
12. What is a link?
13. Define node.
14. What is meant by gateway?
15. What is pointtopoint link?
16. Name the factors that affect the security of the network.
17. What is protocol?
18. What are the key elements of protocols?
19. Define routing
20. What is a peerpeer process?
21. What is semantic gap?
22. Define the terms Unicasting, Multicasting and Broadcasting
23. List the layers of OSI.
24. What are the Data link protocols?
25. What is Forward Error Correction?
26. What is framing?
27. What is bit stuffing?
28. What is StopandWait Protocol?
29. What is sliding window?
30. Mention the categories of flow control.
31. What is meant by congestion?
32. Give the main idea of UDP.
33. Define TCP
34. What is meant by quality of service?
35. What are the two categories of QoS attributes?
36. Give the format of HTTP request message.
37. What is the purpose of Domain Name System?
Understand
1. How are the guided media differing from unguided transmission media?
2. Identify the address class of 123.167.23.20 and 250.10.24.96.
3. Can multiple circuits share a single optical fiber in a circuitswitched network?
4. Explain the data frame format of IEEE 802.11 Standard.
5. Write the subnet, broadcast address and valid host range for the following:
a. 172.16.10.5
255.255.255.128
b. 172.16.10.33
255.255.255.224
c. 172.16.10.65
255.255.255.192
d. 172.16.10.17
255.255.255.252
6. The Network address is 192.168.10.0 and the Subnet mask is 255.255.255.252.
Find out a. How many subnets?
b. How many hosts?
7. How many connections are required to connect 20 computers in a mesh network?
136
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For the bit stream 100010100, draw the waveform for Manchester and Differential Manchester
Coding and also discuss the advantages of the coding schemes.
Calculate the latency of a packet transferred between two hosts A and B on a local network, where
they are connected via a cable of length 6.21 m, the packet size is 2024 bytes, and the capacity of
the cable is 56 bps. (Assume that queuing delays are not considered. Also recall that 1 byte = 8
bits, and the speed of light = 3.0x108 m/s.)
An end system sends 50 packets per sec using UDP protocol over a full duplex 100Mbps Ethernet
LAN connection. Each packet consists of 1600 bytes of Ethernet frames payload data. Compute
the throughput at UDP layer.
Convert a classless (CIDR) network address (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24) to its IP address/mask
equivalent (e.g. 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.0) and vice versa
A collection of five routers is to be connected in a pointtopoint subnet. Between each pair of
routers, the designers may put a highspeed line, a mediumspeed line, or a lowspeed line, or no
line. If it takes 100 ms of computer time to generate and inspect each topology, compute the time
required to
inspect all of them.
Draw a simple topology of routers with multiple connections. The connections should be assigned
costs. What is the state of the routing table for each node before any distance vectors were
exchanged? Now, exchange a few distance vectors between the routers and determine the routing
tables which have changed.
Analyze
1.
Identify whether circuit switching system or a packet switching preferable for broadcasting a copy
of a video presentation. Why?
2. Switching can improve the efficiency of a networks link utilization, but may also cause problems.
In a packetswitched network, two particular problems are increased latency and data loss.
I.
Taking the IP packetswitching, explain how latency and loss might occur.
II.
To what extent are the problems of latency and loss less significant in circuitswitched
networks?
Evaluate
1. The switching process consists roughly of a demultiplexing stage, a routing stage and
aremultiplexing stage. For each of the following examples of switching, explain what is being
demultiplexed, what routing decisions are made, and how remultiplexing is performed:
a. packet switching in the postal network;
b. packet switching in an Ethernet switch;
c. packet switching in an IP router;
2. Circuit switching in the telephone network.
3. Given the extended LAN shown in the figure below, indicate which ports are not selected by the
spanning tree algorithm. The LANs in the figure are labeled AJ and the bridges in the figure are
labeled B1B7. Hub Bi has an ID of i which is used as the tie breaker.
137
Create
1. A routing protocol is a system used by routers to automatically maintain their forwarding tables.
Outline a simple routing protocol which might be used to maintain the table under shortest path
routing policy. Mention any additional information that you must store in the router, and any
problems you notice.
2. A company has two LANs, one in Chennai with 300 hosts and another one in Madurai with 150
hosts. Could it be possible to connect those networks to the Internet using only one Class C
network addresses? Justify the answer. If the answer is positive, create a network layout, assign IP
addresses to every router and to one host in the network, and specify the routing tables of all
routers and the specified host.
Unit I
Introduction
InternetNuts and Bolts  Service description  Network Edge  Network Core  Circuit Switching and
Packet Switching  Packet Switched Networks  Datagram and Virtual Circuit  Access Networks and
Physical Media ISPs and Intenet Backbones Delay and Loss in Packet Switched Networks Protocol
Layers and Service Models .
History of Computer Networking and the Internet
9 Hours
Unit II
Networks and Application Layer
Network Edge Network Core Protocol Layers and Service Models Principles of Network
Applications Web and HTTP File Transfer Protocol Electronic Mail SMTP Domain Name System
P2P File Sharing Socket Programming with TCP Client/Server Application in Java  Socket
Programming with UDP Simple Web Server.
Web Server Functions and Problems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Transport Layer
Transport Layer Services Multiplexing and Demultiplexing User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Principles
of Reliable Data Transfer Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).
Congestion Control.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Network Layer
Virtual Circuit and Datagram Networks Router Internet Protocol (IP) Routing Algorithms Link
State Routing Distance Vector Routing Routing in Internet RIP OSPF BGP.
Broadcast and Multicast Routing.
9 Hours
Unit V
Data Link Layer
Link Layer Services Error Correction and Detection Techniques Multiple Access Protocols Link
Layer Addressing EthernetHubs and Switches PointtoPoint Protocol Link Virtualization ATM
MPLS. 802.11 Wireless LAN
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
James F.Kurose& Keith W.Ross, Computer Networking A Topdown Approach Featuring the
Internet, PHI, 2007.
Reference(s)
1. A.BehrouzForuzan, Data communication and Networking, Tata McGrawHill, 2007..
2. Larry L.Peterson&S.Peter Davie, Computer Networks, Harcourt, 2004.
3. Andrew S.Tannenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI, 2003.
4. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, PHI 2000.
138
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
1
Remember
25
25
2
Understand
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
6
Create
Total
100
100
Remember
1. Define electromagnetic spectrum
2. Differentiate active and passive devices
3. Define two port networks
4. Define transits time
5. What are drawbacks in high frequency parameters?
6. What are the types of termination?
7. Define port.
8. Define skin effect
9. List out microwave passive components
10. Define strip line
11. What is radiation efficiency?
12. List the methods for measuring dielectric constants?
13. What is spectrum analyzer?
14. List the types of spectrum analyzer
15. What is Gyrator?
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
139
140
Unit II
Microwave Measurements
Slotted line VSWR measurement impedance measurement insertion loss and attenuation measurementsmeasurement of scattering parameters  Return loss measurement using directional couplerIntroduction to
vector network analyzer and its uses return loss and insertion loss Measurement of return loss and
Insertion loss using Spectrum analyzer.
Noise figure Measurement.
9 Hours
Unit III
Microwave Semiconductor Devices
GunnEffect Gunn Diode Differential Negative Resistance Modes of Operation AmplificationMicrowave Generation Read Diode Physical Description Avalanche Multiplication IMPATT DiodesTRAPATT Diode BARITT Diode Principles of Operation Physical Structures Parametric Amplifiers Nonlinear Reactance and Manley.
Rowe Power Relations.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Planner Transmission Lines
Introduction Microstrip Lines Derivation of Characteristic Impedance of Microstrip Lines using Quasi
Static analysis Losses in Microstrip Lines Quality Factor Q of Microstrip Lines Substrate materialssurface wave excitation Parallel Strip Lines Characteristic ImpedanceAttenuation losses Coplanar Strip
Lines Shielded Strip LineProblems .
Microstrip based broadband matching networks.
9 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to RADAR
Basic RADAR, The simple from of the RADAR Equation. RADAR Block diagram, RADAR frequencies,
Application of RADAR, the origin of RADER. The RADER equation: introduction, Detection of signals in
noise. Propagation of RADAR Waves.
RADAR Antennas, Transmitter, Receiver.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. David.M.Pozar, Microwave Engineering, John Wiley, 2003.
2. I.SkolnikMerill , Introduction to Radar Systems, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001
Reference(s)
1. Samuel.Y.Liao, MicrowaveDevices and Circuits, PHI, 2000.
2. Annapurna Das and SisirK.Das,Microwave Engineering, Tata Mc GrawHill,2000
3. R.E.Collin, Foundations for Microwave Engineering IEEE Press 2002.
4. BharathiBhat, ShibanK.Koul, Striplinelike transmission lines for microwave integrated circuits,
New Age International, 1999
5. Harold Mott remote sensing with polar metric Radar John Wiley, 2007.
11L604 RF SYSTEM
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To demonstrate RF amplifiers and matching networks.
To design power amplifiers
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
141
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to calculate the stability of feedback systems using root locus techniques.
2. Able to measure the characteristics of mixers.
3. Able to compute the impedance matching networks.
4. Design of RF mixers.
5. Design of power amplifiers using lag, lead and laglead compensation
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
25
25
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define the line parameters.
2. What are the secondary constants of a line? Why the line parameters are called distributed
elements?
3. Define Characteristic impedance
4. Define Propagation constant.
5. What are the types of line distortions?
6. What is delay distortion?
7. What is a distortion less line? What is the condition for a distortion less line?
8. What is loading?
9. What is Impedance matching?
10. When reflection occurs in a line?
11. What is standing wave ratio?
12. What is the application of the quarter wave matching section?
13. Explain impendence matching using stub.
14. List the applications of the smith chart.
15. What are the difficulties in single stub matching?
16. What is double stub matching?
Understand
1. What are mixer characteristics?
2. Define PLL.
3. Write the function of matching networks?
4. What is function of input and output matching networks?
5. Define transducer power gain.
6. What is bipolar transistor?
7. Write the applications of bipolar transistors.
8. What are the configurations available in bipolar transistors?
9. What are the available in negative resistance device?
10. What are scattering coefficients?
11. Write a short note on feedback of RF circuit.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
142
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Differentiate single ended and double ended stub matching.
2. Comparison of homodyne and heterodyne receivers.
Unit I
Passive RF Components and Transmission Line Analysis
Importance of Radiofrequency design  Dimensions and units  Frequency Spectrum  RF behavior of
Passive components  Transmission line analysis  General Transmission line equation  Micro strip
Transmission line  Terminated lossless Transmission line  Special termination  Sourced and Loaded
Transmission line  Smith Chart.
Impedance transformation  Admittance transformation
9 Hours
Unit II
Design of Filters and Matching Networks
Basic Resonator and Filter configurations  Special Filter Realizations  Filter Implementation  Microstripline Matching Networks.
Impedance matching using discrete components
9 Hours
Unit III
RF Active Components and Modeling
Components: RF Diode, RF Bipolar Junction Transistor, RF Field Effect Transistor  Modeling: Diode
model, Transistor model and FET model.
Noise model of FET.
9 Hours
Unit IV
IC based RF LNA and Power Amplifiers
Noise Definition and Noise Models  Two Port noise parameters of MOSFET  LNA Topologies  Noise
match and Power match Considerations  Linearity and Large Signal Performance of LNAs  Feedback and
RF Stability Criteria  Gain and Phase Margins Power amplifiers: Class A,B,C,D,E,F  PA Characteristics PA Design examples.
Compensation Techniques.
9 Hours
Unit V
IC based RF Building Blocks
Mixers: Fundamentals, Non Linear Mixers, Multiplier based Mixers and SubSampling Mixers Linearized
PLL Model  Noise Properties of PLLs  Phase Detectors  Loop Filters  Charge Pumps  PLL Design
Examples  Oscillators  Describing functions  Resonators
Detailed considerations of Phase noise.
9 Hours
Total:45 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. Reinhold Ludwig Pavel Bretchko, RF Circuit Design, Pearson Education Asia Publication, New
Delhi, 2001.
2. Thomas Lee, The design of radio Frequency CMOS Integrated circuits, Cambridge University
press, 2nd Edition,2004
143
Reference(s)
1. Matthew M. Radmanesh Radio Frequency and Microwave Electronics illustrated, Pearson
Education Asia Publication, New Delhi, 2001.
2. Ulrich Rhode, RF/Microwave Circuit design for Wireless Applications, John Wiley, 2000.
3. Peter P. Kenington High linearity RF Amplifier Design, Artech House, Mumbai, 2002.
11L605 SYSTEM DESIGN WITH FPGA
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To make the student learn, FPGA fundamentals, design and implementation of circuits in them
To give basic knowledge of FPGA internals.
To give basic understanding of tools used.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
b. able to demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
e. able to acquire a working knowledge of computer hardware, software and networking skills.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome(s)
1. FPGA and ASIC's have become a part of many embedded systems. In this subject we introduce
FPGA's and some basic principles needed for FPGA design.
2. The role of FPGA's and ASIC are perceived to be enormous in embedded systems and hence this
subject is offered
3. Determine the Programmable logic cells
4. Design VHDL and Verilog HDL coding
5. Testing of different fault simulations
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. Define FPGA.
2. What are types of FPGA?
3. Draw FPGA Design Flow.
4. Mention the various levels of modeling.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
144
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Understand
1. Why transmission gate is called rationed logic?
2. What is the basic difference between flipflop and latch?
3. Why do you use pipelining method sequential logic cells?
4. Why EPROM technology is called as floating gate avalanche MOS?
5. What is meant by two pass logic in logic expanders?
6. How to avoid the metastability in flipflops?
7. What is meant by node collapsing?
Apply
1.
2.
If Idsn (sat) =2.5 mA, Vds=3.0v, Vgs=3.0v, Vth=0.65v, T ox=100A. find the Tranconductance?
Suppose we set A=B=C= 1, what is the value of signal at F=?
A
3.
4.
5.
M1
M2
Apply Shannon expansion theorem to implement the following function using ACT1 logic
module? F= (A.B) + (B.C) +D
Find the controllability and observability measures for logic gates?
Find the test patterns for the following logic equation F=AB+AC
Analyze
1. Analyze the operation of Physical Design Flow in FPGA?
2. Analyze the timing model for sequential logic cells?
3. Illustrate the Lee maze running algorithm?
4. Analyze the basic steps involved in Test pattern generation methods and algorithm with suitable
examples?
Evaluate
1. Design 32 bit Wallace tree multiplier and calculate the timing delay model for multiplier?
2. Evaluate the performance of 8 bit carry select adder in data path logic cells?
3. Design and synthesis of 8 bit divider using VerilogHDL?
4. How to find interconnect delay model in RC network using Elmore constant?
Create
1. Design a FIR Filter using adders and multipliers.
2. Design and synthesis of RAM circuits in VerilogHDL?
3. Design FSM using FPGA?
145
Unit I
Programmable Logic Devices& FPGA
Introduction to FPGA FPGA vs Custom VLSI FPGA Design Flow Basic concepts  Programming
techniques  Programmable Logic Element (PLE) Programmable Logic Array (PLA)  Programmable
Array Logic (PAL) CPLDs CPLD Architectures CPLD Design Flow.
Comparison with FPGAs
9 Hours
Unit II
Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs)
FPGA Architectures Configurable Logic Blocks (CLB)  Xilinx XC3000, Xilinx XC4000, Xilinx XC5200
series Configurable I/O Blocks (I/OB) Programmable Interconnect.
Technology Issues.
9 Hours
Unit III
FPGA Design Flow
Design Entry Functional Simulation Technology Mapping Synthesis Timing Simulation Verification.
Implementation.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Design Techniques, Rules, and Guidelines
Verilog Hardware Description LanguagesVarious Levels of ModelingTopDown DesignSynchronous
Design Xilinx CAD Toolswith design examples.
9 Hours
Unit V
Verification and Testing
Introduction about General concepts in testing Design For Test (DFT) BuiltIn SelfTest (BIST)Signature Analysis Static Timing Analysis.
Formal Verification.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Bob Zeidman, Designing with FPGAs and CPLDs, Elsevier, CMP Books, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. Ion Grout,Digital Systems Design with FPGAs and CPLDs, Elsevier, 2008.
2. Samir Palnitkar, Verilog HDL, Pearson Education, 2 nd Edition, 2004.
3. Michael john Sebastian Smith, Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Addison Wesley, Ninth
Indian Reprint, 2004.
4. W.Wolf, FPGA based System Design, Pearson, 2004
5. Michael L. Bushnell and Vishwani D. Agarwal, Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital and
Mixed Signal VLSI Circuits, Springer, 2000.
ELECTIVE II
3 0 0 3.0
11L607 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To perform different image operations using matlab
To study the performance of different types of edge detection technique
To gain knowledge about the applications of various spatial filtering techniques
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
146
g.
h.
able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
10
15
10
15
50
15
20
15
50
Preparation
Observation & Results
Record
MiniProject/Model Examination/VivaVoce
Total
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Apply / Evaluate
1. Write a Matlab
2. Write a Matlab
3. Write a Matlab
4. Write a Matlab
5.
code
code
code
code
Compute the 2D dft of the 4*4 gray scale image given: f(x,y)=
147
6.
Read an image and perform histrogram equalization of the input and analyse the result.
7.
8.
Read an image and perform image negative of the input and analyse the result.
Create
1. Read the image , then blur the image. Then degrade the image by means of a known blur .Apply the
inverse filter to the blurred image and see the restored image.
2. Read an image , then degrade the image .Then add additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN)to the
degraded image .The image is now degraded as well as corrupted by noise .Then apply
inversefilter to restore the image .comment on the observed image.
List of Experiments
1) Perform various Image Transform .
2) Compute the properties such as convolution & rotation using 2DDFT.
3) Perform various Point Processing
4) Perform image pruning and motion blurring, bit plane removal,
5) Perform various Image Enhancement Techniques
6) Perform frequency domain filtering operation such as low pass , high pass , band pass, band stop.
7) Perform image restoration operation such as inverse filtering, wiener filtering.
8) Perform various edge detectors like First order derivative, Laplacian, Robert, perwitt, sobel, log
and canny.
9) Perform morphological operation such as dilation, erosion, opening, closing.
10) Plot histogram for color image and compute histogram equalization of a color image.
11) Perform watermarking in spatial and frequency domain.
12) Perform second level decomposition using a Haar wavelet.
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl.No
Experiment
Hours
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Perform frequency domain filtering operation such as low pass , high pass , band
pass, band stop
Perform image restoration operation such as inverse filtering, wiener filtering.
8.
Perform various edge detectors like First order derivative, Laplacian, Robert,
perwitt, sobel, log and canny.
9.
10.
Plot histogram for color image and compute histogram equalization of a color
image.
Perform watermarking in spatial and frequency domain.
Perform second level decomposition using a Haar wavelet.
7.
11.
12.
3
3
148
Program Outcome(s)
a.
b.
e,
f.
g.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Install and manage Windows, NetWare, and Linux/Unix server systems.
2. Troubleshoot and repair network problems.
3. Build a simple Web page/intranet.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Preparation
Observation & Results
Record
MiniProject/Model Examination/VivaVoce
Total
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
10
15
10
15
50
15
20
15
50
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
149
Explain the CSMA/CD protocol with binary exponential back off algorithm used on internet.
Assume that a network can cover a distance of 5000 meters and the RTT is 100 sec of the network
operates at a speed of 20Mbps. What should be the minimum frame size to employ CSMA / CD?
Given three IP addresses are 32.46.7.3, 200.132.110.35 and 140.75.8.92. Find their classes,
network addresses, broadcast address and their subnet marks.
Draw the UDP header and explain its fields.
Explain the architecture of WWW as on client / server application.
Describe the various fields of TCP header.
Given the class C network of 204.15.5.0/24, subnet the network in order to create the network in
figure with the host requirements.
2.
Create a VPN to connect to branch office of the department. What would be the preliminary
requirement?
List of Experiments
1. Implementation of Ethernet LAN protocol for star topology
2. Implementation of Ethernet LAN protocol for mesh topology
3. Implementation of Ethernet LAN protocol for bus and ring topology
4. Simulation and Performance comparison of wireless LAN protocols.
5. Implementation of Link state and distance vector routing algorithm
6. Testing the functionality of IPv6 addressing, fragmentation and switch configuration
7. Testing the functionality of IPSec for Transport mode and Tunneling mode
8. Implementation of VOIP application with h323 and SIP protocol
9. Behavior analysis of the TCP variants (Tahoe, Reno, Lite, Newreno, Sack) in the presence of 0, 1,
2, 3and 4 packet drops.
10. Check the performance of Queuing in wired network with bottleneck condition.
11. Design and implementation of wireless networks in Adhoc and infrastructure model
Total: 45 Hours
150
151
Practical Schedule
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Experiment
Implementation of Ethernet LAN protocol for star topology
Implementation of Ethernet LAN protocol for mesh topology
Implementation of Ethernet LAN protocol for bus and ring topology
Simulation and Performance comparison of wireless LAN protocols.
Implementation of Link state and distance vector routing algorithm
Testing the functionality of IPv6 addressing, fragmentation and switch configuration
Testing the functionality of IPSec for Transport mode and Tunneling mode
Implementation of VOIP application with h323 and SIP protocol
Behavior analysis of the TCP variants (Tahoe, Reno, Lite, Newreno, Sack) in the presence
of 0, 1, 2, 3and 4 packet drops.
Check the performance of Queuing in wired network with bottleneck condition.
Design and implementation of wireless networks in Adhoc and infrastructure mode
9
10
11
Hours
3
3
3
6
6
6
3
3
3
6
3
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze/ Evaluate
Create
Total
20
30
20
20
10
100
20
30
20
20
10
100
20
30
20
20
10
100
20
30
20
20
10
100
Remember
1. Define Economics
2. Define Managerial Economics
3. What are the branches of Economics?
4. What are the two methodologies used for Investigation in Economics?
5. Name the other disciplines which are linked to Managerial Economics.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment
will be calculated for 50 marks
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
Understand
1. Explain the nature and scope of Economics.
2. Differentiate between Macro and Micro economics
3. List and explain the focus areas of Managerial economics.
4. Give reasons why Mangers aim to Maximize Sales even at the cost of a lower profit.
5. Explain the steps in the decision making process.
6. Differentiate between Mechanistic and Analytical Decision making with examples.
7. Explain Giffens Paradox.
8. Explain with examples, exceptions to the Law of Demand.
9. Explain the nature of Demand.
10. Differentiate between Extension and Increase in Demand.
11. What is the significance of Elasticity of Demand?
12. Differentiate between Point and Arc Elasticity of Demand.
13. What are the assumptions made when talking about the Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility?
14. Explain the characteristics of the Indifference Curve with examples.
152
15. Explain the concepts of consumers equilibrium and consumers surplus with examples.
16. Can Demand Forecasting principles be applied to Services? Substantiate your answer with an
example.
17. What is the difference between Accounting Cost and Economic Cost? Explain with an example.
18. Match the following type of question between Cost Concepts and their Basis of Distinction
19. Why is a study of CostOutput Relationship necessary for a good Manager?
20. How is Incremental cost different from Sunk Cost?
21. Differentiate between Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition.
22. Explain the concept of a Perfect Market and its features.
23. Explain Total Revenue, Average Revenue and Marginal Revenue.
24. Distinguish between Cost and Price.
25. Explain with an appropriate diagram, the mechanism of pricing in a Perfectly Competitive Market.
26. Explain the role of Time in price determination.
27. Under what conditions can a firm charge different prices for the same products?
28. What are the characteristic features of an oligopoly industry ?
29. What causes Oligopoly?
30. Why does a firm need to have a Pricing Policy?
31. Explain the types and features of Cost Based Pricing.
32. Explain the types and features of Demand Based Pricing.
33. Explain the types and features of Strategy Based Pricing.
34. Under what conditions does a company go in for Cross Subsidization pricing?
35. Explain the Business Entity concept.
36. What are the advantages of Doubleentry Bookkeeping?
37. What is the role of the Central bank in controlling inflation?
Apply
1. Compare the merits and demerits of the Deductive Method and the Inductive Method of
Investigation.
2. Explain decisions based on the degree of certainty of the outcome with examples.
3. Problems involving Marginal and Incremental Costs.
4. Problems concerning Elasticity of Demand.
5. Problems using statistical methods for Demand Forecasting.
6. Problem Calculate and plot Average Variable Cost, Average Total Cost, Marginal Cost and find
the optimal production volume.
7. Give examples of products falling under the various kinds of Competition, and the reasons they
are able to survive in the market.
8. Give six examples of products that fall under Monopolistic Competitive pricing.
9. Give six examples of products that fall under Oligopolistic pricing.
10. Pick any six Consumer Items and based on your knowledge of the markets, explain the pricing
method that you think is most likely to have been followed for each of these items.
11. Compare the types of information that one can derive from a Balance Sheet and a P&L Statement.
Analyze
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The percapita income of farmers in the country has to be raised by 20% this year to prevent their
migration to cities. Analyze this statement from the point of view of Positive and Normative
Economics.
Decision making improves with age and experience. Discuss.
Do a survey of the automotive (only cars) industry and analyze the reasons and timing for
discounts offered from the point of view of elasticity of demand.
What are the methods you would adopt to forecast demand for an industrial product? Assuming
that the actual demand versus forecast is very high, what would the most likely reason be for
failure of the forecast?
Most of the cost concepts are overlapping and repetitive. Yes or No? Substantiate your answer
with reasons.
153
6.
7.
How would you modify a sealed bid pricing system to take care of different technical approaches
by different bidders for a project for which bids are called for, given that the cost varies depending
on the technical approach?
What are the steps you would take to control inflation?
Create
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create a matrix consolidating the definitions of the word Economics as defined by the leading
Economists in the prescribed textbook. Using this define economics the way you understand it, in
less than 50 words.
Study the price of a commodity over a period of one year and explain the possible reasons for the
fluctuations from an economists point of view.
You are in a job which is paying you adequately. You are called for an interview for a job that
double your salary. Unfortunately you miss the only train that will take you in time for the
interview. How will you justify the cost of taking a flight considering the cost concepts you have
learnt.
Due to cancellation of an export order, you are stuck with a huge stock of jeans of international
quality. Device a pricing strategy for disposing this stock without incurring a loss, considering that
it is a very competitive market.
(Question paper will contain at least 50% marks on numerical problems)
Unit I
Introduction
Introduction to Economics, Kinds of Economic Systems, Production Possibility Frontier, Opportunity Cost,
Objective of Organizations, Kinds of Organizations, Business Decision Making,
Legal rights and responsibilities of types of Organizations.
9 Hours
Unit II
Demand and Supply
Functions of Demand & Supply, Law of Demand and Supply, Elasticity of Demand, Demand Forecasting
Methods, Price Equilibrium
Role of logistics in managing supply and demand.
9 Hours
Unit III
Production and Cost
Production Function, Returns to Scale, Economies & Diseconomies of scale, Fixed Cost, Variable Cost,
Average Costs, Cost Curves, Break Even point, Law of diminishing Marginal Utility
Costing of a product during the stages of its life cycle
9 Hours
Unit IV
Pricing & Market Structure
Components of Pricing, Methods of Pricing, Return on Investment, Payback Period, Market Structure and
Pricing, Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Oligopoly, Monopolistic, Non price competition, Ecommerce.
The secure payment process in ecommerce.
9 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to Macro Economics & Financial Accounting,
National Income GDP, Per Capita Income, Inflation, Stagflation, Deflation, Business Cycle, Stabilization
Policies, Direct Taxes, Indirect Taxes, Balance of Payment. Accounting  Terminology, Book Keeping,
P&L, Balance Sheet.
Role of Central Excise and Customs
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. A. Ramachandra Aryasri and V V Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financial
Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2006.
154
Reference(s)
1. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta, Managerial Economics Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1981.
2. S N Maheswari, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand.
3. R Kesavan, C Elanchezhian and T Sunder Selwyn, Engineering Economics and Financial
Accounting, Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd , New Delhi, 2005.
11L702 ASIC DESIGN
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To give basic knowledge of ASIC internals.
To impact knowledge on ASIC types and tools used in the design.
To give basic understanding of tools used.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
b. able to demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded
microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel
language programs.
e. able to acquire a working knowledge of computer hardware, software and networking skills.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to understand requirements and translate them to a high level design language
2. Able to understand capabilities and limitations of CMOS logic and adjust designs to best use
CMOS ASIC technologies.
3. Able to demonstrate common ASIC team rules, and articulate the purposes for such rules.
4. Able to demonstrate an ability to use industry synthesis tools to achieve desired project objectives.
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
1
Remember
2
Understand
3
Apply
4
Analyze
5
Evaluate
6
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
30
15
15
10
05
100
25
30
15
15
10
05
100
Model
Examination
25
30
15
15
10
05
100
Semester End
Examination
25
30
15
15
10
05
100
Remember
1. Define ASIC.
2. What are types of ASIC?
3. Define frontend and backend rules.
4. List the applications of various combinational logic circuits.
5. How antifuse formed?
6. State the condition to operate transmission gate in the active region.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
155
3.
4.
5.
M1
M2
Apply Shannon expansion theorem to implement the following function using ACT1 logic module.
i. F= (A.B) + (B.C) +D
Find the controllability and observability measures for logic gates.
Find the test patterns for the following logic equation
a. F=AB+AC
Analyze
1.
2.
3.
4.
Evaluate
1. Evaluate the performance of 8 bit carry select adder in data path logic cells.
2. Design 32 bit Wallace tree multiplier and calculate the timing delay model for multiplier.
3. Design and synthesis of 8 bit divider using Verilog/VHDL.
4. Using Elmore time constant, how will you find out the interconnect delay in RC network?
Create
1. Design and synthesis of RAM circuits in Verilog/VHDL.
2. Design FSM using ASIC.
3. Design single bit adder using transistor gate.
156
157
Unit I
Introduction to ASICs, CMOS Logic
Types of ASICs PLD FPGA  Design flow  CMOS transistors N and P channels transistors  CMOS
Design rules  Combinational Logic Cell Pushing bubbles  Drive strength Transmission gates Sequential
logic cell Latch Flip flop.
Clocked inverter.
9 Hours
Unit II
Programmable ASICs, Programmable ASIC Logic Cells
Anti fuse Types  Poly diffusion antifuse Metal to metal antifuse  Static RAM  EPROM and EEPROM
technology  PREP benchmarks  Actel ACT Shannons expansion theorem Function generators Timing
Model ACT2 and ACT3  Xilinx LCA .
Altera FLEX and Altera MAX.
9 Hours
Unit III
Programmable ASIC I/O cells, Programmable ASIC Interconnect
DC output AC output DC input AC input Clock input Power input Xilinx I/O Block  Actel ACT
Routing resistance Elmores constant ACT 2 and ACT 3 interconnect  Xilinx LCA  Xilinx EPLD  Altera
MAX 5000 and 7000.
Altera MAX 9000 and Altera FLEX
9 Hours
Unit IV
Testing, ASIC Construction
Boundary scans test FaultsFault simulation  Automatic test pattern generationScan test  System partition
FPGA partitioning ATM simulator Automatic Partitioning with FPGAs Partitioning methods The
KernighanLin Algorithm The RatioCut Algorithm.
The Lookahead algorithm
9 Hours
Unit V
Floor Planning, Placement and Routing
Floor planning  Placement  Physical design flow Global routing  Detailed routing Left Edge Algorithm
Area  Routing Algorithms Special routing  Clock routing Power routing  Circuit extraction DRC  SPF,
RSPF and DSPF Design checks.
Mask preparation.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M.J.S .Smith, "Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education Inc., 2006.
Reference(s)
1. FarzadNekoogar and FaranakNekoogar, From ASICs to SOCs: A Practical Approach, Prentice
Hall PTR, 2003.
2. Wayne Wolf, FPGABased System Design, Prentice Hall PTR, 2004.
3. R. Rajsuman, SystemonaChip Design and Test. Santa Clara, CA: Artech House Publishers, 2000.
4. F. Nekoogar. Timing Verification of ApplicationSpecific Integrated Circuits (ASICs).Prentice Hall
PTR ,1999.
11L703 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To introduce the various optical fiber modes, configurations and various signal degradation factors
associated with optical fiber.
To study about various optical sources and optical detectors and their use in the optical
communication system. Finally to discuss about digital transmission and its associated parameters
on system performance.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Identify the various modules for design of optical communication systems.
2. Determine the performance of a given optical fiber communication link.
3. Computation of various parameters like Dispersion, BER etc; of optical communication system.
4. Trouble shooting of various stages in a optical communication link.
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Test I Test II
(New Version)
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
6
Create
0
0
10
Total
100
100
100
Remember
1. What is the fundamental parameter of a single mode fiber?
2. Mention the two causes of intramodal dispersion.
3. Define population inversion.
4. What is meant by long wavelength cutoff?
5. List the key requirements needed in analyzing a link.
6. Give the relationship between rays and modes.
7. Define quantum limit.
8. What are the advantages of WDM?
9. Distinguish fundamental and higher order solitons.
10. Bring out the differences between dispersion shifted
11. and dispersion flattened fibers.
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Understand
1. Where Optical fiber Communication is useful?
2. What are the advantages of optical communication systems over other communication systems?
3. Give the various fiber configurations and state where they are suitably used.
4. What are the limitations of optical communication systems?
5. List the different means of reducing dispersion in optical communication systems.
6. How do you estimate the link power and rise time budget?
7. State the advantages of a WDM system.
8. Mention the various optical sources for use in long haul optical link.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
158
159
9 Hours
Total:45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communication McGraw Hill International, Singapore, 4th edition.,
2011.
Reference(s)
1. J.H. Franz and V.K. Jain Optical Communication Components and Systems Narosa
Publishing House, 2000
2. J.Senior, Optical Communication, Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 1994.
3. J.Gower, Optical Communication System, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
11L704 ANTENNA AND WAVE PROPAGATION
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
Measurements.
Program Outcome(s)
a.
f.
g.
h.
k.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Identify the various antenna modules for Radio frequency communication systems.
Determine the performance of a given optical fiber communication link.
Computation of various radiation patterns like beam width, beam solid angle,..
Identify the various antenna arrays patterns
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
160
Remember
1. Mention any radiation pattern parameters?
2. Define dipole.
3. Define radiation pattern.
4. List out various types of high frequency antennas
5. Define characteristic impedance
6. What are the types of transmission lines?
7. Define propagation constant.
8. Define SWR.
9. What are the types of matching networks?
10. Define resonator.
11. What is a loop antenna?
12. Give an expression of radiation resistance of a small loop
13. What are the types of radiation modes of operation for an helical antenna
14. Define Sky wave.
15. Define frequency diversity Reception.
16. Define critical frequency.
17. What is wave impedance?
Understand
1. List out the array patterns
2. What are the types of minor lobes?
3. What is meant by Polarization?
4. What is meant by front to back ratio?
5. What is meant by antenna beam width?
6. What is meant by reciprocity Theorem?
7. What is meant by isotropic radiator?
8. What is duality of antenna?
9. State Pointing theorem.
10. What is point source?
11. What are the types of array?
12. What is parasitic array?
13. What is tapering of arrays?
14. What is a Short Dipole?
15. How radiations are created from a short Dipole?
16. Why a short dipole is called a oscillating dipole?
17. What do you understand by retarded current?
18. Give the expression for the effective aperture of a shortdipole
19. List out the operating modes of loop Antennas.
20. classifying loop antennas configuration
21. Define graphical pattern.
22. What are the different types of aperture?
23. What is the field zone?
24. Give expression for mutual impedance of coupled antennas
Apply
1.
2.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Differentiate Chebyeshev and butterworth polynomials
2. Comparison of Sky wave and ground wave propagation
Create
1. To Design Endfire waveguide array
2. To Design V shape antennas
161
Unit I
Radiation Fields of Wire Antennas
Concept of vector potential. Modification for time varying, retarded case. Fields associated with Hertzian
dipole. Power radiated and radiation resistance of current element. Radiation resistance of elementary
dipole with linear current distribution.Radiation from halfwave dipole and quarterwave
monopole.Assumed current distribution for wire antennas.Use of capacitive hat and loading coil for short
antennas (qualitative treatment).Loop Antennas: Radiation from small loop and its radiation resistance.
Helical antenna.
Normal mode and axial mode operation
9 Hours
Unit II
Antenna Fundamentals and Antenna Arrays
Radiation intensity.Directive gain.Directivity.Power gain. Beam Width. Band Width.Gain and radiation
resistance of current element.Folded dipole. Reciprocity principle.Antenna Arrays: Expression for electric
field from two and three element arrays. Uniform linear array.Method of pattern multiplication.Binomial
array, Tchebychev array.
Adaptive arrays and Smart antennas.
9 Hours
Unit III
Wideband Antennas
Radiation from a traveling wave on a wire.Analysis of V antenna, Analysis of Rhombic antenna.Design of
Rhombic antennas.Coupled Antennas: Self and mutual impedance of antennas, Derivation of self and
mutual impedances of dipoles using induced EMF method. Two and three element Yagi antennas.
Log periodic antenna.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Aperture and Lens Antennas
Radiation from an elemental area of a plane wave (Huygens Source). Radiation from a rectangular
aperture treated as an array of Huygens sources. Radiation from circular aperture  Beam Width and
Effective area, Equivalence of fields of a slot and complementary dipole. Method of feeding slot
antennas..Field on the axis of an EPlane sectoral horn.
Reflector type of antennas.
9 Hours
Unit V
Propagation and Antenna measurements
Sky wave propagation: Structure of the ionosphere. Effective dielectric constant of ionized
region.Mechanism of refraction.Refractive index.Critical frequency.Skip distance. Effect of earths
magnetic field..Maximum usable frequency. Fading and Diversity reception.Space wave propagation:
Reflection from ground for vertically and horizontally polarized waves. Reflection characteristics of
earth.Resultant of direct and reflected ray at the receiver. Duct propagation.Ground wave propagation:
Attenuation characteristics for ground wave propagation. Calculation of field strength at a
distance.Antenna measurements: Measurement of Antenna pattern Impedance Measurement.
Gain Measurement and Directivity Measurement.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Constantine A.Balanis , Antenna Theory , John Wiley, 2005
2. K.D.Prasad., Antennas and wave propagation, SathyaPraksham, 2001.
Reference(s)
1. John.D.Kraus and RonalatoryMarhefka, Antennas, Tata McGrawHill, 2002.
2. R.E.Collins, Antennas and Radio Propagation, McGrawHill, 1987.
3. G.S.N.Raju, Antennas and Wave Propagation, Pearson Education,2005
4. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, Electro Magnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, PHI, 2003.
162
ELECTIVE III
3 0 0 3.0
ELECTIVE IV
3 0 0 3.0
11L707 RF, MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL COMMUNICATION LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To measure the various parameters of microwave networks
To measure the characteristics of optical diodes.
To study the performance of different types of antenna and its radiation pattern
To gain knowledge about the application of various antenna types.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to calculate the power distribution in microwave components.
2. Able to measure the characteristics of optical diodes.
3. Able to compute the impedance and frequency.
4. Design of RF filter
5. Generation of polarization
6. Design of loop antenna
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
10
15
10
15
50
15
20
15
50
Preparation
Observation & Results
Record
MiniProject/Model Examination/VivaVoce
Total
Remember
1. State any Characteristics of reflex klystron
2. What is the need of variable attenuator?
3. Differentiate the conventional tube and Vacuum tube.
4. What are the requirements of Klystron?
5. What are the Gunn Diode Applications?
6. What are the various dispersion effects in optical fibers..
7. Define the microwave diode
8. State the properties of the S parameters.
9. What means by repller voltage?
10. What are the losses in a two port network?
11. What is attenuation?
12. Define radiation pattern
13. Define Nyquists sampling criterion.
14. Define dielectric constant
15. Define radiation pattern
163
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Understand
1. Explain the negative resistance property of the Gunn diode.
2. How is the Gunn diode different from the other microwave diodes?
3. What are the performance parameters of directional coupler
4. State the significances of scattering matrix.
5. Differentiate Eplane and Hplane.
6. How noise factor can be measured at microwave frequencies?
7. Differentiate the power sensors and waveguide adapter.
8. How to find diversity?
9. How to minimize propagation losses?
10. How to classify antennas based on applications?
11. Identify the types of loop antennas?
12. Identify the types of pattern measurement.
13. Mention the losses in MMF and SMF.
14. Distinguish stimulated emission from spontaneous emission.
Apply / Evaluate
1. How noise factor can be measured at microwave frequencies?
2. Find out the Smatrix for the directional coupler from its operation.
3. How can you reduce the dispersion?
4. How will you calculate distance between transmitter and receiver?
5. How will you find the aperture dimension?
6. How will you differentiate different pattern measurement Technique?
7. Where we have to use Loopantennas ?
8. How will you calculate beam width and directivity?
9. How do you determine the propagation and bending losses in optical fibers.
10. Find the quantum efficiency of a given photodiode.
Create
1. Explain how you will find out the distance between the transmitter and receiver
in the microwave frequency range.
2. To design antenna array and plot its far field, radiation field pattern plots.
3. To Design an optical transmission link and estimate its attenuation and dispersion papameters.
List of Experiments
a. RF Engineering
1. Design and simulation of LNA and power amplifier.
2. Design and simulation of one active mixer and one passive mixer
3. Design and simulation of RF filters
4. Design and Simulation of antennas and waveguides
b. Microwave Engineering
1. Characteristics of Reflex Klystron and Gunn diode Oscillator
2. Impedance and frequency measurement using Slotted Line Method.
3. Study of Power Distribution in directional couplers and Tees and verification of their properties.
4. Radiation Pattern and power measurement of Horns, Paraboloids.
5. Dielectric constant Measurements of solids.
c. Optical Communication
1. (a). Study the characteristics of LED, PIN Photodiode and LASER diode.
(b). Determination of attenuation Coefficient and bending losses for a given optical fiber for
different lengths.
(c). BER and EYE PATTERN measurements.
164
2.
11
12
Hours
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Program Outcome(s)
a.
able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
b. able to demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
d. able to design, modify, analyze nd troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
e.
able to acquire a working knowledge of computer hardware, software and networking skills.
h.
able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
165
Course Outcome(s)
1. By studying this subject the student will be able to design the models of advanced digital circuits
and simulate them for various operational requirements.
2. Design of different types of multiplier using TANNER EDA Tool.
3. Design of FIR Filter using TANNER EDA Tool.
4. Analysis and design of VLSI circuits using FPGA kit.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Preparation
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
10
15
10
15
50
15
20
15
50
Apply / Evaluate
1. Calculate the rise time, fall time and delay time in the VLSI circuits?
2. Evaluate the performance and modeling of digital circuits.
Create
1. To create an FIR filter using EDA Tools.
List of Experiments
Simulation And Implementation FPGA Kits
1. Design and simulation of Combinational circuits using HDL,
Adder
Subtractor
Multiplexer &Demultiplexer
Encoder & Decoder
166
2.
167
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to realize and inculcate the importance of human values such as honesty, courage, etc.
2. To become competent in making judgments and assigning priorities in dealing with moral issues.
3.Assistance to create a safe and peaceful living environment by following the codes of ethics in
Engineering.
4. To gain adequate knowledge in distinguishing between autonomy and authority and also recognize
the importance of authority and confidentiality.
5. Able to provide consultation and be a witness to moral issues that occur in the Engineering
profession.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
S. No.
(New Version)
1
Remember
2
Understand
3
Apply
4
Analyze/Evaluate
5
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
30
40
30
100
30
40
30
100
Model
Examination
30
40
30
100
Semester End
Examination
30
40
30
100
Remember
1. Define Human Values.
2. What are Morals and Values?
3. What do you mean by Civic virtue and Respect for others?
4. Write the various meanings of Spirituality?
5. List four different types of Virtues.
6. Mention different Human values.
7. What is meant by moral autonomy?
8. Classify the types of inquiry.
9. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
10. List the levels of moral development suggested by Kohlberg.
11. What do you understand by selfinterest and ethical egoism?
12. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
13. What are the three virtues of religion?.
14. What are the professional responsibilities?
15. What is meant by Informed consent when bringing an engineering product to market?
16. What is engineering experimentation?
17. What are the different roles and functions of Code of Ethics?
18. What are the Limitations of Code of Ethics?
19. Name some of the engineering societies which published codes of ethics.
20. What is meant by a disaster?
Understand
1. Which are the practical skills that will help to produce effective independent thought about moral
issues?
2. Why does engineering have to be viewed as an experimental process?
3. Why isnt engineering possible to follow a random selection in product design?
4. Why is the code of ethics important for engineers in their profession?
5. What does the Balanced Outlook on Law stress in directing engineering practice?
6. Are the engineers responsible to educate the public for safe operation of the equipment? How?
6
The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10
marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.
168
7.
What kind of responsibility should the engineer have to avoid mistakes that may lead to accident
due to the design of their product?
8. What is the use of knowledge of risk acceptance to engineers?
9. Why is Environmental Ethics so important to create environmental awareness to the general
public?
10. Why do the engineers refuse to do war works sometimes?
Apply
1. How does the consideration of engineering as a social experimentation help to keep a sense of
autonomous participation is a persons work?
2. How does the code of ethics provide discipline among the engineers?
3. How would you classify the space shuttle Challenger case accident?
4. How does the manufacturer understand the risk in a product catalog or manual?
5. How does the knowledge of uncertainties in design help the engineers to access the risk of a
product?
6. How can the quantifiable losses in social welfare resulting from a fatality be estimated? Give some
examples.
7. How does the engineer act to safeguard the public from risk?
Unit I
Human Values
Morals, Values and Ethics Integrity Work Ethic Service Learning Civic Virtue Respect for Others
Living Peacefully Caring Sharing Honesty Courage Valuing Time Cooperation
Commitment Empathy SelfConfidence
Character Spirituality in business..
6 Hours
Unit II
Engineering Ethics
Senses of 'Engineering Ethics' Variety of moral issues Types of inquiry Moral autonomy Kohlberg's
theory Gilligan's theory Consensus and controversy Models of Professional Roles Theories about
right action
Selfinterest Uses of ethical theories
6 Hours
Unit III
Engineering as Social Experimentation
Engineering as experimentation Engineers as responsible experimenters Codes of ethics A balanced
outlook on law The Challenger case study Bhopal Gas Tragedy The Three Mile Island and Chernobyl
case studies
Safety aspects in Nuclear Power plants
6 Hours
Unit IV
Responsibilities and Rights
Fundamental Rights, Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens Collegiality and loyalty Respect for
authority Collective bargaining Confidentiality Conflicts of interest Occupational crime
Professional rights Employee rights Discrimination
Right to Information Act.
6 Hours
Unit V
Global Issues
Multinational corporations Environmental ethics and Environmental Protection Act Computer ethics
Engineers as managers Consulting engineers Engineers as expert witnesses and advisors Moral
leadership Sample code of ethics like IETE, ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Engineers (India), Indian
Institute of Materials Management
Weapons development.
6 Hours
169
Total: 30 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
Reference(s)
1. Charles D. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India , New
Jersey, 2004.
2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Protchard and Michael J. Rabins, Engineering Ethics Concepts
and Cases, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United States, 2005.
4. http://www.slideworld.org/slidestag.aspx/humanvaluesand Professionalethics
5. www.mne.psu.edu/lamancusa/ProdDiss/Misc/ethics.ppt
11L001 EMBEDDED PROCESSORS AND NETWORKS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To introduce the concepts of embedded systems and intertwine it with networks
To make the students familiar with design and debugging of embedded systems
To introduce the concept of real time applications of embedded systems
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
b. able to demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
e. able to acquire a working knowledge of computer hardware, software and networking skills.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
Course Outcome
1. An ability to understand the hardware with software in embedded field.
2. An ability to construct and analyze the various embedded processors.
3. Able to apply different types of applications
Assessment Pattern
S.No BloomsTaxonomy
(New Version)
1
Remember
2
Understand
3
Apply
4
Analyze
5
Evaluate
6
Create
Total
Test I
Test 2
20
40
30
5
5
0
100
20
40
30
5
5
0
100
Model
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
0
100
Semester End
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
0
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
170
Remember
1. What is an embedded system?
2. List out the challenges in embedded system design.
3. List out the characteristics of embedded computing applications.
4. What data types does the SHARC support?
5. How many generalpurpose registers are in the SHARC programming model?
6. What does the SHARC CLIP instruction do?
Understand
1. Distinguish requirements and specification.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Explain about character LCD module with neat diagram.
2. Discuss the applications about ADC.
3. Write in detail about resistor network analysis with example.
4. Give any application about asynchronous serial communication and explain in detail.
5. Discuss in detail about dispatch table multiple point.
6. What is time manager and give any one application.
Create
1.
Unit I
Embedded Processors
Embedded Computers, Characteristics of Embedded Computing Applications, Challenges in Embedded
Computing system design, Embedded system design process Requirements, Specification, Architectural
Design, Designing Hardware and Software Components, System Integration, Formalism for System
Design Structural Description, Behavioural Description, Design Example: Model Train Controller, ARM
processor.
Processor and memory organization.
9 Hours
Unit II
Embedded processor and computing platform
Data operations, Flow of Control, SHARC processor Memory organization, Data operations, Flow of
Control, parallelism with instructions, CPU Bus configuration, ARM Bus, SHARC Bus, Memory devices,
Input/output devices, Component interfacing, designing with microprocessor development and debugging,
Design Example : Alarm Clock.
Hybrid Architecture
9 Hours
171
Unit III
Networks
Distributed Embedded Architecture Hardware and Software Architectures, Networks for embedded
systems I2C, CAN Bus, SHARC link supports, Ethernet, Myrinet, Internet, Network Based design
Communication Analysis, system performance Analysis, Hardware platform design, Allocation and
scheduling.
Design Example: Elevator Controller.
9 Hours
Unit IV
RealTime Characteristics
Clock driven Approach, weighted round robin Approach, Priority driven Approach, Dynamic Versus Static
systems, effective release times and deadlines, Optimality of the Earliest deadline first (EDF) algorithm,
challenges in validating timing constraints in priority driven systems.
Off line Versus Online scheduling.
9 Hours
Unit V
System Design Techniques
Design Methodologies, Requirement Analysis, Specification, System Analysis and Architecture Design,
Quality Assurance, Design Example: Telephone PBX System Architecture, Ink jet printer Hardware
Design and Software Design, Personal Digital Assistants.
Settop Boxes.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design,
Morgan Kaufman Publishers.
Reference(s)
1. Jane.W.S. Liu, RealTime systems, Pearson Education Asia.
2. C. M. Krishna and K. G. Shin, RealTime Systems, McGrawHill, 1997
3. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis, Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/Software
Introduction , John Wiley & Sons
11L002 MEDICAL ELECTRONICS INSTRUMENTATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To study the generation of biopotentials, its representation and recording
To understand electrical and nonelectrical parameter measurements.
To study the various diagnostic and therapeutic equipments
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to acquire knowledge about ElectroPhysiology and BioPotential Recording
2. Able to perform Bio medical and non electrical parameter measurement.
3. Able to understand the concepts of Assist Devices and BioTelemetry.
4. Able
to learn the concepts of Radiological Equipments, Recent Trends in Medical
Instrumentation.
172
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
BloomsTaxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
20
40
30
5
5
100
Test II
20
40
30
5
5
100
Model
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Semester End
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Remember
1. Mention the use of Einthoven triangle.
2. How many leads are used in ECG measurements?
3. What are the techniques used to reduce noise in EEG machine?
4. Mention the types of epilepsy?
5. Define resting potential and refractory region cell potential.
6. Mention the importance of ECG signals
7. Define colorimeter.
8. Name the instrument used to measure PO2 and PCO2.
9. Define hot spot and cold spot in medical thermograph.
10. What are the types of LASERS are used for patient treatment?
Understand
1. Deduce the Nernsts equation from Goldmans equation for resting potential
2. When and where Defibrillators are used?
3. Mention advantages of bio telemetry system
4. Why the ionizing radiation is needed?
5. Identify the different radio isotopes used in diagnosis.
6. Contrast hot spot and cold spot in medical thermograph for cancer diagnosis
7. Differentiate angiography and tomography.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
Find the open circuit voltage across the patient paddle electrodes of a DC defibrillator using 16 F
capacitor charged to 200 joules.
Calculate the stroke volume in milli litres if the cardiac output is 5.25 litres /min and heart rate is
76 beats/ min.
Apply the principles involved in the ONdemand cardiac Pacemaker and cardiovert.
Analyze
1. Analyze the measurement of Phonocardiography and how it is used to identify the Cardiac
murmurs.
2. Analyze the producer for a flame photometer in the measurement of Potassium ion concentration
in body fluids.
Evaluate
1. With typical waveforms, evaluate the characteristics of EMG and EOG signals and its Recorders
2. Evaluate the principles involved in various electrical safety of bio medical equipments
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
173
Create
1. PVCs can be identified because a) they arrive early, b) the following beat occurs at the normal
time, because it is generated by the SA node, and c) the QRS width is greater than 80 msec.
Design an instrument to detect and count PVCs by using all these criteria. Your block diagram
design should include a brief description of how each block functions.
2. Design a circuit that uses one opamp plus other passive components that will detect QRS
complexes of the ECG even when amplitude of the T wave exceeds that of the QRS complex and
provides output signals.
Unit I
ElectroPhysiology and BioPotential Recording
The origin of Biopotentials; bio potential electrodes, biological amplifiers, ECG, EEG, EMG, PCG, EOG,
lead systems and recording methods.
Typical waveforms and signal characteristics.
9 Hours
Unit II
BioChemical and Non Electrical Parameter Measurement
PH, PO2, PCO2, PHCO3, Electrophoresis, colorimeter, photometer, Auto analyzer, Blood flow meter,
cardiac output, respiratory measurement, Blood pressure, temperature, pulse.
Blood cell counters.
9 Hours
Unit III
Assist Devices and BioTelemetry
Cardiac pacemakers, DC Defibrillator, Telemetry principles, frequency selection, Biotelemetry, radiopill
and telestimulation
Case studies
9 Hours
Unit IV
Radiological Equipments
Ionizing radiation, Diagnostic xray equipments, use of Radio Isotope in diagnosis.
Radiation Therapy
9 Hours
Unit V
Recent Trends in Medical Instrumentation
Thermograph, endoscopy unit, Laser in medicine, Diathermy units, Electrical safety in medical equipment.
Patient Monitoring System
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Leislie Cromwell, Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement, PHI, 2007.
Reference(s)
1. RS Khandpur, HandbookofBiomedical Instrumentation, Tata McGrawHill, 2005.
2. Joseph J.Carr and John M.Brown, Introduction to Biomedical equipment Technology, John Wiley,
2004.
11L003 MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To gain a thorough understanding of the trends in cellular radio and personal communication
systems.
To understand the various problems in propagation of radio waves measurement of the parameters.
To learn the modulation, Multiple acess and equalization and diversity techniques.
174
Program Outcome(s)
a.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to understand the cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse, handoff and how
interference between mobiles and base stations affects the capacity of cellular systems.
2. Able to identify the technopolitical aspects of wireless and mobile communications such as the
allocation of the limited wireless spectrum by government regulatory agencies.
3. Able to comprehend the basic equalization schemes and spread spectrum techniques commonly
used in mobile wireless systems
4. Able to know the principles of cooperative communications and describe their advantages and
design issues.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
Remember
1. Define channel assignment.
2. Distinguish between ststic and dynamic channel assignment strategies.
3. Mention the various types of handoffs and prioritizing of handoffs.
4. What is frequency reuse?
5. List the various models of radio propagation.
6. Bring out the differences between various multiple access techniques.
7. Explain the terms channel capacity, doppler shift, breathing cell.
8. What is small scale fading?
9. What is diversity? What are the various types of diversity?
10. Comment on the different equalization techniques.
Understand
1. What is the concept of cellular radio communication?
2. Name the various channel assignment strategies.
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
175
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Apply
1.
2.
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Distinguish between the fixed and dynamic channel assignment strategies.
2. Methods of improving coverage in cellular environment.
3. Comparison of the various digital modulation schemes.
4. Discriminate the performance of the Multiple Access techniques.
5. Study of the various mobile communication systems.
Create
1. Design of a suitable mobile communication system for a specific application with the defined
Quality of service.
2. Estimate/ Enhance the performance of an existing mobile communication network.
Unit I
Cellular Concept and System Design Fundamentals
Introduction to wireless communication: Evolution of mobile communications, mobile radio systemsExamples, trends in cellular radio and personal communications. Cellular Concept: Frequency reuse,
channel assignment, hand off, Interference and system capacity, tracking and grade of service.
Improving Coverage and capacity in Cellular systems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Mobile Radio Propagation
Free space propagation model, reflection, diffraction, scattering, link budget design, Outdoor Propagation
models, Indoor propagation models, Small scale Multipath propagation, Impulse model, Small scale
Multipath measurements, parameters of Mobile multipath channels, types of small scale fading.
Statistical models for multipath fading channels.
9 Hours
Unit III
Modulation Techniques and Equalization
Minimum Shift Keying, Gaussian MSK, Mary QAM, Mary FSK, Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing, Performance of Digital Modulation in SlowFlat Fading Channels and Frequency Selective
Mobile Channels. Equalization: Survey of Equalization Techniques, Linear Equalization, Nonlinear
Equalization, Algorithms for Adaptive Equalization. Diversity Techniques.
RAKE receiver.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Coding and Multiple Access Techniques
Coding: Vocoders, Linear Predictive Coders, Selection of Speech Coders for Mobile Communication,
GSM Codec, RS codes for CDPD. Multiple Access Techniques: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, SDMA.
Capacity of Cellular CDMA and SDMA.
9 Hours
176
Unit V
Wireless Systems and Standards
Second Generation, Third Generation Wireless Networks and Standards, WLL, Blue tooth, AMPS.
GSM,IS95.DECT.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
10
30
30
20
10
100
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be covered to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based in assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
177
Remember
1.
2.
Obtain by power method, the numerically largest eigen value of the matrix
15 4 3
1
(0)
A 10 12 6 with the starting vector x 1 .Perform only 4 iterations.
1
20 4 2
2.
3.
If f ( x)
4.
5.
6.
The following data gives the velocity of a particle for 20 secs at an interval of 5secs.
a. Find
the
initial
acceleration
using
v
entire
1
, find the divided difference f(a,b).
x2
time(sec) :
0 5 10 15
x:
12
20
velocity (m / s) : 0 3 14 69 228
7.
8.
9.
10.
1
3
178
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Using Newtons method, find the positive root of cos x = 3x 1.
2. Solve by GaussElimination method : 6x + 3y +12z = 36; 8x 3y +2z = 20; 4x +11y z =33 .
5 0 1
3. Using Power method, find all the Eigen values of A = 0 2 0 .
1 0 5
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use Lagranges interpolation formula to find the value of x when y = 20 for the following
data .X : 1
2
3
4
a. Y : 1
8
27
64
Given 5 x y + y 2 2 = 0 ; y(4 )= 1; y(4.1) = 1.0049 find
i. i)y ( 4.2 ) by Eulers method
ii) y(4.3) by Rungekutta method
ii. iii) y ( 4.4 ) by Adams method. iv) y(4.5) by Milnes method.
Using Taylor series method, find the value of y(0.1) , given dy /dx = x + y and y(0)=1 and
correct to 3 decimal places.
Using BenderSchmitt formula, solve
2u u
, u(0,t)=0, u(5,t)=0, u(x,0)= x2(25  x2). Assume
x 2 t
2u 2u
,0<x<1, t>0; u(x,0)=100(xx2), ut (x,0)=0, u(0,t)=0, u(1,t)=0.
t 2 x 2
9. Solve u xx u yy 0 over the square mesh of side 4 units,
satisfying the following conditions
2
u(x,0)=3x for 0 x 4 ; u(x,4)=x for 0 x 4; u(0,y)=0 for 0 y 4 ; u(4,y)=12+y for
0 y 4.
2. 2 2.6
dydx
10. Evaluate 2
using Trapezoidal formula.
x y2
2 1
8.
Solve
Unit I
Solution of Equations And Eigen Value Problems
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental equation by the method of False position Newton Raphson
method Solution of system of linear equations : Gauss elimination method and GaussJordan method Iterative method: Gauss Seidel method Inverse of a matrix by GaussJordan method.Eigen value of a
matrix by power method.
9 Hours
Unit II
Interpolation and Curve Fitting
Newton s Forward and Backward interpolation. Newtons Divided difference interpolation formula
Lagranges interpolation formula Fitting of curves by the method of Least squares: Straight line,Parabolic
curves.Conversion of equation of the curves in the form of straight lines.
9 Hours
Unit III
Numerical Differentiation And Integration
Derivatives from difference table Numerical differentiation using Newton s
Forward and Backward
interpolation Formula  Numerical integration by Trapezoidal and Simpsons 1/3and 3/8rules  Rombergs
method  Two and three point Gaussian quadrature formulae.Double integrals using Trapezoidal and
Simpsons rules.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Initial Value Problems for Ordinary Differential Equations
Single step Methods : Taylor Series method for solving first and second order equations  Eulers and
Modified Eulers methods  Fourth order RungeKutta method for solving first order equations Multistep methods. Milnes and Adams predictor and corrector methods.
179
9 Hours
Unit V
Boundary Value Problems
Finite difference solution for the second order ordinary differential equations Finite difference solution for
one dimensional heat equation by implicit and explicit methods  one dimensional wave equation and two
dimensional Laplaces and Poissons equations.
9 Hours
Total:45 Hours
MAT LAB: Invited Lectures on Matlab and its applications on Numerical methods.
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
Grewal B. S, Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science with Programms in C & C++, Ninth
Edition, Khanna Publications, 2010.
Sastry S.S, Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, Fifth Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
2012.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Burden R. L, and Faries T.D, Numerical Analysis, Seventh Edition, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd.,
Singapore, 2002.
Sankara Rao K, Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers, Third Edition, Prentice Hall of
India, 2007.
Gerald C.F and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education
Asia, New Delhi,2006.
Chapra S. C and Canale R. P, Numerical Methods for Engineers, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 2007.
[[[
180
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
1
Remember
2
Understand
3
Apply
4
Analyze
5
Evaluate
6
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. How are beats useful in tuning a musical instrument?
2. What are the characteristics of microphones?
3. State the limitation of crystal microphone.
4. Explain the different sources of noise in tape recording.
5. What are the elements of television system?
6. Define frame, video bandwidth.
7. Difference between a camera tube and a picture tube.
8. Write a note on Fax machine operations.
9. What is the function of an air bag system in automobiles?
10. What are the types of microwave ovens?
11. What are the components of an air conditioning system?
Understand
1. Difference between longitudinal and transverse waves.
2. How does a ribbon microphone differ from a dynamic microphone?
3. Differentiate between headphones and handsets.
4. Why multispeaker system is required?
5. How will you achieve the best stereo illusion in different rooms?
6. What are the characteristics of a camera tube?
7. Compare and contrast hue, brightness and saturation.
8. How does an electronic ignition lock system operate?
9. List the advantage of microwave cooking.
10. What is the difference between an all air and an all water air conditioning?
11. Explain the sequence of operation in a wash cycle.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
How will you match low impedance to high impedance? Give a practical example.
Compare the 525 line American system with CCIRB system. Which system is adopted in our
country?
What are the different cellular systems currently in operation?
Why wave shaping is required? Explain its significance in digital clocks.
Why ABS(antilock braking) system is required. How does it operate?
What is the practical application of wave guides?
How bar codes help in coding the products?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
181
Analyze/ Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
What is the wave length of a radio station broad casting at 1,000 Hz frequency? Speed of a radio
wave is equal to 3*108 m/s.
In which microphone is a builtin transformer a necessity and why?
Differentiate between Top Loader and Front Loader.
Create
1.
2.
What additional features can be made available with washing machine with fuzzy logic?
How an air conditioning system can be made automated according to the person needs by soft
computing techniques.
Unit I
Audio System Components
Introduction to wave motion Interference and superposition of waves Beats, Resonance, Echos
characteristics of microphones types of microphone wireless microphones types of headphones
Types of loudspeakers Multispeaker systems Acoustiic Insulation and acoustic design.
Stereo systems and multiway systems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Audio Processing
Audio Filters, Types of AGC Loudspeaker Impedance matching Preemphasis and Deemphasis noise
reduction Optical recording and reproduction stereophony, Quadraphony Stereo controls Active
tone control, filtering, bass and treble control Integrated Stereo amplifier Equalizers Codecs LPC,
Subband Coding, CELP.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4 and Dolby Digital.
9 Hours
Unit III
Video Standards and Systems
Elements of a TV system, scanning process resolution, interlacing, composite signal Types of TV
camera compatibility between monochrome and colour TV TV standards NTSC, PAL, SECAM,
CCIRB TV Broadcasting video recording formats Video2000, 8mm format video optical recording
methods LaserVision video disc system.
Interactive video systems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Communication and Consumer Gadgets
Radio system VHF and UHF Types of mobile phones Facsimile machine electronic calculators
digital clocks Automobile computers Antilocking Breaking Systems, Electronically Controlled
Suspension, Safety Belt System, Navigation System Microwave Ovens.
Dish washers and TV Remote.
9 Hours
Unit V
Consumer Applications
Washing Machines electronic controller, fuzzy logic, Hardware and Software development Air
Conditioners Components, Remote Controls, Unitary and central air conditioner systems Bar Coders
Bar codes, scanner and decoder Set Top Box Types, firmware development, Interactive program
guides.
Video on demand.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. S.P.Bali, Consumer Electronics, Pearson Education, 2005.
182
Reference(s)
1. C.A. Schuler and W.L. .Mc Namee, Modern Industrial Electronics, McGraw Hill, 2002.
2. D.J. Shanefield, Industrial Electronics for Engineers, Chemists and Technicians, Jaico Publishing
House, 2007.
11L006 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To study the basics of automotive electronics.
To understand sensors and activators
To study charging systems
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to acquire knowledge about fundamentals of Automotive Electronics
2. Able to understand the working principle, construction of starting system
3. Able to know about the working principle, construction, characteristics of charging system
4. Able to gain knowledge about working principle, construction, characteristics, Capacity,
Efficiency and various tests on Lead Acid Battery
5. Able to learn about Lighting systems for vehicles
6. Able to learn the concepts of various types of Sensors and Activators
Assessment Pattern
S.No BloomsTaxonomy
(New Version)
1
Remember
2
Understand
3
Apply
4
Analyze
5
Evaluate
6
Create
Total
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Test I
25
35
25
5
5
5
100
Test II
25
35
25
5
5
5
100
Model
Examination
25
35
25
5
5
5
100
Semester End
Examination
25
35
25
5
5
5
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
183
Understand
1. What are the types of battery test?
2. How a battery life is increased?
3. How to calculate efficiency of a battery?
4. Brief the maintenance procedure for a starter motor.
5. Why compensation is required in voltage regulator?
6. How throttle position is sensed?
7. How to design a starter switch?
8. Where are voltage and current regulators used?
9. How automotive electronics helps in security systems?
Apply
1. Design a compensated voltage regulator to obtain a constant 5 Volt output for digital applications.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Differentiate between voltage and current regulator.
2. Compare the characteristics of different types of batteries with its rating capacity and its
efficiency.
3. Elucidate the efficiency of current trend automotive electronic engine management system with
past methods.
Create
1. Design a system which controls the shaft movement in rice mill for faulty grains.
2. Design an automotive system which ejects defective pencils in its processing unit.
Unit I
Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics
Current trends in automotive electronic engine management system, electromagnetic interference
suppression, electromagnetic compatibility, electronic dashboard instruments, onboard diagnostic system.
Security and warning system.
9 Hours
Unit II
Starting System
Condition at starting, behaviour of starter during starting, series motor and its characteristics, principle and
construction of starter motor, working of different starter drive units, care and maintenances of starter
motor.
Starter switches.
9 Hours
Unit III
Charging System
Generation of direct current, shunt generator characteristics, armature reaction, third brush regulation,
cutout. Voltage and current regulators, compensated voltage regulator, alternators principle and
constructional aspects.
Bridge rectifiers and new developments.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Batteries and Accessories
Principle and construction of lead acid battery, characteristics of battery, rating capacity and efficiency of
batteries, various tests on batteries, maintenance and charging. Lighting system: insulated and earth return
system, details of head light and side light, LED lighting system, head light dazzling and preventive
methods.
Horn, wiper system and trafficator.
9 Hours
Unit V
Sensors and Activators
Types of sensors: sensor for speed, throttle position, exhaust oxygen level, manifold pressure, crankshaft
position, coolant temperature, exhaust temperature, air mass flow for engine application. Solenoids.
Stepper motors and relay.
184
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. A.P.Young, L.Griffiths Automotive Electrical Equipment, ELBS & New Press, 1999.
2. William.B.Riddens, Understanding Automotive Electronics, Butter worth Heinemann Woburn,
1998.
Reference(s)
1. Bechhold,Understanding Automotive Electronics, SAE, 1998.
2. W.H.Crouse ,Automobile Electrical Equipment, McGrawHill, 1996.
3. A W Judge, Modern Electrical Equipment of Automobiles, Chapman & Hall, 1992.
4. P.L.Kholi, Automotive Electrical Equipment, Tata McGrawHill, 1995.
5. Robert Bosch Automotive Hand Book, SAE, 2000.
11L007 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand the concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.
To study the fundamentals of DAQ Hardware and Software.
To impart knowledge on Lab VIEW.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
Course Outcome
1. Analysis the procedure for various signals and system principles.
2. Analysis image enhancement and edge detection methods
3. Diagnose the degree of complications in signal processing methods
4. Identification of new developments in object recognition systems.
Assessment Pattern
S.No BloomsTaxonomy Test I
Model
Semester End
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
40
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze
5
5
5
5
5
Evaluate
5
5
5
5
6
Create
0
0
0
0
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define Non uniform sampling.
2. What are the advantages and disadvantages of local and global variables?
3. What is the difference between a bundle and bundle by name functions?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
185
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Understand
1. Build a VI to execute the following expression using stacked sequence structure (A+B)/[(A+B)*2]
and also explain the procedure.
2. Compute the equations (X1+2)*log(X1) using functions, expression node for the given inputs X 1
(Assume X1=5).
Apply
1. Develop four VIs for AND, OR, XOR and NOR logic. Develop a VI that has an Enum ip AND,
OR, XOR &NOR. Based on the user ip, the corresponding VI should be called.Use the following
methods
SUB VI Call(static)
Using Methods
2. Design a data acquisition module which will generate one set of data in one second. This module
should be launched dynamically from the main module when acquisition is started.
Analyze
1.
2.
3.
4.
Design a simple calculator with two numeric controls and one indicator. It should have eight
buttons: add, subtract, multiply, divide, mod, sin, cos, tan.
Clicking each of these buttons should perform corresponding operation and the result should be
displayed in the indicator. Use subVIs and event structure where ever possible.
Description:This is a simulation module of a data acquisition and online monitoring system. One module
should generate the measurement signals in simulation and the main module will display the data
in the user interface. The current channel data should be displayed in the numeric indicators where
as the trend data will be displayed in the graphs (100 data at a time). The measurement signals
should be continuously logged in to a file at the specified logging rate which can be reviewed
using a data review utility.
Design the main user interface using state machine architecture. Use event structure to handle the
events.
The main user interface should contain the following buttons:Start Acquisition  clicking this will start the data acquisition
Stop Acquisition  clicking this will stop the data acquisition
Exit
 to exit the module. This will be disabled while the acquisition is going on
Logging rate
 at which rate the logging will be done (min 1 sec)
Numeric Indicators  to display the current signal data
Waveform Graph  to display the recent history of data
Create
1.
2.
3.
186
Unit I
Fundamentals Of Virtual Instrumentation
LabVIEW graphical user interfaces controls and Indicators G programming data types data flow
programming Editing Debugging and Running a Virtual Instrument Graphical programming palettes and
tools Front panel objects.
Function and Libraries.
9 Hours
Unit II
Graphical Programming Environment in VI
FOR Loops, WHILE loops, Shift Registers, CASE structure, formula nodesSequence structures Arrays
and Clusters Array operations Bundle, Unbundle Bundle/Unbundle by name, graphs and charts string
and file I/O High level and Low level file I/Os.
Attribute nodes local and global variables.
9 Hours
Unit III
Interfacing DAQ System with PC
Basics of DAQ Hardware and Software Concepts of Data Acquisition and terminology Installing
Hardware, Installing drivers Configuring the Hardware addressing the hardware in LabVIEW Digital
and Analog I/O function Buffered I/O.
Real time Data Acquisition.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Simple Programming in VI
Simple programs in VI Advanced concepts in LabVIEW TCP/IP VIs , Synchronization other elements
of Virtual Instrumentation Bus extensions PXI  Computer based instruments.
Image acquisition and Motion Control.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Analysis Tools and Simple Applications in VI
Fourier transform  Power spectrum  Filtering tools CRO emulation Audio signal processing using
Signal processing toolkitVirtual instrumentation application in Biomedical, Process Control and
Mechatronics. Different connectivity and data communication.
9 Hours
Total: 45Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Jovitha Jerome, Virtual Instrmentation using LabVIEW, PHI, 2010
2. Garry M. Johnson, LabVIEW Graphical Programming, Tata McGraw Hill, 1996.
Reference(s)
1. Labview Basics I and II Manual, National Instruments.
2. Barry Paton, Sensor, Transducers and LabVIEW, PHI, 2000.
3. Lisa K Wlls, LabVIEW for Everyone,PHI,1996
11L008 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
187
Program Outcome(s)
a.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
BloomsTaxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
20
40
30
5
5
100
20
40
30
5
5
100
Model
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Semester End
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Remember
1. Define Keplers first law, second law and third law.
2. What is meant by apogee?
3. Define Line of apsides, ascending node and Line of nodes.
4. List out the orbital elements
5. Define Universal time.
6. What is meant by carrier to noise ratio?
7. What is meant by EIRP?
8. List out the modulation techniques.
9. What is meant by GSM?
10. List out the examples of MA techniques for existing and planned systems.
Understand
1. What is meant by orbit perturbations?
2. Effects of a nonspherical earth.
3. What is meant be Inclined Orbits?
4. What is meant by noise factor?
5. How to find an effective area?
6. For what space temperature is noise factor defined?
7. How to calculate the EIRP?
8. What is meant by equipment reliability?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
188
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Explain why the lownoise amplifier of a receiving system is placed at the antenna end of the
feeder cable.
2. How the transmission bit rate is related to the input bit rate.
Unit I
Orbital Mechanics
Kepler's laws of motion  Orbits, Orbit Equations  Orbit Description  Locating the Satellite in the Orbit
and with Respect to Earth  Orbital ElementsLook Angle Determination and Visibility  Orbital
Perturbations  Orbit Determination  Launch Vehicles  Orbital Effects in Communication System Performance Attitude control; Satellite launch vehicles.
Spectrum allocations for satellite systems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Spacecraft Sub Systems and Earth Station
Spacecraft Subsystems  Altitude and Orbit Control  Telemetry and Tracking  Power Systems Communication Subsystems Transponders Antennas  Equipment Reliability  Earth Stations.
Example of payloads of operating and planned systems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Space Links
The Space Link  Satellite Link Design  Satellite uplink down link power Budget  Basic Transmission
Theory  System Noise Temp  G/T Ratio  Noise Figure  Downlink Design  Design of Satellite Links for
Specified C/N  Microwave Propagation on SatelliteEarth Paths. Interference between satellite circuits Energy Dispersal  propagation characteristics of fixed and mobile satellite links.
Modulation techniques and GPS
9 Hours
Unit IV
Multiple Access Techniques and Network Aspects
Single access vs. multiple access (MA). Classical MA techniques: FDMA, TDMA. Single channel per
carrier (SCPC) access  Code division multiple access (CDMA). Demand assignment techniques. Examples
of MA techniques for existing and planned systems (e.g. the satellite component of UMTS).Mobile satellite
network design, ATM via satellite. TCP/IP via satellite  Call control Handover and call set up
procedures.
Hybrid satellite and terrestrial networks.
9 Hours
Unit V
Services and Applications
Fixed and mobile services  Multimedia satellite services  Advanced applications based on satellite
platforms  INTELSAT series  INSAT, VSAT, Remote Sensing  Mobile satellite service: GSM. GPS
INMARSAT  Navigation System  Direct to Home service (DTH)  Special services  Email  Video
conferencing and Internet connectivity.
Chandrayaan I.
9 Hours
Total: 45Hours
189
Textbook(s)
1. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, McGraw Hill, 2001.
2. Bruce R Elbert, The Satellite Communication ApplicationsHand Book, Artech House Boston,
1997.
Reference(s)
1. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Hendri G.Suyderhood, Robert Nelson, Satellite Communication Systems
Engg., PHI,1993 .
2. Tri T. Ha, Digital Satellite Communication, McGraw Hill, 1990.
11L009 STATISTICAL THEORY OF COMMUNICATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand source and channel coding
To familiarize the estimation theory
To understand error control coding and ARQ techniques
Programme Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
190
5.
6.
7.
8.
Understand
1. How will you classify signals?.
2. How do you differentiate periodic and aperiodic signals.
3. Give the differences between energy and power signals.
4. How will you estimate a rate of information transmission over a discrete channel?
5. Why the capacity of the channel should be greater than the information transmissiom?
6. What are the techniques used by pipelining in higher order IIR digital filters?
7. Define Signal to Noise ratio.
8. How will you measure the performance of particular transmission scheme?
9. Definepreemphasis and deemphasis.
10. How the interference is mitigated in a receiver system?
Apply
1.
Given an information source how do you evaluate the rate at which the source is emitting
information.
2. Given a noisy communication channel,how
3. Find the entropy of a source that emits one of three symbols A,B and C in a statistically
independent sequence with probabilities , and respectively
Evaluate
1. An analog baseband communication system is designed for transmitting audio signals with 4 KHz
bandwidth. No preemphasis filter is used in the system. At the receiving end an RC lowpass filter
with a 3 dB bandwidth of 8
KHz is used to limit the noise power at the output.Assuming the
channel noise to be white with a psd of 2,calculate the noise power at the output.
2. Calculate the capacity of a lowpass channel with a usable bandwidth of 3000Hz and S/N=10 3 at
the channel ouput.Assume the channel noise to be Guassian and white.
3. A statistically independent sequence of equiprobable binary digits is transmitted over a channel
having infinite bandwidth using the rectangular signaling waveform with peak to peak voltage of
2v with same periods for 0s and 1s repeated alternately. The bit rate is r band the channel noise is
white guassian with a psd of /2.
a. Derive the structure of an optimum receiver for this signaling scheme.
b. Derive an expression for the probability of error.
Unit I
Information Theory and Source Coding
Block diagram of a communication system Fundamental problems of communication Reviewof
probability theory and random processes Information and Entropy Properties of entropy Binary
memory less source Extension to discrete memory less source. Elements of encoding properties of code
Kraft Macmillan inequality   Code length code efficiency sourcecoding theorem construction of
optimal codes Shannon Fano encoding.
Huffmans encodingand LempelZiv encoding
9 Hours
Unit II
Noisy Channel Coding
Measure of Information for two dimensional discrete finite probability scheme marginal, jointand
conditional entropies Interpretation of different entropies for a two port communicationsystem some
basic relationships among different entropies Discrete memory less channel Mutual information
properties Channel capacity channel classification channel codingtheorem. Entropy in the continuous
case Definition and properties capacity of a band limitedGaussian channel Hartley Shannons law
ideal system Definition Bandwidth efficiencydiagram Rate distortion theory compression of
information
Scalar and vector quantize
9 Hours
191
Unit III
Statistical Decision and Estimation
Testing of statistical hypothesis simple binary hypothesis testing structure of a decisionproblem
Definition criteria for binary decision for single observation Maximum likelihood,Neyaman Person,
Probability of error, Bayes and Minmax test Receiver operatingcharacteristics. Structure of estimation
problem Fundamentals of estimation Estimation ofunknown parameters Random and deterministic
Maximum likelihood (ML), Mean squareError (MSE), Maximum a posteriori (MAP) estimates.
Properties of estimator
9 Hours
Unit IV
Error Control Coding
Introduction Hamming code, linear block codes, syndrome decoding, minimum distance coordinations
cyclic codes: Generator polynomial, parity check polynomial, Encode for cycliccodes, calculation of the
syndrome convolutional codes: Time domain approach, Transform domain approach Principles of
maximum.
Likelihood decoding of convolutional codes
9 Hours
UNIT V
Burst Error Correction and ARQ Systems
Reed Solomon Codes  Error Probability encoding and decoding, Interleaving andConcatenated codes
Block interleaving Convolution Interleaving concatenated codes Turbo codes concepts  Performance
of ARQ Systems Probability of Error.
Transmissionefficiency and throughput for ARQ systems
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text book(s)
1. Bruce Carlson Introduction to Communication Systems 4th edition, Tata McGrawHill, 2002
2. Bernard Sklar, Digital Communication 2nd edition, Person Education Asia, 2001
Reference(s)
1. Taub and Schilling Principles of Communication Systems Tata McGraw Hill, 1998
2. Sam Shanmugam Communication Systems 2nd edition, John Wiley and sons, 1996
3. Hancock, Introduction to the Principles of Communication Theory TMH, 1961
11L010 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To explore the concepts of multirate signal processing by study of DFT, computation and design
of Multi rate filters.
To study the adaptive filters and its applications.
To establish fundamental concepts on signal processing in modern spectral estimation.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design and
analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as well
as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to acquire knowledge of how a multi rate system works.
2. Able to design decimator,interpolator andmulti rate filter bank.
3. Able to design LMS and RLS adaptive filters for different applications like signal enhancement,
channel equalization.
192
4.
Able to estimate the power spectrum of a real time signal using parametric and nonparametric
approach.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. What is a multirate system?
2. Compare sampling rate conversion in analog and digital domain.
3. What is the role QMF bank in sub band coding?.
4. Draw the poly phase structure of two channel QMF bank.
5. Discuss on the sampling rate conversion by a factor I/ D.
6. Represent the output spectrum of decimator by a factor D.
7. Draw the poly phase structure of two channel QMF bank.
8. What is meant by spectrum estimation?
9. What is the need for adaptive filter?
10. Represent the relationship between the order of the filter with the step size in LMS adaptive filter?
11. Draw first forward error prediction model.
12. Write the Akaike Information criteria for ARMA model.
13. Mathematically define the minimum mean square error of an optimum filter.
14. Why LMS is normally preferred over RLS?
15. Represent the relationship between the order of the filter with the step size in LMS adaptive filter?
16. What is the need for spectrum estimation?
17. Discuss on the sampling rate conversion by a factor I/ D.
18. What is the role of two channel QMF filter bank in sub band coding.
19. With a neat diagram discuss about time variant structures.
20. What is the advantage of filtered signal approach for IIR filtering.
21. What is the minimum variance spectral estimator?
22. Draw the block diagram for multistage realization of decimator and interpolator .
23. Exemplify any two applications of interpolation and decimation in signal processing.
24. Illustrate sub band coding of speech signals using sampling rate converters
25. Discuss on two channel quadrature mirror filter , perfect reconstruction FIR QMF bank.
26. Develop the steepest descent algorithm and hence deduce the LMS algorithm with
full particulars.
27. What is the advantage of filtered signal approach for IIR filtering?
28. When an estimated spectrum is said to be biased and consistent? Compute the same for
29. peridogram estimate.
30. What are the errors in QMF filter bank?
31. Define multilevel filter banks.
32. How can sampling rate be converted by rational factor M/L?
33. What is the need for adaptivity?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
193
194
3.
4.
5.
6.
A voice band signal of 4kHz is sampled at Nyquist rate is filtered to isolate the frequency
components below 80 Hz. The pass band, stop band frequency and its ripples of the filter are
75 Hz, 80 Hz and 103,105 respectively. The filtered signal is decimated by a factor of 75. Find
the order of the filter when it is implemented in single and multiple stage
If the sample sequence of a RP has 1000 samples .Determine the frequency resolution of
Bartlett and Welch method for a quality factor of Q=10 and record lengthDetermine the mean
and the autocorrelation of the sequence x(n) generated by the MA Process described by the
difference equation x(n)=w(n)aw(n1)+bw(n2) where w(n) is a white noise process with
variance 2 .
Determine the analysis and synthesis filters in a 3  channel perfect reconstruction QMF bank.
The given poly phase matrix is
2
P Z3
1
3
1
3
2
1
Create
1. Using Bartlett window design FIR Filter
2. Using Blackman window design FIR Filter
3. DesignPass band echo cancellation using LMS Algorithm
4. Using Discrete Fourier Transform design FIR filter.
Unit I
Multi rate signal Processing
IntroductionSampling and Signal ReconstructionSampling rate conversion Decimation by an integer
factor interpolation by an integer factor Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor and poly phase
FIR structures.
FIR structures with time varying Coefficients.
9 Hours
Unit II
Multi rate FIR Filter Design
Design of FIR filters for sampling rate conversion Multistage design of decimator and interpolatorApplications of Interpolation and decimation in signal processing Filter bank implementation Two
channel filter banksQMF filter banks Perfect Reconstruction Filter banks Filter banks with tree
structureDFT filter Banks.
Octave Filter Banks.
9 Hours
Unit III
Adaptive Filters
FIR Adaptive filters  Newton's steepest descent method Adaptive filters based on steepest descent
method  Wein Hoff LMS Adaptive algorithm  Adaptive channel equalization  Adaptive echo canceller Adaptive noise cancellation RLS Adaptive filters  Exponentially weighted RLS  Sliding window RLS
 Simplified IIR LMS
Adaptive filter.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Power Spectral Estimation
Estimation of spectra from finite duration observations of a signal The PeriodogramUse of DFT in Power
spectral Estimation NonParametric methods for Power spectrum Estimation Bartlett.Wech & Blackman
Tukey methods
Comparison of performance of Non Parametric power spectrum Estimation methods.
9 Hours
Unit V
Parametric methods of power spectrum estimation
Parametric methods for Power spectrum Estimation Relationship between auto correlation and model
parameters AR (Auto Regressive) process and Linear prediction Yule Walker, Burg & Unconstrained
Least squares methods Moving average (MA) and ARMA models Minimum variance method
Pisarenkos harmonic De composition Method.
MUSIC method.
9 Hours
195
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book(s):
1. H. Monson Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
2008.
2. G.. John Proakis and G. Dimitris Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Pearson Education, 2006.
Reference(s)
1.
N.J.Filege, Multirate Digital Signal Processing, John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
2.
G..John Proakis, Algorithms for Statistical Signal Processing, Pearson Education, 2002.
3.
G.Dimitris and G.Manolakis., Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing, McGraw Hill, 2002.
4.
Sophoncles J. Orfanidis, Optimum Signal Processing, McGraw Hill, 2007.
5.
D.G.Manolakis, V.K.Ingle and M.Kogons, Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing, McGraw
Hill, 2002.
11L011 TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To familiarize multiplexing and switching in telecommunication systems
To understand network synchronization and management
To know the traffic analysis
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
Course Outcome(s)
Able to understand the different multiplexing technique.
1. Able to learn about the concepts about Digital Switching.
2. Able to gain knowledge about Network Synchronization.
3. Able to analyse the Traffic Characterization.
Assessment Pattern
S.No BloomsTaxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
40
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze
5
5
5
5
5
Evaluate
5
5
5
5
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What Is Differential Encoding?
2. Define Payload Framing.
3. What is switching system?
4. Define time switching.
[[[
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
196
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Understand
1. Write down concept of freq justification?
2. State the advantages and disadvantages of partial response signaling.
3. What is the need of multidimensional switching?
4. What are the functions of TSI circuit?
5. What is the application of elastic store?
6. What is waiting time jitter?
7. What is LMDS local microwave distribution service?
8. Write the features and applications of VDSL.
9. What are the two categories used to analyze the traffic?
10. Distinguish call congestion and time congestion.
Apply
1.
2.
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Why higher sampling rates are preferred in analog time division switching?
2. Explain the opearation of unidirectional patch switched and bidirectional line switched SONET
rings.
3. Describe the ds3 pay load mapping and e4 payload mapping?
4. What is LMDS local microwave distribution service?
5. Discuss the applications of delay systems in modeling and analyzing communication networks.
6. Deadlock may occur in a road traffic junction. Illustrate this with the help of a diagram.
7. Explain about the techniques used to meet the resistance and attenuation constraints when
subscriber need to connect to exchange which is beyond the maximum prescribed distance.
8. Discuss about Signaling Techniques used by SS1, SS2, SS3, SS4, SS5 and SS5bis.
9. What is probability that a talk spurt experience clipping in a TASI system with 10 sources & 5
channels? Assume activity factor of each talker is 0.4.
10. A rural telephone exchange normally experiences four call origination per minute. What is the
probability that exactly seven calls occur in an arbitrarily chosen interval of 20 seconds?
11. A TASI system has 10 channels and 20 sources connected to it. What is the probability of clipping
if the activity factor for each source is 0.4?
12. A PCO is installed in a busy part of a town. 150 persons use the booth everyday. Average holding
time for a call is 1.5 mm. Find the probability of delay and average waiting time. Assume a single
server queue.
13. An exchange is designed to handle 12000 Calls during the busy hour. One day the number of calls
during the busy hour is 12200. What is the resulting GOS?
197
Unit I
Multiplexing
Transmission Systems, FDM Multiplexing and modulation, Time Division Multiplexing, Digital
Transmission and Multiplexing: Pulse Transmission, Line Coding, Binary NZero Substitution, Digital
Biphase, Differential Encoding, Time Division Multiplexing, Time Division Multiplex Loops and Rings.
SONET/SDH: SONET Multiplexing Overview, SONET Frame Formats SONET Operations,
Administration and Maintenance, Payload Framing and Frequency Justification, Virtual Tributaries, DS3
Payload Mapping, E4 Payload Mapping, SONET Optical Standards, SONET Networks. SONET Rings:
Unidirectional PathSwitched Ring,
Bidirectional Line and Switched Ring.
9 Hours
Unit II
Digital Switching
Switching Functions, Space Division Switching, Time Division Switching, twodimensional switches: STS
Switching, TST Switching, No.4 ESS Toll Switch, Digital CrossConnect Systems, Digital Switching in an
Analog Environment.
Elements of SSN07 signalling.
9 Hours
Unit III
Network Synchronization Control and Management
Timing: Timing Recovery: PhaseLocked Loop, Clock Instability, Jitter Measurements, Systematic Jitter.
Timing Inaccuracies: Slips, Asynchronous Multiplexing, Network Synchronization, U.S. Network
Synchronization.
Network Control and Network Management.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Digital Subscriber Access
ISDN: ISDN Basic Rate Access Architecture, ISDN U Interface, ISDN D Channel Protocol. HighDataRate Digital Subscriber Loops: Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line, VDSL. Digital Loop Carrier Systems:
Universal Digital Loop Carrier Systems, Integrated Digital Loop Carrier Systems, NextGeneration Digital
Loop Carrier, Fiber in the Loop, Hybrid Fiber Coax Systems, Voice band Modems: PCM Modems, Local
Microwave Distribution Service.
Digital Satellite Services.
9 Hours
Unit V
Traffic Analysis
Traffic Characterization: Arrival Distributions, Holding Time Distributions, Loss Systems, Network
Blocking Probabilities: EndtoEnd Blocking Probabilities, Overflow Traffic, Delay Systems: Exponential
service Times, Constant Service Times.
Finite Queues.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. T Viswanathan, Telecommunication Switching System and Networks, PHI, 1994.
Reference(s)
1. Bellamy John, Digital Telephony, John Wily, 2000.
11L012 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To acquire basic knowledge about parallel processing.
To study about parallel architectures, and parallel programming.
To understand the various searching and sorting algorithms.
198
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
b. able to demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
e. able to acquire a working knowledge of computer hardware, software and networking skills.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to understand the computer components, their functions and interconnection.
2. Able to possess the knowledge of number systems and digital logics.
3. Able to learn the use of memory hierarchy to reduce the effective memory latency.
4. Able to analyze the computer hardware design impacts on performance of operating systems.
Assessment Pattern
S.No BloomsTaxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
40
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze
5
5
5
5
5
Evaluate
5
5
5
5
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What is meant by parallel processing?
2. What are the programmatic levels in parallel processing?
3. What is a multiprocessor system?
4. What is an array processor?
5. Give the mapping techniques of cache.
6. Define mapping functions.
7. Define the Speedup and efficiency of a parallel machine.
8. What is fetch deadlock?
Understand
1. What is an uniprocessor system?
2. What are the parallelisms achieved by the architectural features of parallel computer?
3. What are the interconnections used in a multi processor system?.
4. What is an instruction Stream?
5. What are the machine organizations of FLYNNs classifications?
6. What is the relation between Computing Energy, Speedup and Efficiency? Explain.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
199
4.
5.
6.
respectively. Let us suppose that A, B and C are three vectors each of 64 elements3. Explain about
multiplexed LED display.
How does divide and conquer improve the efficiency of searching in binary search?
Given an array of size n wherein elements keep on increasing monotonically upto a certain
location after which they keep on decreasing monotonically, then again keep on increasing, then
decreasing again and so on. Sort the array in O(n) and O(1).(using bitonic merge)
How to read and write with random access to large files.
Analyze/Evaluate
1. A divideandconquer algorithm for integer multiplication.
2. Use the divideandconquer integer multiplication algorithm to multiply the two binary integers
10011011 and 10111010.
3. Write a program for Vehicle Routing Problem using A Parallel Branch and Bound Algorithm .
4. What is the worstcase behavior (number of comparisons) for quick sort?
5. Describe an efficient algorithm based on Quicksort that will find the element of a set that would be
at position k if the elements were sorted.
Unit I
BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS
Functional units Basic Operational Concepts, Bus Structures, Software Performance Memory locations
& addresses Memory operations Instruction and instruction sequencing addressing modes assembly
language Basic I/O operations.
Stacks and queues.
9 Hours
Unit II
ARITHMETIC
Addition and subtraction of signed numbers Design of fast adders multiplication of positive numberssigned operand multiplication and fast multiplication Integer division.
Floating point numbers and operations.
9 Hours
Unit III
BASIC PROCESSING UNIT
Fundamental concepts Execution of a complete Instruction Multiple bus organization Hardwired
control microprogrammed control.
Pipelining Basic concepts data hazards instruction hazards influence on Instruction sets Data path
and control consideration.
Superscalar operation.
9 Hours
Unit IV
MEMORY SYSTEM
Basic concepts semiconductor RAMs, ROMs Speed, size and cost cache memories  Performance
consideration Virtual memory Memory Management requirements.
Secondary storage.
9 Hours
Unit V
I/O ORGANIZATION
Accessing I/O devices Interrupts Direct Memory Access Buses Standard I/O Interfaces (PCI, SCSI,
USB).Interface Circuits.
9 Hours
Total : 45 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, Computer Organization 5 th Ed, McGraw
Hill, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. William Stallings, Computer Organization & Architecture Designing for Performance, 6th Ed.,
Pearson Education, 2003 reprint.
200
2.
3.
David A.Patterson and John L.Hennessy, Computer Organization & Design, the hardware /
software interface, 2nd Ed, Morgan Kaufmann, 2002 reprint.
John P.Hayes, Computer Architecture & Organization, 3 rd Ed, McGrawHill, 1998.
11L013 MEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To study about various medical image acquisition methods.
To understand 2D and 3D image reconstruction techniques.
To gain sound knowledge aboutCT, MRI, nuclear and ultrasound imaging.
To realize the factors those affect the quality of medical images.
Program Outcome(s)
a.
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
BloomsTaxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
20
40
30
5
5
100
Test II
20
40
30
5
5
100
Model
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Semester End
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Remember
1. What is a medical image?
2. Define Radon transform.
3. List the properties of Radon transform.
4. Specify the clinically used molecular imaging technologies.
5. What is a shadow gram?
6. List the various energy sources employed in medical imaging.
7. Mention the various algorithms used for image reconstruction from projections
8. What is Doppler effect? Mention the limitations of the Doppler systems.
9. List the various energy sources employed in medical imaging.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
201
2.
3.
4.
5.
(s, ) .
Mention different methods to obtain the function f(x,y) from g
What causes ultrasound image artifact?
Distinguish radiography from fluoroscopy.
Compare filtered back projection and iterative reconstruction methods.
How the constant brightness is maintained on the output screen of the intensifier irrespective of
changes in the attenuation of the xray beam ?
Compare conventional radiography with computed tomography.
List the different generations of CT scanner based on scan motions.
What is the need for an image intensifier?
Why ABC is essential in digital fluoroscopy?
Compare angiography and spectroscopy.
List the advantages of spiral compared with conventional computed tomography.
Differentiate analog and digital fluoroscopy.
TI has a decay constant of 9.49 x 10 3 hr1. (i) Findthe activity in number of disintegrations
per second of a sample containing 10 15 atoms. (ii).How many 201TI atoms remain after 3 hours
have elapsed? (iii) How many atoms of 11C with a decay constant of 2.18 hr1 would be required
to obtain the same activity in 201TI?
Determine the total gain in luminance of an image intensifier with an input screen 9 inch in
diameter, output screen 1 inch in diameter and flux gain of 50.
Find the resonant frequency for protons in a 2tesla magnetic field.
Find the image matrix by back projecting the projection data as given below.
Demonstrate ART algorithm with the help of the given 2x2 image matrix explain ART
2 4
algorithm.
4 6
Analyze
1. Analyze how image noise and patient dose in CT scanning are influenced by the SNR, the size of
each resolution element and the slice thickness.
2. Analyzethe various reasons for improving contrast resolution in CT imaging.
3. Derive an expression for radio activity and half life time of an isotope.
4. An ultrasound beam is attenuated by a factor of 20 in passing through the medium.What is the
attenuation of the medium in decibels?
202
Evaluate
1. Evaluate the performance of back projection and algebraic reconstruction algorithms with a help of
a 3X3 image matrix.
2. A region of tissue consists of 3cm fat,2cmmuscle,and 3cm liver.What is the approximate total
energy loss of ultrasound in tissue?
Unit I
Acquisition of Images
Introduction to Imaging Techniques Single crystal scintillation camera Principles of scintillation camera
multiple crystal scintillation camera solid state camera rectilinear scanner Emission computed
Tomography
Radiography: Digital Radiography.
9 Hours
Unit II
Mathematical Preliminaries for Image Reconstruction
Image Reconstruction from Projections in Two dimensions Mathematical Preliminaries for Two and
Three dimensional Image Reconstructions Radon Transform Projection Theorem central slice Theorem
Sinogram Two Dimensional Projection Reconstruction Three Dimensional Projection Reconstruction
Iterative Reconstruction Techniques.
Fourier Reconstruction.
9 Hours
Unit III
Fluoroscopy, CT, Image quality
Digital fluoroscopy Automatic Brightness control cinefluorography Principles of computed
Tomographic Imaging Reconstruction algorithms Scan motions X ray sources Influences of Images
quality:Unsharpness contrast Image Noise.
Image distortion and Artifacts.
9 Hours
UnitIV
Magnetic Resonance Imaging and Spectroscopy
Fundamentals of magnetic resonance overview Pulse techniques spatial encoding of magnetic
resonance imaging signal motion suppression techniques contrast agents tissue contrast in MRI MR
angiography, spectrography.
Chemical shift imaging.
9 Hours
Unit V
Ultra sound, Neuro magnetic Imaging: ultra Sound: Presentation modes Time required to obtain
Images System components, signal processing dynamic Range Ultrasound Image Artifacts Quality
control, Origin of Doppler shift Limitations of Doppler systems. Neuromagnetic Imaging: Background
Models and Image Reconstruction and Instrumentation.
.
9 Hours
Total : 45 hours
Textbook(s)
1. William R. Hendee, E. Russell Ritenour, Medical Imaging Physics: A John Wiley & sons, Inc.,
Publication, Fourth Edition 2002.
2. Z.H. Cho., Joie, P. Jones and Manbir Singh, Foundations of Medical Imaging: John Wiley and
sons Inc.
Reference(s)
1. Avinash C. Kak, Malcolm Shaney, Principles of Computerized Tomographic Imaging, IEEE
Press, Newyork1998.
203
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
204
Understand
1. Why is the international availability of the same ISM bands important?
2. Find the chips for a 4 stations network.. Assume data sent by 4 stations are Bit 0, Bit 0, Silent and
Bit1 respectively. How station3 can detect the data sent by station2
3. What could be possible roles of mobile stations, base stations, and planning from the network
provider?
4. How does a SIM card provide security against fraudulent use of GSM phone?
5. What are the main benefits of a spread spectrum system?
6. IEEE 802.11 WLAN operates at 2 Mbps. Determine the data transfer time of a 20KB.
7. Compare CDMA and GSM systems.
8. What is the role of plugins today and how do they influence the usability of web pages?
9. How does an ad hoc network differ from cellular networks?
Apply
1. Compare IEEE 802.11, HiperLAN2, and Bluetooth with regard to their adhoc capabilities.
2. Where is the focus of these technologies?
a. How routing is performed in fixed IP networks .
b. Explain the consequences and problems of usingIP together with the standard routing
protocols for mobile communications.
c. How cellular networks differs from adhoc networks?
d. Compare proactive routing protocols and reactive routing protocols
.
Analyze / Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
A MANET consists of 100 mobile nodes. When two links are broken, two new wireless links are
established every one second. Assume that each mobile node is connected to exactly 8 adjacent
mobile nodes. Compute the total number of wireless links in the network
IEEE 802.11 WLAN operates at 2 Mbps transmission rate. Compute the size of of the file
transferred in 16 seconds.
Suppose a data frame is to be sent from the node 3 to node 8 in extended service set which had
three BSS interconnected via DS. Describe the step by step procedure for routing of the data in
WLAN structure.
Create
1.
2.
3.
Design and configure a WiFi network setup for hostel room environment
Set up a file transfer in adhoc mode of Wireless LAN
Create a scenario of small adhoc network and justify the performace AODV protocol with and
without mobility.
Unit I
Introduction
Introduction to AdHoc wireless networks Packet radio networksKey definitions of adhoc and sensor
networks Advantages of adhoc and sensor networks Unique constraints and challenges and
Vulnerabilities  Wireless Communications/Radio Characteristics. Applications of AdHoc/Sensor
Network and Future Directions: Driving Applications Ultra wide band radio communication Wireless
fidelity systemsoptical wireless networks.
Body area networks and Personal area networks
9 Hours
Unit II
Media Access Control (MAC) Protocols
Issues in designing MAC protocols Bandwidth efficiencyQuality of service supportSynchronizationhidden nodeexposed node problems. Classifications of MAC protocols : Contention based protocolsMACAW Media access protocol for wireless LANmedia access with reduced handshake contention
based with reservation mechanismsDistributed priority scheduling.
Mac protocols using directional antenna.
9 Hours
205
Unit III
Routing Protocols
Issues in designing routing protocols Mobilitybandwidth constraintTable driven routing protocols:
DSDV, ,WRP, CHGSRP,  On demand routing protocol : AODV,DSR, TORA ,LAR,ANODR zone
routing protocolFish eye state routing protocolpower aware routing protocol.
Simulation using QUALNET simulator.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Wireless sensor Networks
Introductionsensor network architectureData disseminationdata gatheringself organizing MAC for
sensor networks Location discoveryEnergy efficient issuesTransport layer.
Syncronization issues.
9 Hours
Unit V
Security Issues in ad hoc / sensor network
Introduction Need for Security classification of attackMAC layer attacksNetwork layer attacks
Wired Equivalent Privacy(WEP) Intrusion prevention scheme Confidentiality : Symmetric EncryptionDES and Triple DES detection systems Authentication :Digital Signatures, Certificates, User
Authentication, Elliptic Curve Cryptosystems. Intrusion detection sytems :behavior based detectionknowledge based detectionwatch dogpathrater.
Reputaion based system :CORE,CONFIDENT.
9 Hours
Total : 45 hours
Textbook(s)
1. Siva Ram Murthy. C and Manoj. B.S, AdHoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols,
Prentice Hall PTR, 2004.
Reference(s)
1. Charles Perkins, Ad hoc Networking, Addision Wesley,2008,Pearson
2. Toh C.K, Ad Hoc Mobile wireless Networks : protocol and Systems, Prentice Hall PTR, 2007.
3. Feng zhao, Leonidas Guibas, Wireless sensor network, Morgan Kaufmann publishers, 2005
4. Kazem sohraby, Daniel minoli and Taieb Znati, Wireless sensor networks Technology, Protocols
and Applications, Wiley, 2007
5. S.Marti et al., Mitigating Routing Misbehaviour in Mobile Ad Hoc Networks ,ACM
MOBICOM, 2000
11L015 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND COMPATIBILITY
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To explore the concepts of EMI Environment and EMI Coupling Principles.
To focus on popular EMI/EMC Standards and Measurements.
To study the control techniques involved Electromagnetic Interference.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understanding the transmission of electrical and electromagnetic energy through different types of
transmission lines
2. Understand the basic properties of wave propagation.
206
3.
Utilization of different methods for understanding the behavior of electrostatic fields and number
of important applications
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
BloomsTaxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
20
40
30
5
5
100
20
40
30
5
5
100
Model
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Semester End
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Remember
1. What Are The Different Ways In Which An e.m.f can be induced in a loop?
2. What is boundary condition?
3. What is displacement current?
4. What is pointing vector?
5. What is the meaning of loss tangent of a medium?
6. Define wave number
7. What are evanescent modes?
8. Define Brewster angle?
9. What Is Skin Effect?
Understand
1. What is line integral?
2. What is solenoidal,irrotational field?
3. State Helmholtz theorem?
4. What is a conservative field?
5. How many types of vector fields does the Helmholtz theorem allow?
6. What are the uses and implications of dielectric strength of materials?
7. Why cant we use direct integration to solve Laplaces Poisson equation for general fields?
8. Under what condition does Laplaces equation apply?
9. Which equation does the method of image solve?
Apply
1. A scalar field is given in Cartesian coordinates as f(x,y,z)=x+5zy2. Calculate the gradient of the
scalar field in cylindrical coordinates.
2. Calculate the electric field intensity at the center of a very thin ring of radius a if a charge density
l is uniformly distributed on the ring.
3. A load, such as an antenna, of impedance ZL=50j100 is connected to a lossless transmission line
with characteristic impedance Z0=100. The line operates at 300MHz and the speed of
propagation on the line is 0.8c. (a) calculate the input admittance a distance 2.5m from the load.
(b) calculate the input impedance a distance 2.5m from the load. (c)suppose the load is shorted
accidentally. What is the input admittance at the same point?
4. A half wavelength dipole is used to transmit at 80MHz and 100W. A receiving antenna in the
5.
from of a Hertzian dipole, /50m in length, is used to receive, 20km away. Calculate (a)the
maximum power received by the Hertzian dipole.(b) the maximum current in the Hertzian dipole.
A short dipole antenna of length 10mm carries a current I=0.1A and oscillates at 10GHz. write the
time dependent electric and magnetic fields of the dipole at any point in space.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
207
6.
7.
An airfilled waveguide operates below cutoff. The operating frequency is 1GHz and the cutoff
frequency is 1.5GHz. the power P is supplied to the waveguide at a point z=0. How far does the
power propagates before it is attenuated to 1012P?
A transmission line used to connect a transmitter to its antenna has characteristic impedance
Z0=50+j50 is connected as a load to the line. Calculate the load reflection coefficient.
Unit I
Basic Concepts
Definition of EMI and EMC with examples, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMI / EMC)
Standards,Classification of EMI/EMC  CE, RE, CS, RS, Units of Parameters, Sources of EMI, EMI
coupling modes  CM and DM, ESD Phenomena and effects.
Transient phenomena and suppression
9 Hours
Unit II
Emi Measurements
Basic principles of RE, CE, RS and CS measurements, EMI measuring instruments Antennas, LISN, Feed
through capacitor, current probe, EMC analyzer and detection technique open area site, shielded anechoic
chamber.
TEM cell.
9 Hours
Unit III
Emc Standard And Regulations
National and Intentional standardizing organizations FCC, CISPR, ANSI, DOD, IEC, CENEEC, FCC CE
and RE standards, CISPR, CE and RE Standards, IEC/EN, CS standards, Frequency assignment
Spectrum conversation.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Emi Control Methods And Fixes
Shielding, Grounding, Bonding, Filtering, EMI gasket, Isolation transformer.
Opto isolator.
9 Hours
Unit V
Emc Design And Interconnection Techniques
Cable routing and connection, Component selection and mounting, PCB design Trace routing, Impedance
control, decoupling.
Zoning and grounding
9 Hours
Total :45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Prasad Kodali.V Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility S.Chand&Co New Delhi
2000
2. Clayton R.Paul Introduction to Electromagnetic compatibility Wiley & Sons 1992
Reference(s)
1. Keiser Principles of Electromagnetic Compatibility Artech House 3rd Edition 1994
2. Donwhite Consultant Incorporate Handbook of EMI / EMC Vol I  1985
11L016 NANO ELECTRONICS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To motivate the students towards research field
To create awareness among students, about the managerial roles and functions
To enable the students to understand the structure of the organization and its departmentation
To have a clear idea of the individual behaviour of subordinates and to tackle critical situation as a
manager
To enlighten the students in motivating the subordinates and increase the productivity/profits.
208
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Development of Simulation skill
2. Determine the modeling and analysis
3. Determine the personality attitudes
4. Diagnose the leadership theories
5. Diagnose the decision making
Assessment Pattern
S.No BloomsTaxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
40
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze
5
5
5
5
5
Evaluate
5
5
5
5
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What is nanoelectronics?
2. How nanoelectronics works?
3. What is its Historical background?
4. What are the applications of Nanoelectronics?
5. What are the Advantages of Nano electronics
6. Why do solids occur in the form of a crystal?
7. Which device has the highest drain current in saturation at zero gate voltage, a ptype nhancement
MOSFET or an ntype depletion MOSFET?
8. Why is the electron layer of an nMOSFET called an inversion layer?
9. Why is there no current in a MOSFET when the device is biased in accumulation?
10. What is the difference between the linear and the quadratic MOSFET model?
11. Does the body effect affect CMOS circuits? Explain.
12. Describe the temperature dependence of the carrier density in a semiconductor. Identify the three
regions and explain what happens by indicating the filled and empty states on an energy band
diagram. Do this for ntype, ptype and compensated material.
13. Describe the microscopic behavior of electrons and holes in a semiconductor.
14. Define the mobility. \
15. Explain why the mobility in a semiconductor depends on the doping density.
16. Define the resistivity and conductivity of a semiconductor.
17. Explain why the velocity in a semiconductor is limited.
18. What is the diffusion length and how does it relate to the diffusion constant and the minority
carrier lifetime?
19. What are the Concerned issues of nanoelectronics?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
209
Understand
1. Understand nanoscale transport! (closed loop between theory and experiment necessary).
2. Develop/understand new fabrication techniques to do conventional things cheaper.
3. Understand and solve the scaling problem and find a replacement of the transistor.
4. Understand the new ways of doing electronics and their application (e.g. quantum computing;
electronics modeled after living systems; hybrid Sibiological systems; cellular automata).
5. Device modeling concepts: Numerical and analytical modeling.
6. Do research and lay the foundation for the Intel of the New Millenium
Apply/Evaluate
1. Detail study of the new research article, white papers, and review papers.
2. Determine mathematical models of nanodevices?
3. Cary out some simulation with soft ware model?
4. Understanding and solution finding of some present and related problems?
5. Developing some practical and software skills, relevant to industry standards?
6. Evaluate the Strategy for Improving Communication?
Create
1. Create product and product design ideas by searching for consumer needs and screening the
various alternatives.
Unit I
Introduction to Nanotechnology
Background to nanotechnology: Types of nanotechnology and nanomachines periodic table atomic
structure molecules and phases energy molecular and atomic size surface and dimensional space
top down and bottom up; Molecular Nanotechnology: Electron microscope scanning electron microscope
atomic force microscope scanning tunnelling microscope nanomanipulator nanotweezers atom
manipulation nanodots self assembly dip pen nanolithography. Nanomaterials: preparation plasma
arcing chemical vapor deposition solgels electrodeposition ball milling.
Applications of nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit II
Fundamentals Of Nanoelectronics
Fundamentals of logic devices: Requirements dynamic properties threshold gates; physical limits to
computations; concepts of logic devices: classifications two terminal devices field effect devices
coulomb blockade devices spintronics quantum cellular automata quantum computing DNA
computer; performance of information processing systems; basic binary operations, measure of
performance processing capability of biological neurons performance estimation for the human brain.
Ultimate computation: power dissipation limit dissipation in reversible computation.
The ultimate computer.
.
9 Hours
Unit III
Silicon Mosfets & Quantum Transport Devices
Silicon MOSFETS  Novel materials and alternate concepts: fundamentals of MOSFET Devices scaling
rules silicondioxide based gate dielectrics metal gates junctions & contacts advanced MOSFET
concepts. Quantum transport devices based on resonant tunneling: Electron tunneling resonant tunneling
diodes resonant tunneling devices; Single electron devices for logic applications: Single electron
devices.
Applications of single electron devices to logic circuits.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Carbon Nanotubes
Carbon Nanotube: Fullerenes  types of nanotubes formation of nanotubes assemblies purification of
carbon nanotubes electronic propertics synthesis of carbon nanotubes carbon nanotube interconnects
carbon nanotube FETsNanotube for memory applications.
Prospects of an all carbon nanotube nanoelectronics.
9 Hours
210
Unit V
Molecular Electronics
Electrodes & contacts functions molecular electronic devices first test systems simulation and
circuit design fabrication; Future applications:
MEMS.Robots and random.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons and Burkhard Raguse,
Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies, Chapman & Hall / CRC, 2002.
2. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, TMH,
2007
3. Rainer Waser (Ed.), Nanoelectronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic Materials
and Novel Devices, WileyVCH, 2003
Reference(s)
1. Saito, S., Carbon Nanotubes for NextGeneration Electronics Device, Science 278 (5335): 7778.
doi:10.1126/science.278.5335.77
2. George W. Hanson, Fundamentals of nano electronics, Prentice Hall, 2008
11L017 RF MEMS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To acquire basic knowledge about application of MEMS in RF communications.
To study about MEMS physical modeling and reconfigurable elements.
To understand MEMS phase shifters and Filters.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Ability to understand the fabrication methodology used in MEMS
2. An ability to construct and analyze the various models of MEMS
3. Ability to use the reconfigurable design implementation in MEMS
4. Able to apply different types of filters and phase shifters in MEMS
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
BloomsTaxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
20
40
30
5
5
100
Test II
20
40
30
5
5
100
Model
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
Semester End
Examination
20
40
30
5
5
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
211
Remember
1.
2.
Which are the basic modeling methods that can be used in RF MEMS design?
Give examples of RF MEMS components where the pullin effect is an advantage or a
disadvantage? Why?
3. Describe and discuss effect of the contact resistance and the contact capacitance
4. Why do you need to use transmission lines for connecting components at RF?
5. Which factors will influence the Qfactor of the cc beam resonator and how can you increase the
Qfactor?
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
Describe the analytic modeling of a parallel plate capacitor and the pullin effect:
Draw a sketch of a springsuspended twoplate capacitor.
Which forces are involved when you put on a voltage between the plates?
When does pullin occur and why?
Explain why hysteresis arises.
RF switch used in an RF transmission line: o Why do you need to use transmission lines for
connecting components at RF?
a. If you have a lossless transmission line with characteristic impedance Z0 and load
Z_load,  how can you obtain a maximum signal transmission to the load?
b. What happens with the signal in case of an open or shorted transmission line
Cc beam as a resonator: o Describe the structure and operation of a cc beam used as a resonator.
a. Why do you put on a DC voltage on the resonator beam? What is the effect?
b. Which factors will influence the Qfactor of the cc beam resonator and how can you
increase the Qfactor?
c. How can you increase the resonating frequency?
Freefree beam as a resonator: o Describe the structure and operation of a freefree beam used as a
resonator.
a. What are the advantages of using an ff beam compared to a cc beam?
b. Which are the critical parameters for implementing an ff beam with optimal
performance?
Apply
1.
2.
3.
How can you combine MEMS and integrated circuits on a single chip (monolithic integration)?
Describe typical advantages and disadvantages of the main procedures.
How can MEMS inductors be implemented? o Give examples of in plane (2dimensional
inductor) and 3D implementations.
How does a tunable double airgap MEMS capacitor function? o How can you get the maximum
tuning range out of such a structure? Describe principal features of an implementation.
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Which are the main design parameters for this system, and how do they influence the operation?
2. In which applications can a MEMS phase shifter be useful?
3. What happens with the signal in case of an open or shorted transmission line?
4. Modeling of springmassdamper: Draw a sketch of a typical springmassdamper system. Set up
the transfer function.
5. Suppose a MEMS contact switch is placed serially in a transmission line having a characteristic
impedance of Z0 before and after. Compute the reflection (return loss) of the signal when the
switch is open (not conducting).
Unit I
Introduction
Introduction to RF MEMS: application in wireless communications, space and defense ApplicationsOverview of RF MEMS fabrication, design and testingIntroduction to Micro fabrication TechniquesMaterials propertiesBulk and surface micromachiningWet and dry etching Thinfilm depositions
(LPCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation).
LIGA and Electroplating
9 Hours
212
Unit II
MEMS Physical Modeling
Physical and practical aspects of RF circuit design: Impedance mismatch effects in RF
MEMSRF/Microwave substrate properties: Micro machined enhanced elements, MEM switches,
Resonators.
MEMS modeling.
9 Hours
Unit III
Reconfigurable Elements
Reconfigurable circuit elements: Resonator MEMS Switch Tunable CPW resonator, MEMS micro switch
array, Reconfigurable antenna.
9 Hours
Unit IV
MEMS Phase Shifters
MEMS Phase Shifters: Types of Phase shifters, Switched delay line phase shifters.
Distributed MEMS phase shifters.
9 Hours
Unit V
MEMS Filters
RF MEMS Filters: Modeling of mechanical Filters and resonators, Micro machined filters for millimeter
wave applications.
SAW filters.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. H.J.Delos Santos , RF MEMS circuit Design for Wireless Communications ,Artech House, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. G.M.Rebeiz, RF MEMS Theory, Design and Technology, John Wiley, 2003
2. V.K.Varadan etal, RF MEMS and their Applications, John Wiley, 2003.
11L018 SOFT COMPUTING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To make the students to understand Fuzzy logic and Neural Network concepts.
To acquire the basic knowledge of Genetic algorithms.
To equip the students with the latest application of soft computing
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understanding the various types of Classical sets, Fuzzy sets and its properties.
2. Operation of the Fuzzy logic control systems.
3. Discuss the methods of Fuzzy rules.
4. Realizing the classical and fuzzy relation.
213
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
1
Remember
2
Understand
3
Apply
4
Analyze
5
Evaluate
6
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
10
10
10
100
25
25
20
10
10
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. Discuss different techniques used in Soft Computing and its applications
2. What is Soft Computing?
3. Explain Fuzzy Inference System (FIS)?
4. Define Membership function, fuzzy set, fuzzy ifthen Rules
5. Differentiate Fuzzy Set Vs Crisp Set
6. How Genetic Algorithm is different from traditional algorithms?
7. Discuss Crossover operation in GA and its types
8. Discuss different encoding techniques used for GA
9. Explain following terms Core, Boundary, Support in term of Fuzzy Logic
10. What is a neural Network?
11. Comparison between Mamdani and Takagi Model
12. What are the basic elements of a fuzzy logic control system?
13. What does backdrop mean?
14. What is the fundamental building block of the biological neural network? Discuss
15. List the four different operations on classical sets
16. Do fuzzy sets follow the same properties as crisp sets
17. List the two different forms most fuzzy logic control system models can be expressed
18. Define the term fuzzy relation
19. What is the cardinality of a fuzzy relation
20. Compare the fuzzy logic control and classical control system
21. Give the differential equation in Inverted pendulum
22. Write Give the structure of a fuzzy production rule system
23. Define fuzzification
24. Define Defuzzification.
25. Differentiate fuzzification and defuzzification
Understand
1. Explain Fuzzy Logic, fuzzy set?
2. Explain the concept of adaptive fuzzy system with suitable example
3. Tabulate and discuss the canonical form for a fuzzy rule based system
4. What is the need for ANN in Fuzzy Logic Controller design during fuzzification?
5. Discuss the home heating system with fuzzy logic control
6. List out the importance of the neuro fuzzy controller in other fields
7. List the various properties of crisp relations.
8. What is the necessity of composition of a relation?
9. Compare constrained relation and non constrained relation.
10. What is meant by non interactive fuzzy sets?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
214
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Apply
1.
2.
215
216
Unit V
Applications of Soft Computing
Fuzzy techniques for inverted pendulum caseSIRM fuzzy systemsMCDM for weather forecasting and
financial marketingNeural networks for pattern recognitionTS problemsRouters.
GA application to metabolic modeling.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. C T Jang, J S R Sun and E Mizutani , Neuro Fuzzy and Soft computing, Pearson Education ,2004
2. David E Goldberg,Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization, and Machine Learning,Pearson
Education, 1996.
Reference(s)
1. Laurene Fauseett: Fundamentals of Neural Networks, PHI,1994
2. Timothy J.Ross: Fuzzy Logic Engineering Applications, McGrawHill,
1997.
3. S.Rajasekaran and G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai Neural networks,Fuzzy logics,and Geneticalgorithms,
PHI,2003
4. George J.Klir and Bo Yuan,Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic, PHI ,1995
11L019 HIGH SPEED NETWORKS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To familiarize High Speed Networks
To understand Congestion and Traffic Management
To know the QoS of High speed networks
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to apply knowledge from undergraduate engineering and other disciplines to identify,
formulate, solve novel advanced electronics engineering along with soft computing problems that
require advanced knowledge within the field
b. able to understand and integrate new knowledge within the field.
c. able to understand and design advanced electronics systems (Analog and Digital Systems) and
conduct experiments, analyze and interpret data
e. able to become knowledgeable about contemporary developments.
Course Outcome(s)
Able to identify the various protocols in high speed Networks.
1. Able to learn TCP and ATM Congestion Control.
2. Able to study the Congestion and Traffic Management.
3. Able to understand Integrated and differentiated services in high speed Networks.
4. Able to analyze Quality of service and multiprotocol lable switching.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
Remember
1. List and explain the types of frame relay messages.
2. Give some examples of ATM applications
3. State the key characteristics to be considered for deriving the analytic equations for the queuing
model.
4. What are meant by choke packets?
5. What is meant by credit allocation scheme?
6. List and explain the mechanism available for supporting rate guarantees in an ATM GFR service?
7. List some requirements for inelastic Traffic
8. State and explain the types of PHBs for differentiated services
9. List the various reservation attributes and styles of the RSV Protocol in detail.
10. What is meant be traffic engineering
Understand
1. What are the requirements for ATM traffic and congestion control? (10)
2. What are the types of retransmit policy?
Why congestion control in a TCP/IPbased internet is complex.
3. What is the role of DE lint in Frame relay?
4. Draw the diagram for ATM layers?
5. Give the data rates for frame relayand X.25?
6. Write Littles formula.
7. What is Bluetooth?
8. Define cell delay variation.
Apply/Evaluate
1. Messages arrive at a switching center for a particular outgoing communications line in a poisson
manner with a mean arrival rate of 180 messages per hour. Message length is distributed
exponentially with a mean length of 14,400 characters. Line speed is 9600 bps.
2. Assume that priorities are not used. The combined arrival rate of frame of both types is 800
frames/second. What is the mean residences time (Tr) for all frames?
Create
1. At an ATM Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. in a supermarket, the Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid. length of a transaction is 2 minutes,and on average, customers arrive to use
the machine once every 5 minutes, How long is the average time that a person must spend Error!
Hyperlink reference not valid. and using the machine? What is the 90th percentile of residence
time? On average, how many people are waiting to use the machine? Assume M/M/1
Unit I
High Speed Networks
Frame Relay Networks Asynchronous transfer mode ATM Protocol Architecture, ATM logical
Connection, ATM Cell ATM Service Categories AAL. High Speed LANs: Fast Ethernet Wireless
LANs: applications, requirements Architecture of 802.11.
Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel
9 Hours
Unit II
Congestion and Traffic Management
Queuing Analysis Queuing Models Single Server Queues Effects of Congestion Congestion Control
Traffic Management Congestion Control in Packet Switching Networks.
Frame Relay Congestion Control.
9 Hours
Unit III
TCP and ATM Congestion Control
TCP Flow control TCP Congestion Control Retransmission Timer Management Exponential RTO
back off KARNs Algorithm Window management Performance of TCP over ATM Traffic and
Congestion control in ATM Requirements Attributes Traffic Management Frame work, Traffic
Control ABR traffic Management ABR rate control, RM cell formats, ABR Capacity allocations
GFR traffic management.
9 Hours
217
Unit IV
Integrated and Differentiated Services
Integrated Services Architecture Approach, Components, Services Queuing Discipline, FQ, PS, BRFQ,
GPS, WFQ Random Early Detection.
9 Hours
Differentiated Services
Unit V
Protocols for QoS Support
RSVP Goals & Characteristics, Data Flow, RSVP operations, Protocol Mechanisms Multiprotocol
Label Switching Operations, Label Stacking, Protocol details RTP Protocol Architecture, Data
Transfer Protocol. RTCP
9 Hours
Total: 45Hours
Textbook(s)
1. William Stallings, High Speed Networks and Internet, Pearson Education, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. Warland, Pravin Varaiya, High Performance Communication Networks, Jean Harcourt Asia
,2001.
2. Irvan Pepelnjk, Jim Guichard and Jeff Apcar, MPLS and VPN Architecture, Cisco Press, Volume
1 and 2, 2003.
11L020 WIRELESS NETWORKS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To familiarize the wireless communication principles and fundamentals
To understand Ad Hoc Wireless Networks and WWAN
To know the Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS)
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
i. able to utilize the appropriate laboratory testing equipment to measure, compare, and explain
experimental circuit results.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Identify the various IEEE standards of wireless Networks
2. Recognize architecture of GPRS mobile application protocols
3. Study the code deviation multiple access standards
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
218
Remember
1. What are the types of propagation characteristics?
2. Mention the two multiple access technique.
3. Define FDMA
4. What are types of architecture of LAN?
5. List out of IEEE standards.
6. What are the advantages of TDD?
7. Differentiate between wired and wireless LAN.
8. what are types of third generation protocols
9. Define Handoff.
10. Define HIPERLAN
11. Why is power control important in CDMA?
12. Define Routing
13. What is Multicasting?
14. Define UMTS
15. What is GPRS136?how does it differ from GPRS?
Understand
1. Name the four categories of 2G wireless networks
2. Name three major cellular standards in the United States and give the name of their wireless
access technology
3. What is the difference between registration and call establishment in a cellular network
4. What are the bandwidths and chip rates used in WCDMA and how they compare with cdmaone?
5. Why is Power control important in CDMA?
6. What is the importance of color codes in CDPD?
7. How does GPRS provides a variety of data rates?
8. What is the difference between power control in 802.11 and power control in cellular systems?
9. Why do we have four addressing slots in the 802.11 MAC and only two in the 802.3?
10. What are the responsibilities of the MAC management sub layer in 802.22?
11. Name four major transmission techniques considered for WLAN standards and give the standard
activity associated with each of them.
12. What are the MAC services of IEEE 802.11 that are not provided in the traditional LANs such as
802.3?
13. Why does the MAC layer of 802.11 have four address fields, compared with 802.3, which has
two?
Apply
1.
Determine the data rates that can be provided for the following cases:
i. CS1 where GMSK is used with a code rate of 0.49
ii. CS3 where GMSK is used with a code rate of 0.73
iii. PCS3 where 8PSK is used with a code rate of 0.6
iv. PCS6 where 8PSK is used with a code rate of 1
2. The IEEE 802.11 operates at 2.4 GHz, transmits100mW, and the minimum acceptable received
signal strength for its proper operation is 80 dBM.Using the JTC model; determine its
approximated coverage in a threefloor office building
Analyze / Evaluate
1. A mobile node has a home address of 136.142.117.21 and a careof address of 130.216.16.5.It
listens to agent advertisements periodically.
a. The agent advertisement indicates that the careof address is 130.216.45.3. What
happens? Why?
b. The agent advertisement indicates that the careof address is 136.142.117.1.What
happens? Why?
2. Considering that the encoded voice in Bluetooth is at 64Kbps in each direction:
a. Use packet format for HV1 channels to show that these packets are sent every six slots
b. Use packet format for HV2 channels to find how often these packets are sent
c. Repeat (b) for HV3 packets.
219
3.
An adhoc 2 Mbps WLAN using ALOHA protocol connects two stations with a distance of 100 m
from one another each, on the average generating 10 packets per second. If one of the terminals
transmits a 100bit packet, what is the probability of successful transmission of this packet?
Assume that the propagation velocity is 300,000 km/sec and the packets are produced according to
the Poisson distribution
Create
1. a. Use the equation for generation of CCK to generate the complex transmitted codes associated
with the data sequence
{0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1}
b.Repeat (a) for the sequence {1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0} Show that the two generated sequence are
orthogonal.
2. Use a software tool like mat lab to generate 1000 impulse responses of the JTC indoor residential
radio channel (all 3 cases).Determine the RMS multipath delay spread for each sample and plot
the cumulative distribution function.
Unit I
Wireless Communication Principles and Fundamentals
Wireless propagation characteristics and modeling Voice codingMultiple access for wireless systemFDMA,TDMA,CDMA,CSMAPerformance increasing techniquesAdhoc and semi adhoc conceptwireless
services:circuit and packet mode.
Data delivery approach.
9 Hours
Unit II
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN applicationconcerns TopologiesPhysical layerMAC layer HYPER LAN 1 MAC
sublayer, IEEE 802.11 MAC sublayerIEEE 802.11a/ 802.11 b / 802.11g.wireless ATM architechture.
HYPER LAN 2 : an ATM compatible WLAN.
9 Hours
Unit III
Ad Hoc Wireless Networks
Cellular And Adhoc Wireless networks Applications issues in adhoc wireless networksmedium access
sheme, Routing, multicasting, QoS,security, Energy managementChallenges in designing routing protocol
for adhoc networks.
On demand routing protocol.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Wireless WAN
Mechanism to support a mobile environment, communication in the infrastructure, IS95 CDMA forward
channel, IS 95 CDMA reverse channel, pallert and frame formats in IS 95, IMT 2000; forward
channel in WCDMA and CDMA 2000, reverse channels in WCDMA and CDMA2000, GPRS and
higher data rates.
Short messaging service in GPRS mobile application protocols.
9 Hours
Unit V
WPAN and Geolocation Systems
IEEE 802.15 WPAN, Home RF, Bluetooth, interface between Bluetooth and 802.11, wireless geolocation
technologies for wireless geolocation.
9 Hours
Geolocation standards for E.911 service.
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. P. Nicopolitidis , M.S.Obaidat, G.I.Papadimitriou, A.S. Pomportsis, Wireless Networks,
Wiley&Sons, 2003.
Reference(s)
1. Jochen Schiller, Mobile Communications, Person Education 2003, 2nd Edn.
2. X.Wang and H.V.Poor, Wireless Communication Systems, Pearson education, 2004.
3. C. Siva Ram Murthy and B.S. Manoj, AdHoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and protocols,
Prentice Hall PTR, 2004
4. M.Mallick, Mobile and Wireless design essentials, Wiley Publishing Inc. 2003.
220
5.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
221
2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply
1.
Why, typically, is digital modulation not enough for radio transmission? What are general goals
for digital modulation? What are typical schemes?
What are the main reasons for using cellular systems? How is SDM typically realized and
combined with FDM? How does DCA influence the frequencies available in other cells?
How does the near/far effect influence TDMA systems? What happens in CDMA systems? What
are countermeasures in TDMA systems, what about CDMA systems?
Why are GEO systems for telecommunications currently being replaced by fibre optics?
Summarise the main features of 3rd generation mobile phone systems. How do they achieve
higher capacities and higher data rates? How does UMTS implement asymmetrical
communication and different data rates?
2. 2G and 3G systems can both transfer data. Compare these approaches with DAB/DVB and list
reasons for and against the use of DAB/DVB.
3. Compare IEEE 802.11, HiperLAN2, and Bluetooth with regard to their adhoc capabilities. Where
is the focus of these technologies?
4. Predict the consequences and problems of using IP together with the standard routing protocols for
mobile communications.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. How can MACA still fail in case of hidden/exposed terminals? Think of mobile stations
2. and changing transmission characteristics.
3. Why is routing in multihop ad hoc networks complicated, what are the special
4. challenges?
5. How can DHCP be used for mobility and support of mobile IP?
6. A MANET consists of 100 mobile nodes. When two links are broken, two new wireless links are
established every one second. Assume that each mobile node is connected to exactly 8 adjacent
mobile nodes. Compute the total number of wireless links in the network
Create
1. Show the interaction of mobile IP with standard TCP. Draw the packet flow from afixed host to a
mobile host via a foreign agent. Then a handover takes place. What are the following actions of
mobile IP and how does TCP react?
2. How do conventional file systems react to disconnected systems? Try unplugging a computer that
has mounted a file system via a network.
Unit I
Introduction
Medium Access Control : Motivation for Specialized MAC SDMA FDMA TDMA CDMAComparison of Access mechanisms Tele communications : GSM DECT TETRA UMTS IMT200
Satellite Systems: Basics Routing Localization Handover Broadcast Systems: Overview Cyclic
Repetition of Data Digital Audio Broadcasting.
Digital Video Broadcasting.
9 Hours
Unit II
Wireless Networks
Wireless LAN: Infrared Vs Radio Transmission Infrastructure Networks Ad hoc Networks IEEE 802.11
HIPERLAN Bluetooth Wireless ATM: Working Group Services Reference Model Functions
Radio Access Layer Handover Location Management Addressing Mobile Quality of Service.
Access Point Control Protocol.
9 Hours
Unit III
Mobile Network Layer
Mobile IP : Goals Assumptions and Requirement Entities IP packet Delivery Agent Advertisement
and Discovery Registration Tunneling and Encapsulation Optimization Reverse Tunneling IPv6
DHCP.
Ad hoc Networks.
9 Hours
222
Unit IV
Mobile Transport Layer
Traditional TCP Indirect TCP Snooping TCP Mobile TCP Fast retransmit/ Fast RecoveryTransmission/ Timeout Freezing Selective Retransmission.
Transaction Oriented TCP.
9 Hours
Unit V
WAP
Architecture Datagram Protocol Transport Layer Security Transaction Protocol Session ProtocolApplication Environment.
Wireless Telephony Application.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. J.Schiller, Mobile Communication, Addison Wesley, 2000.
2. William Stallings, Wireless Communication and Networks, Pearson Education, 2003.
Reference(s)
1. Singhal, WAPWireless Application Protocol, Pearson Education, 2003
2. Lother Merk, Martin. S. Nicklaus and Thomas Stober, Principles of Mobile Computing, Second
Edition, Springer, 2003.
3. William C.Y.Lee, Mobile Communication Design Fundamentals, John Wiley, 1993
11L022 MACHINE VISION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To learn the image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary for image processing.
To understand the image enhancement and restoration methods.
To study the concepts of optics and lens systems.
Program Outcome(s)
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Analysis the procedure for various image processing principles in machine vision.
2. Analysis image enhancement and edge detection methods
3. Diagnose the degree of complications in optical image processing methods
4. Identification of new developments in object recognition systems.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
223
Remember
1. Define Non uniform sampling.
2. List the level of Computations on image. Give two examples of each level of computation.
3. How Euler number is used to define an object?
4. What are the different Morphological operators?
5. How the multi threshold is adapted for region segmentation?
6. Define boundary of the image.
7. How opening and closing operators are used for thinning?
8. Define image merge and split.
9. How double threshold is used in region segmentation?
10. What is optical shading of the image?
Understand
1. How the edge does is related to the boundary of the object?
2. Why is the Laplacian not a good edge operator?
3. Define view volume.
4. State diffuse reflectance.
5. Contrast shape from shading and shape from texture.
6. Contrast edge detection and corner detection.
7. How Laplace operator will be useless in edge detection?
8. Contrast geometric projections of the change detection.
9. Compare feature selection and feature indexing
10. ContrastCT images and PET images.
Apply
1. Detect edges using facet approximation and obtain the following:
Find the Cubic fit coefficients K1 to K10 at pixel level, Gradient angle
2. Develop a medial axis algorithm. Apply it to four binary images of irregular shaped objects and
bring out the strength and weakness of this technique to represent shapes of objects.
3. Pyramid representations are appearing in many different forms. In many common multimedia
applications thumbnail sketches are used. What are thumbnail sketches? Can you consider these
schemes a subset of pyramid schemes?
4. Quad tree representations have a serious limitation for applications in machine vision. A
connected component in an image may be distributed at distant nodes in this representation. Can
you identify a scheme to modify quad trees to remove this limitation?
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Analyze
1. Find the quad tree representation for the following object
Evaluate
1. A component labelling algorithm is a computational bottleneck in many applications. This can be
considered a bridge between lower levels and higher levels in vision system. Develop a fast
algorithm to compute connected components and this algorithm work in parallel.
2. Consider a moving object with position (p x, py, pz) and velocity vector (vx, vy vz) in camera co
ordinates. It is desirable to adjust the shutter speed so that the blur due to motion is reduced to an
acceptable level, defined for this exercise to be the minimum distance between imaging elements.
224
Calculate the projected velocity vector on the image plane assuming perspective projection and
camera constant f.
Create
1. Design a system to count how many people entered coffee room and what percentage took coffee.
Assume that you can use multiple cameras if required and you are free to determine the location
and orientation of cameras.
2. Compare classical pattern recognition approaches based on Bayesian approaches with neural
networks by considering the feature space, classification methods, object models and knowledge
used by these methods.
Unit I
Machine vision
Introduction Machine vision Relationship to other fields Image definitions levels of computationBinary image processing Thresholding Geometric properties position orientation Run length
encoding Binary algorithms Definitions  Component labeling Size filter Euler number Region
boundary Area perimeter compact Distance measures Distance transforms Medial axis Thinning
expanding and shrinking
Morphological operators.
9 Hours
Unit II
Regions
Regions and Edges  Regions segmentation Automatic thresholding, Limitations of Histogram methods
Region representation array representation  Hierarchical representation  Split and merge region
merging Removing weak edges Region splitting  split and merge .
Region growing.
9 Hours
Unit III
Edge detection
Gradient Steps in edge deduction Roberts operator sober operator pewit operator Comparison
Second derivative operator, Laplacian operator, Second derivative Image approximation Gaussian edge
Detection Canny edge detector Subpixel location estimation Edge detector performance methods of
Evaluating performance Figure of merit Sequential methods.
Line detection.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Optics shading
Optics lens equation Image resolution Depth of Field view volume Exposure shading Image
Inductance Illumination Reflector Surface orientation shape from shading depth Stereo imaging
Cameras in arbitrary position and orientation Stereo matching Edge matching Region correlation shape
from X Range imaging structural lighting Imaging Radar.
Active vision.
9 Hours
Unit V
Dynamic vision & object recognition
Change detection Difference pictures Static segmentation and matching object recognition system
components complexity of object recognition object representation observer centered object
centered representations feature detection recognition strategies classification Matching Feature
indexing  verification Temperature matching morphological approach symbolic.
Analogical methods.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Ramesh Jain, Rangachar Kasturi and Brian G. Schunck, Machine Vision, McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. Anil K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, PHI, 2006.
225
Reference(s)
1. Gregory A Baxes, Digital Image Processing, John Wiley, 1994.
2. W.K. Pratt, Digital Image Processing, John Wiley, 2001.
11L023 CREATIVITY AND INNOVATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To make the student establish and maintain competitive advantage in the industrial environment
through making them capable of applying their innovative skills
To make them skilled in protecting their ideas through various available intellectual property
rights
Program Outcome(s)
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
j. able to demonstrate critical reasoning and problem solving abilities including the use of
simulation software for designing and troubleshooting.
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements
Course Outcome(s)
1. Identify the various perspectives of innovation.
2. Enhancement of innovative process and team building.
3. Computation of new product development.
4. Problem solving through TRIZ
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Definitions of innovation and creativity.
2. Differentiation of Innovation and invention.
3. Classification of topdown and bottomup approaches.
4. Elements of 39 contradiction matrix.
5. 40 inventive principles.
6. 76 standard solutions.
7. Case studies of TRIZ
Understand
1. Sources of innovation.
2. Conditions for successful innovation
3. Lateral thinking
4. Brain storming
5. Building of ideas
6. Model preparation
7. Testing and quality evaluation
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
226
Apply / Evaluate
1. How will you be a successful innovator?
2. How will you generate new ideas?
3. How will you launch a new product
4. How will you resolve problems using TRIZ?
5. What is the need of a proto type?
6. How will you evaluate the cost of a project?
7. How will you identify physical and technical contradictions?
Analyze
1. Knowledge Creation
2. Value Innovation & Lean Leadership
3. Simple Rules for a Complex World
4. An Agenda for the Future
Create
1. Do a brain storming to generate ideas for interactive class room teaching.
Unit I
Creativity
Concept and history of creativity, need for creativity, creative environment, stages of creativity process,
creativity and intelligence, creativity in various contexts, economic view of creativity, measuring creativity,
fostering creativity, creative problem solving brain storming and various techniques.
Lateral thinking.
9 Hours
Unit II
Innovation
Definition, creativity visvis innovation, conceptualizing innovation, types of innovation, sources of
innovation, goals of innovation, process of technological innovation, diffusion of innovation, factors
contributing to successful technological innovation, failure of innovations, innovation management.
Measures of innovation.
9 Hours
Unit III
Project Planning and Evaluation
Definition and purpose of project, collection of ideas, screening ideas, selection criteria for new projects,
development of project plan, project evaluation purpose, kinds of evaluation, stages of evaluation
process, techniques of project evaluation, project analysis.
Benefits and risks of new projects.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Product Development and Evaluation
Research and new product development process and types of new products, creative design, design of
prototype purpose, process, and types, model preparation, testing and quality evaluation; marketing
research purpose and process, types and methods;
Introducing new products, cost evaluation.
9 Hours
Unit V
Protection of Innovation
Intellectual property (IP), classes of IP industrial property and copyrights; Intellectual Property Rights
(IPR); Patents, patentability, patent acts, governing laws, history of patent laws and acts, patent
administration; patenting process patent application, patent search, prosecution, publication, examination,
opposition, grant, renewal, patent rights; international code for patents.
Patents visvis economics.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
227
Textbook(s)
1. Tom Kelly, The Art of Innovation, Doubleday, Random House Inc. USA, 2001.
2. Managing Creativity and Innovation (Harvard Business Essentials), HarvardBusinessSchool,
2003.
Reference(s)
1. Brain Twiss, Managing Technological Innovation, Pitman Publishing Ltd., 1992.
2. Harry B. Watton, New Product Planning, Prentice Hall Inc., 1992.
3. Paul Birch and Brian Clegg, Business Creativity A Guide for Managers, Kogan Page, London,
1995.
4. Leigh L. Thompson, HoonSeok Choi, Creativity and Innovation in Organizational Teams,
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, USA, 2006.
5. Paul E. Plsek, Creativity, Innovations and Quality, Irwin Professional, USA, 1997.
11L024 ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DESIGN
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To get knowledge about usage of electronic devices in Communication Engineering and Power
supplies.
Understanding the various types of power supplies and to design it
To acquire the basic knowledge of PCB and RF systems
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
Course Outcome(s)
1. To study modern Power Supplies using SCR and SMPS technology
2. To learn about signal shielding & grounding techniques and study of A/D and D/A Converters.
3. To learn knowledge about fabrication of PCBs using CAD.
4. To study RF component such as resonator, filter, transmission lines, etc
5. To learn design of RF amplifiers using transistors
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Differentiate SMPS and Linear regulators
2. State the four kurodas identities
3. State the conditions for conditional stability.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
228
4. Define grounding, guarding and shielding principles. List the types of grounding.
5. Define skin effect and skin depth with equations.
6. Define ripple, shape factor & quality factor Q and state its equation.
7. Define power gain & transducer power gain with its expression
8. Define & explain IMD with neat diagram
9. Define film master and explain the layers of photographic film
10. Define reflection coefficient, SWR, return loss with equations
Understand
1. What are the advantages of Buck converters?
2. What are the four main problems that affect digital PCBs if not properly designed?
3. Compare between forward, fly back, buck and boost converters
4. Differentiate ripple, shape factor & quality factor Q.
5. State the insertion loss with the diagram and give its expression
6. What do you mean by Bilateral design
7. Give expression for power gain & transducer power gain.
8. Why lumped element realization is difficult at microwave frequencies?
9. What is the need for sample and hold circuit?
10. What is the need for smith chart?
11. What is a transmission line?
Apply
1.
2.
3.
An ac dc converter steps down the voltage through a transformer and supplies the load through a
bridge rectifier. Design a 60 Hz power transformer of the Specifications: primary voltage
V1=120v, 60 Hz (square wave), secondary voltage output Vo= 40v and secondary output current
Io= 6.5 A. assume transformer efficiency is 95% and window factor Ku=0.4 use Ecore. Bm = 1.4,
Kj = 366, x = 0.14 and Ac = 24.2cm2.
A load impedance ZL = (30+j60) is connected to a 50 ohms transmission line of 2 cm Length
and operated at 2 GHz. use the reflection coefficient concept and find the input Impedance Zin
under the assumption that the phase velocity is 50% of the speed of light and also find the input
impedance using smith chart.
Design a band pass filter having a 0.5 dB equalripple response, with N=3.The center frequency is
1 GHz ,the bandwidth is 10% and the impedance is 50 ohms
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Design a lowpass filter fabrication using micro strip lines. The specifications are: cut off
frequency of 4 GHz, third order, impedance of 50 ohms, and a 3 dB equal ripple characteristic.
2. Design a lowpass filter whose input and output are matched to 50 ohm impedance and that meets
the following specifications: cutoff frequency of 3 GHz; equiripple of 0.5 dB; and rejection of at
least 40dBat approximately twice the cutoff frequency. Assume a dielectric material that results
in a phase velocity of 60% of the speed of light.
3. A maximally flat lowpass filter is to be designed with a cutoff frequency of 8 GHz and a
minimum attenuation of 20 dB at 11GHz.How many filter elements are required?
Create
1. Design lowpass filter fabrication using micro strip lines. The Specifications are :cutoff frequency
of 4 GHz, third order, impedance of 50 ohms and a 3 dB equalripple characteristic
2. Design a maximally flat lowpass filter with a cutoff frequency of 2GHz,impedance of 50 ohms
and at least 15dB insertion loss at 3GHz .compute and plot the amplitude and group delay for f=0
to 4 GHz, and compare with an equalripple (3 dB ripple) and linear phase filter having the same
order.
Unit I
Design of Power Supplies
DC power supply  using transistors and SCRs, Design of crowbar and fold back protection circuitsSwitched mode power supplies Forward fly back buck and boost converters.
Design of transformers and control circuits for SMPS.
9 Hours
229
Unit II
Design of Data Acquisition Systems
Low level signals Amplification Principles of Grounding Shielding and Guarding techniques A/D
converters: Dual slope, quad slope and high speed Microprocessors Compatible A/D converters,
Logarithmic A/D convertersSample and Hold circuit.
9 Hours
Unit III
RF Design Methodology
Behavior of RF passive componentsChip components and circuit board considerations Review of
transmission lines, Impedance and admittance transformation, Parallel and series connection of networksABCD and scattering parameters RF filter Basic resonator and filter configurations Butterworth and
Chebyshev filters. Implementation of micro strip filter.
Band pass filter and cascading of band pass filter elements.
9 Hours
Unit IV
RF Transistor Amplifier Design
Amplifier classes of operation and biasing networks Amplifier power gain, Unilateral design(S12 =0)
Simple input and output matching networks Bilateral design  Stability circle conditional stabilitySimultaneous conjugate matching for unconditionally stable transistors Broadband amplifiers, High power
amplifiers.
Multistage amplifiers.
9 Hours
Unit V
Design of Printed Circuit Boards
Technology of printed circuit boards (PCB), General layout rules and parameters PCB design rules for
Digital High Frequency, Analog, Power Electronics and Microwave circuits.
Computer Aided design of PCBs.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Reinhold Luduig and Pavel Bretchko, RF Circuit Design Theory and Applications, Pearson
Education, 2000.
2. Sydney Soclof, Applications of Analog Integrated Circuits, PHI, 1990.
Reference(s)
1. Walter C Bosshart, Printed circuit Boards Design and Technology, Tata McGrawHill, 1995.
2. Keith H Billings, Handbook of Switched Mode Supplies, McGrawHill, 1989.
3. Michael Jaacob, Applications and Design with Analog Integrated Circuits,PHI,2000.
4. D M Pozar, Microwave Engineering, John Wiley, 2008.
11L025 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR AND MANAGEMENT
(Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To enable the students to understand the perspectives of management.
To give an insight about the functions of management like planning, organizing, staffing, leading,
controlling.
To familiarize the students with organizational culture and help them to manage change.
Program Outcome(s)
l. an ability to demonstrate an awareness and understanding of professional, ethical, and social
responsibilities.
m. able to cultivate effective interpersonal and teamwork skills.
n. able to demonstrate written and oral communication skills.
230
Course Outcome(s)
Select the best alternative by proper Decision making.
1. Influence and moderate the work behavior of different personalities.
2. Solving complex issues by adopting proper conflict management styles.
3. Develop a conducive organizational culture.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define management.
2. List the functions of managers.
3. What do you mean by policy?
4. What is staffing?
5. State the functions of attitude.
6. What is group dynamics?
7. Differentiate Strong from Weak cultures.
8. What is the role of change agent?
Understand
1. Describe the Evaluation of management.
2. Explain patterns of management Analysis.
3. Discuss the Planning Process.
4. Explain the process of formulating career strategy of an employee.
5. Compare and contrast Maslows and Herzbergs motivation theory.
6. Describe the personality attributes influencing Organizational Behaviour.
7. Predict the problems involved in creating and sustaining an organizational culture.
8. Explain organization development intervention strategies.
Analyze / apply
1. If you were the chief executive officer of a large corporation, how would you institutionalize
ethics in the organization?
2. Formal organization is the intentional structure of roles and informal organization is a network of
personal and social relations. Comment.
3. Design a performance appraisal matrix for a production Engineer.
4. Many other disciplines have contributed to the discipline of Organizational Behaviour. Justify.
5. Validate why values are important in understanding behaviour of people.
6. High cohesiveness in a group leads to higher group productivity. Comment.
7. Construct a proforma for studying the satisfaction level of employees as influenced by the culture
of the organization.
8. Illustrate with an example, why change is an ongoing activity in an organization.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
231
Evaluate / Create
1. Develop an advertisement for The Hindu opportunity column inviting application from potential
candidates for the post of Director Information Technology.
2. Your boss has got the impression that satisfied workers are productive workers and has asked
you to study this out. In this regard.
3. Prepare a short report with your recommendations for your boss, based on your study.
Create
1. Create product and product design ideas by searching for consumer needs and screening the
various alternatives.
Unit I
Management Overview
Management  Definition, nature and purpose, Evolution of management, patterns of management
Analysis, Functions of managers, management and society  Operation in a pluralistic society, Social
responsibility of managers.
Ethics in managing
9 Hours
Unit II
Management Functions  I
Planning: Objective(s), Types, Steps, Process, policies. Organizing  Nature and purpose, Decentralization.
Staffing  Selection, performance appraisal, career strategy.
Departmentation, Line and staff
9 Hours
Unit III
Management FunctionsII
Leading  Behavioral models, Creativity and innovation. Motivation theories. Leadership  Ingredients of
Leadership, Styles. Communication. Controlling control Techniques.
Human Factor in managing
9 Hours
Unit IV
Organizational Behaviour
Meaning and importance of Organizational Behaviour, challenges and opportunities for Organizational
Behaviour, Attitudes Job satisfaction, personality and values. Perception, Groups and Teams
Conflict management.
9 Hours
Unit V
Organizational culture and Dynamics:
Organizational Culture Definition, Functions, creating and sustaining culture, creating an Ethical
Organizational culture. Organizational change forces for change, managing change, change agents,
resistance to change, approaches to managing organizational change,
Organizational Development in intervention.
9 Hours
Total : 45 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. Herold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management, Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
Reference(s)
1. Robbins, Judge, Sanghi, Organizational Behaviour, Pearson, 2009
2. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009
11L026 ROBOTICS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand the various sensing methods used in robots.
To acquire the basic knowledge of robotics and computer vision.
232
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Able to develop 4axis and 6axis robot.
2. Able to understand the different sensing elements of robot.
3. Able to design a robot for their particular applications.
4. Able to understand the concepts of kinematics.
Assessment Pattern
S.No Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. List out the types of sensors?
2. What is mean by edge detection?
3. Define connectivity?
4. What are robots?
5. What exactly does a robotics engineer do?
Understand
1. How do you use embedded system in robotics?
2. Explain the AI algorithms for path finding and decision making?
Apply
1. The reliability of a device whose time to failure is exponentially distributed is the same for
operating periods of equal length. Discuss.
2. Describe the following methods
a) Thresholding.
b) Histogram.
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Explain the Bayesian Networks.
2. Describe Vision System for pattern detection.
3. Explain the Transformation matrix and DH transformation.
Unit I
Introduction to Robotics
Motion  Potential Function, Road maps, Cell decomposition and Sensor and sensor planning. Kinematics.
Forward and Inverse Kinematics  Transformation matrix and DH transformation. Inverse Kinematics Geometric methods and Algebraic methods.
Non Holonomic constraints
9 Hours
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
233
Unit II
Computer Vision
Projection  Optics, Projection on the Image Plane and Radiometry. Image Processing  Connectivity,
ImagesGray Scale and Binary Images, Blob Filling, Thresholding, Histogram. Convolution  Digital
Convolution and Filtering and Masking Techniques. Edge Detection.
Mono and Stereo Vision.
9 Hours
Unit III
Sensors and Sensing Devices
Introduction to various types of sensor. Resistive sensors. Range sensors  Ladar (laser distance and
ranging), Sonar, Radar and Infrared. Introduction to sensing  Light sensing, Heat sensing.
Touch sensing and Position sensing.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Artificial Intelligence
Uniform Search strategies  Breadth first, Depth first, Depth limited, Iterative and deepening depth first
search and Bidirectional search. The A* algorithm . Planning  StateSpace Planning , PlanSpace
Planning, Graphplan/SatPlan and their Comparison, Multiagent planning 1, and Multiagent planning 2,
Probabilistic Reasoning  Bayesian Networks.
Decision Trees and Bayes net inference .
9 Hours
Unit V
Integration to Robot
Building of 4 axis or 6 axis robot  Vision System for pattern detection  Sensors for obstacle detection  AI
algorithms for path finding.
Decision making
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Duda, Hart and Stork, Pattern Recognition. WileyInterscience, 2000.
2. Mallot, Computational Vision: Information Processing in Perception and Visual Behavior,MIT
Press, 2000.
Reference(s)
1. Artificial IntelligenceA Modern Approach By Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, Pearson
Education Series in Artificial Intelligence, 2004
2. Fundamentals of Robotics, Analysis and control By Robert Schilling and Craig, PHI, 2003.
3. Computer Vision, A modern Approach By Forsyth and Ponce, Person Education, 2003.
11L027 CONCEPTS OF ENGINEERING DESIGN
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To know the philosophy of engineering design
To acquire basic knowledge about product design
To study about design of engineering optimization.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
c. able to develop problem solving skills and troubleshooting techniques in electronics.
d. able to design, modify, analyze and troubleshoot digital logic circuits, embedded microprocessorbased and microcontrollerbased systems, including assembly and highlevel language programs.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
234
Course Outcome(s)
1. List out few important problems arised in daytoday activities and find solution for them.
2. List out the factors to be considered for societal needs.
3. Give some examples for creativity.
4. List out the factors to be considered for ergonomics design.
5. List out the general parameters to be optimized in the design.
6. Creativity is not time bound Justify.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
10
10
0
100
25
25
20
10
10
0
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
10
10
100
Remember
1. Define engineering design.
2. Write down the steps involved in design process.
3. Define creativity.
4. What are the methods used for creative design?
5. What is brain storming?
6. What are the rules for brain storming?
7. What are the methods used for concept evaluation?
8. Why ergonomic design is more important?
9. What is simulation?
10. What are the components of PLC?
11. What is ladder diagram?
12. Write any four specifications for washing machine.
13. What is IP?
14. What is patent?
15. What are the contents of reports?
16. What are the entities comes under IP?
Understand
1. What are the importances of product design?
2. What are the considerations for a good design?
3. Why bench marking is required?
4. How creativity is useful in engineering design?
5. What are the factors to be considered while designing a product for environment?
6. Why ergonomics is important in design?
7. What do you understand from material substitution?
8. What is the importance of modeling?
9. What is stochastic model?
10. Why PLC is needed?
11. How sequencer function is helpful in PLC?
12. Why IPR is needed?
13. How IPR is helpful for business plan?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
235
Apply
1. Develop a design process methodology for the design of rectifier.
2. Develop a ergonomic methods in design of computer table with chair.
Analyze
1. Design and analyze for any electronic product using Subjective decisionmaking.
2. Develop a need analysis for new electronic product general purpose timer.
Evaluate
1. Draw ladder diagram for half adder.
2. Find as many as ides for new product design using brain storming.
Create
1. Develop a engineering design process and create a model for general purpose timer using EDA
tool
2. Develop a engineering design process and fabricate an electronic product 4 bit ALU using FPGA.
3. Develop a engineering design process and fabricate an electronic product regulated power supply.
Unit I
Engineering Design and Problem Identification
Engineering design introduction and definition, Design process, Engineering design interfaces, Principles
of Engineering Design. Problem Identification  PDS criteria, Content of a PDS.
Sample PDS, Principles and Exercises.
9 Hours
Unit II
Concept Generation and Selection
Introduction Creativity Principle, Psychological set, Inversion, Analogy, Fantasy, Technological
advances, Brainstorming, Morphological analysis, Presentation, Exercises. Concept selection  Subjective
decisionmaking, Criteria ranking, Criteria weighting, Datum method, EVAD (Design Evaluation) method,
Concept selection method,
Principles of Computer aided decision making, Exercises.
9 Hours
Unit III
Design Process
Embodiment design  Introduction, Size and strength, Scheme drawing, Form design, Provisional material
and process determination, Design for assembly and manufacture, Industrial design, Principles. Modeling Introduction, Scale models, Simulation, Principles, Exercises.
Mathematical modeling and Optimization
9 Hours
Unit IV
Design concepts for Electronic Automation
Need for electronic automation Concepts of Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)Basic Functions,
Intermediate functions, data handling functionPLC digital bit functions and applications, sequence
functions, matrix functions
Controlling a Robot with PLC and Principles and Exercises.
9 Hours
Unit V
Reports and Intellectual Property Rights
Presentation Techniques  Introduction, Concept sketches, Scheme drawing, Design report, Principles.
Intellectual Property Rights Introduction to IPneed for IPRIPR in IndiaWorld Intellectual property
Organization (WIPO) Treaties consequences and strategies of IPR in developing countries IPR in
business plan IPR servicesIPR in IT and electronic sector Introduction to Patents patentable and nonpatentable inventionsapplication typesprecautions, guidelines, filing of patents grant of patent.
Procedure in India.
9 Hours
Total:45 Hours
Text book(s)
1. Ken Hurst, Engineering Design Principles, Elsevier Science and Technology Books, 1999.
236
Reference(s)
1. Richard Birmingham, Graham Cleland, Robert Driver & David Maffin,Understanding
Engineering Design, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.
2. George E. Dieter, Engineering Design, McGraw Hill International 4th Edition 2009.
3. M.S. Peters, K.D. Timmerhaus, R.E. West, Plant Design and Economics for Chemical
Engineers, fifth edition. McGrawHill, 2003.
4. www.patentoffice.nic.in.
5. ep.espacenet.com/advanced Search.
11L028 Neural and Fuzzy Systems
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To make the students to understand Fuzzy logic and Neural Network concepts.
To equip the students with the latest application of soft computing
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
f. able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
g. able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
h. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements.
Course Outcome(s)
5. Understanding the various types of classical sets, Fuzzy sets and its properties.
6. Operation of the Fuzzy logic control systems.
7. Discuss the methods of Fuzzy rules.
8. Realizing the classical and fuzzy relation.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Explain Fuzzy Inference System (FIS)?
2. Define Membership function, fuzzy set, fuzzy ifthen Rules
3. Differentiate Fuzzy Set Vs Crisp Set
4. Explain following terms Core, Boundary, Support in term of Fuzzy Logic
5. What is a neural Network?
6. Comparison between Mamdani and Takagi Model
7. What are the basic elements of a fuzzy logic control system?
8. What does backdrop mean?
9. What is the fundamental building block of the biological neural network? Discuss
The marks secured in Test I and II will be covered 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignment. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
237
238
239
Unit II
Unsupervised Networks
Unsupervised Learning Competitive Learning Networks Kohonen self organising networks Learning
Vector Quantization Hebbian Learning Hopfield Network Content Addressable Nature Binary
Hopfield Network .
Continues Hopfield networks.
9 Hours
Unit III
Associative Memories and SOM
Bidirectional Associative Memory Principle Component Analysis. Auto associative memories Bidirectional Associative memory (BAM)  Self Organization Maps (SOM)
ART1.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Fuzzy Logic
Fuzzy sets  Fuzzy Rules: Extension Principle, fuzzy measures  fuzzy relations  fuzzy functions.
Fuzzy Reasoning
9 Hours
Unit V
Fuzzy Systems and Applications
Representation of fuzzy knowledge  fuzzy inference systems Mamdani Model Sugeno Model
Tsukamoto Model Fuzzy decision making Multi Objective Decision Making Fuzzy Classification
Fuzzy Control Methods.
Application.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. C T Jang, J S R Sun and E Mizutani , Neuro Fuzzy and Soft computing, Pearson Education ,2004
2. David E Goldberg,Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization, and Machine Learning,Pearson
Education, 1996.
Reference(s)
1. Laurene Fauseett: Fundamentals of Neural Networks, PHI,1994
2. Timothy J.Ross: Fuzzy Logic Engineering Applications, McGrawHill,
1997.
3. S.Rajasekaran and G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai Neural networks,Fuzzy logics,and Geneticalgorithms,
PHI,2003
4. George J.Klir and Bo Yuan,Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic, PHI ,1995
11L029 RFID and Biometrics
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand the principle of RF ID
To know the different modes in RF ID
To understand the problems in the data transmission
Program Outcome(s)
c. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
i.
able to design, analyze, troubleshoot and repair analog and digital communication systems.
j.
able to identify, formulate, and solve electronics and communication engineering problems.
k. able to apply engineering tools and techniques to conduct engineering design/experiments as
well as to analyze and interpret data
k. able to design an electronics & communication system that meets desired specifications and
requirements
Course Outcome(s)
1. able to gain knowledge about RFID technology
2. able to understand the operation modes of RFID
Semester End
Examination
10
30
20
10
10
20
100
The marks are secured in Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted
to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment
will be calculated for 50 marks
240
Apply
1. Apply Radio Frequency identification using contact less method
2. Give some Uses of Barcodes .
3. Illustrate the concepts behind Data Transmission
4. Demonstrate the Facial Scan operations
5. Illustrate the Failure to enroll rate.
6. Illustrate the Features of Finger Scan .
7. Explainn the Retinal scan features
8. Illustrates keystroke scans.
9. Demonstrate privacy sympathetic biometric systems
10. Demonstrate the utility of Biometric middleware
11. Illustrate various types of Scans in Biometrics.
Analyze / Evaluate
7. Compare the Semipassive and ActiveTransponders .
8. In what way the RFID differ from Barcodes ?
9. What is Retinal scan?
10. How is Bio API , BAPI obtained?
11. Compare Facial scan, Finger Scan and Hand Scan.
12. Construct the components of Retinal Scan.
Create
1. Construct the Signature Scan.
2. Comparison of privacy factor in different biometrics technologies.
Unit I
Introduction to RFID
Definitions and Vocabulary, History,Frequencies and their Classification, RFID vs.
Barcodes,Fundamentals of RFIDRFID Tags,Passive Transponders,Passive RFID Coupling, Active
Transponder,Semipassive Transponders,Middleware,Radio Frequency (or Contact less) Identification and
its range of applications
9 Hours
Unit II
Communication and Operating Modes in RFID
Contact less Communication Concepts,Elements of RFID,Energy Transfer and Communication Modes,
Forward Link and Return Link,Data Communications, Principle of Communication, Concept of Operating
Modes, General Operating modes,Problems in Data Transmission, Problems Relating to Long Distance
RFID Systems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Introduction to Biometrics
Introduction ,Benefits of biometric security ,Verification and identification ,Basic working of biometric
matching , Accuracy ,False match rate ,False nonmatch rate , Failure to enroll rate, Derived metrics ,
Layered biometric solutions.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Finger Scan and Facial Scan
Finger scan ,Features ,Components Operation Competing finger Scan technologies Strength and
weakness. Types of algorithms used for interpretation. Facial Scan  Features Components Operation
Competing facial Scan technologies Strength and weakness.
9 Hours
Unit V
Iris Scan, Voice scan
Features , Components , Operation,Competing iris Scan and voice scan technologies Strength and
weakness. Other physiological biometrics ,Hand scan ,Retinal scan, Behavioral Biometrics ,Signature scankeystroke scan, Biometrics Application ,Biometric Solution Matrix ,Bio privacy ,Comparison of privacy
241
factor in different biometrics technologies ,Designing privacy sympathetic biometric systems. Biometric
standards  (BioAPI , BAPI) ,Biometric middleware.
9 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. Samir Nanavati,Michael Thieme, Raj Nanavati, Biometrics  Identity Verification in a Networked
World, Khanna Publications , WILEY Dream Tech,2002.
2. DomaniqueParet, RFID At Ultra And Super High Frequencies Theory And Application,Wiley
Publications, 2009
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on nanoscience and technology.
To create an awareness on the nanomaterials.
At the end of the course the students are familiar with nanomaterials and their applications.
Program Outcome
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Making to learn properties of nanomaterials metals.
2. Study the different types of techniques used to develop the nanomaterials.
3. Understanding the various applications of nanomaterials in daytoday life.
4. Utilization of nanomaterials into medical and industries to develop technology.
Assessment Pattern
Model
BloomsTaxonomy
Semester End
S.No
Test I Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define nanoscale.
2. Give the differences between nano and thin materials.
3. Give the usage of nanomaterials in medical field.
4. What are the techniques used to find properties of materials?
5. What are the daytoday life applications of nanomaterials?
6. What do you mean by total energy of the system?
7. What do you mean by top down and bottom up approach?
8. How physical properties vary while converting the material into nano size?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
242
243
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Templating method is better than physical vapor deposition method to synthesis nanomaterials.
Why?
Why ordering of the nano system is more important? Give reason.
Explain how nanomaterials are characterized by imaging techniques?
Why diffraction techniques are used to characterize the nanomaterials?
Explain how nanomaterials are analyzed by transmission electron microscope?
Clarify the differences between selfassembly and selforganization.
Explain how organic light emitting diode overcomes the drawback of LCD?
How we can use CNT as a storage device in battery?
Why nanomaterials are used in optical memory devices?
How we can store nano particles?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Unit I
Nano Scale Materials
Introductionclassification of nanostructures, nanoscale architecture effects of the nanometer length
scale changes to the system total energy, changes to the system structures effect of nanoscale
dimensions on various properties structural, thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and
electronic properties.
Differences between bulk and nanomaterials and their physical properties.
9 Hours
Unit II
Nanomaterials Synthesis Methods
Fabrication methods top down processes milling, litho graphics, machining process bottomup
process vapor phase deposition methods, plasmaassisted deposition process, colloidal and solgel
methods methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials ordering of nanosystems, selfassembly
and selforganization.
Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit III
Nano Characterization Techniques
General classification of characterization methods analytical and imaging techniques microscopy
techniques  electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, atomic
force microscopy diffraction techniques spectroscopy techniquesXray spectroscopy.
Electrical properties of nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Inorganic Semiconductor Nanostructures
Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures  quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum dots,
super lattices fabrication techniques requirements, epitaxial growth, lithography and etching,
electrostatically induced dots and wires, quantum well width fluctuations, thermally annealed quantum
wells and selfassembly techniques .
Quantum efficiency of semiconductor nanomaterials.
9 Hours
244
Unit V
Nanodevices And Applications
Organic FET principle, description, requirements, integrated circuits organic LEDs basic processes,
carrier injection, excitons, optimization  organic photovoltaic cells carbon nano tubes structure, synthesis
and electronic properties applications fuel cells nano motors bio nano particlesnano objects.
Applications of nano materials in biological field.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John
Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2005.
2. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw
Hill Education (India) Ltd, 2007.
3. Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology, Kluwer publishers, 2002.
4. B. Wang, Drug Delivery: Principles and Applications,Wiley Interscience 2005.
Reference(s)
1. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nanostructuring
Techniques, WileyVCH Verlag GmbH & Co.2004.
2. William Goddard, Donald .W.Brenner, Handbook of Nano Science Engineering and Technology,
CRC Press, 2004.
3. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, 2004.
4. Charles P Poole, Frank J Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.
5. Mark Ratner, Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea, Prentice
Hall, 2003.
11O0PB LASER TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on laser principles.
To create expertise on the applications of laser in various engineering fields.
At the end of the course the students are familiar with generation and applications of laser in
various engineering fields.
Program Outcome
a.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
245
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
20
25
20
20
15
100
Semester End
Examination
20
25
20
20
15
100
Remember
1. What is a laser? How the basic laser action is achieved?
2. Distinguish between spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3. What is population inversion?
4. Mention the important characteristics of laser.
5. How four level laser is more efficient than the three level laser?
6. What is a resonant cavity?
7. What role does an optical resonant cavity play in a laser?
8. What are the host materials for solid lasers?
9. Mention the different techniques involved in lasers.
10. Define atmospheric effect.
11. How will you measure the distance using laser?
12. What is the basic principle behind the holography?
13. Mention the medical applications of lasers.
Understand
1. Write the conditions needed for laser action.
2. What is meant by pumping of atoms?
3. How optical excitation occurs in three level lasers?
4. What is the principle of laser action?
5. Compare the activator and host materials for solid lasers.
6. Distinguish between Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques.
7. How will you determine the velocity of laser source?
8. List the applications of laser in welding and cutting.
9. Why laser is called as nonmaterial knife?
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The first line of the principal series of sodium is the D line at 580 nm. This corresponds to a
transition from the first excited state (3p) to the ground state (3s). What is the energy in electron
volts of the first excited state?
What is the ratio of the stimulated emission and spontaneous emission at a temperature of 250 oC
for the sodium D line?
Calculate the threshold condition for the ruby laser in which the appropriate parameters are as
follows: o =4.3x 1014 Hz; o=1.5x1011 Hz; no= 1.76; sp= 4.3x103 s; photon=6x109s.
A HeNe laser emits light at a wavelength of 632.8 nm and has an output power of 2.3mW. How
many photons are emitted in each minute by this laser when operating?
Calculate the wavelength of emission from a GaAs semiconductor laser whose band gap energy is
1.44 eV.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
246
Analyze
1. Why laser beam should be monochromatic?
2. How the population inversion happening in lasers?
3. Write the reaction for excimer laser action.
4. Which method is used to achieve population inversion in a dye laser?
5. Why we cannot use ordinary light source for LIDAR?
6. How the optical disk data storage plays a vital role in computer memory storages?
Evaluate
1. The life time of the excited state (2p) for spontaneous emission is 1.6x 109s. The energy
difference between the excited state (2p) and the ground state (2s) is 10.2eV. Find the value of
stimulated emission coefficient during a transition from an excited state (2p) to the ground state.
2. A laser beam can be focused on an area equal to the square of its wavelength (2). For a HeNe
laser, = 6328. If the laser radiates energy at the rate of 1mW, find the intensity of the focused
beam.
3. Transition occurs between a metastable state E3 and an energy state E2 just above the ground state.
If emission is at 1.1m and E2= 0.4x1019J, find the energy of the E3 state.
Unit I
Laser Fundamentals
Introduction  principle  spontaneous emission  stimulated emission  population inversionPumping
mechanisms  characteristics. Types of lasers principle, construction, working, energy level diagram and
applications of dye laser chemical laser excimer laser.
Laser action.
9 Hours
Unit II
Threshold Condition
Einstein coefficients A and B spontaneous life time light amplification principle of laser action laser
oscillations resonant cavity modes of a laser.
Conditions involved in laser production.
9 Hours
Unit III
Laser Materials
Activator and host materials for solid lasers  growth techniques for solid laser materials  Bridgman and
StockBerger technique advantages and disadvantages  Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques
merits and demerits.
Techniques of producing laser.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Laser in Science
Introduction harmonic generation stimulated raman emission self focusing laser and ether drift
rotation of the earth photon statistics.
Applications of Laser in ranging.
9 Hours
Unit V
Laser in Industry
Introduction Applications in material processing: laser welding hole drilling laser cutting laser
tracking Lidar laser in medicine.
Applications of Laser in sensors.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. K.Thiyagarajan and A.K.Ghatak, LASER:Theory and applications. Macmillan India Limited,
2000.
2. M. N. Avadhanulu, An Introduction To Lasers Theory And Applications, S. Chand Publisher,
2001.
247
Reference(s)
1. K.P.R.Nair, Atoms, Molecules and Lasers, Narosa Publishing House, 2009.
2. K. R. Nambiar ,Lasers: Principles Types And Applications , New Age International Publications,
2006.
3. Alphan Sennaroglu, SolidState Lasers and Applications, CRC Press, 2006
4. Bela A Lengyel, Introduction to Laser Physics, John Wiley and Sons, 1966.
11O0PC ELECTRO OPTIC MATERIALS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on electrooptic materials.
To develop fundamental understanding of various electrooptic materials in communication.
Program Outcome
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understanding the mechanism involved in the laser action.
2. Knowing the birefringence and optical property of the material.
3. Realize the special optical properties of the system.
Assessment Pattern
Model
Blooms Taxonomy
Semester End
S.No
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
Understand
2
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
248
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare ordinary and laser light properties.
2. Differentiate wave refractive index and ray refractive index.
3. Differentiate longitudinal and transverse electro optic effects.
4. Bring out the importance of electro optic devices.
Unit I
Basics of Lasers
Introduction Einstein coefficients laser beam characteristics spontaneous and stimulated emission
population inversion  light amplification threshold condition laser rate equations two level laser
three level laser mode selection transverse mode longitudinal mode.
Spatial and temporal coherence.
9 Hours
Unit II
Wave Propagation in Anisotropic Media
Introduction double refraction polarization devices  Nicol prism GlanThomson prism retardation
plates Soleil Babinet compensator Plane waves in anisotropic media wave refractive index  ray
refractive index  ray velocity surface index ellipsoid.
Optical activity.
9 Hours
Unit III
Electro Optic Effect
Introduction KDP crystals longitudinal mode phase modulation amplitude modulation transverse
mode. Acoustooptic effect small Bragg angle diffraction large Bragg angle diffraction codirectional
coupling contradirectional coupling  applications.
Modulators.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Non Linear Optics
Introduction self focusing phenomenon second harmonic generation phase matching birefringent
phase matching quasi phase matching frequency mixing. Semiconductors measurement of third order
optical nonlinearities in semiconductors.
Frequency doubling nature of materials.
9 Hours
Unit V
Electro Optic Devices
Introduction light emitting diode direct and indirect band gap materials homo junction hetero
junction advantages disadvantages applications. Injection laser diode characteristics advantages
disadvantages. Liquid crystal displays dynamic scattering field effect advantages disadvantages.
Optoelectronic devices.
9 Hours
Total 45 Hours
249
Textbook(s)
1. Ajoy Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Optical electronics, Cambridge University Press, 7th reprint
2006.
2. B. Somanathan Nair, Electronic devices and applications, Prentice  Hall of India private limited,
2010.
3. Frank L. Pedrotti, S. J. Leno S. Pedrotti and Leno M. Pedrotti, Introduction to optics, Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. Ji  ping Huang and K.M.Yu, New Non Linear Optical Materials, Nova, Science Publishers, 2007.
2. J .D. Wright, Molecular crystals, Cambridge university press, 2nd edition, 1995.
3. R .W. Munn (Ed) and C. N. Ironsid, Molecular crystals, Blackie Academic & Professional,
Glassgow,1993.
11O0PD VACUUM SCIENCE AND DEPOSITION TECHNIQUES
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart a sound knowledge on the vacuum science.
To develop the necessary background to perform projects involving vacuum and deposition
techniques.
At the end of the course the students are familiar with the various vacuum deposition technologies
employed in the various engineering fields.
Program Outcome
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understanding the fundamentals of vacuum technology.
2. Understanding the various measuring instruments of vacuum.
3. Utilization of various components to create high vacuum.
4. Utilization of various components to measure the vacuum
5. Solution for the problems connected with high vacuum.
Assessment Pattern
Model
Blooms Taxonomy
S.No
Test 1
Test 2
(New Version)
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
Create
6
Total
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define the term mean free path.
2. Give the pressure ranges of low and medium vacuum.
3. State Avogadros law.
4. List out the assumptions of kinetic theory.
Semester End
Examination
20
25
20
20
15
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
250
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Understand
1. How will you measure the pumping speed in a vacuum unit?
2. How will you seal the substance outside to maintain high vacuum?
3. Why does constant volume method have the disadvantage in measuring the pumping speed?
4. Differentiate between the pirani gauge and penning gauge.
5. Differentiate the primary gauges from secondary gauges.
6. How is the pumping speed measured?
7. How does a rotary pump produce a low pressure?
8. Derive the relation between the effective pumping speed and conductance of the evacuation pipe.
9. Explain the designing of UHV evacuation systems.
10. How are the vacuum surfaces cleaned?
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
How will you deposit the material from the plasma etching method?
Why is cold cathode ionization gauges preferred to hot cathode gauges?
Explain the applications of turbomolecular pump.
A vacuum chamber has a volume of 100 litres and an operating gas load of 7.5 x 10 5 torrlites/sec.
The desired operating pressure is 7.5 x 108 Torr. Connections between the chamber and diffusion
pump and the diffusion pump and rotary pump are to meet good design practice (assume
SE/SD=1/5). Calculate the pumping speed at the chamber, the minimum connecting pipe
conductance and the minimum speed required for the backing pump together with the minimum
diffusion pump speed required to meet these requirements.
5. Surface to volume ratio plays a major role in pumping systems. Why?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Why is the diffusion pump widely used in scientific instruments?
2. Oil diffusion pump system can be used as a high vacuum pumping system. Why?
3. Compare real and virtual leaks.
Unit I
Vacuum Systems
Introduction units of vacuum kinetic aspects of gases in a vacuum chamber physical parameters at
low pressures classification of vacuum ranges gas flow at low pressures throughput and pumping
speed flow rate and conductance.
Evacuation rate out gassing gas flow turbulent flow.
9 Hours
Unit II
Production of Vacuum
Classification of vacuum pumps rotary vane pumps roots blowers diffusion pumps molecular drag
and turbomolecular pumps sorption pumps gettering and ion pumping cryopumping measurement of
pumping speed.
Noble pumps for inert gases.
9 Hours
251
Unit III
Pressure Measurement
Classification of gauges mechanical gauges McLeod gauge thermal conductivity gauges Hot
cathode ionization gauges Bayard  Alpert gauge cold cathode ionization gauges Penning gauge
magnetron gauge.
Measurement problems in partial pressure analysis.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Vacuum Materials and Leak Detection
Sources of gases and vapours materials for vacuum system vacuum seals vacuum valves traps and
baffles leak detection pressure test sparkcoil test leak testing using vacuum gauges halogen leak
detector massspectrometric leak detector.
Special design considerations glass to metal seals high voltage metal feedthrough.
9 Hours
Unit V
Applications of Vacuum Systems
Design considerations vacuum system for surface analysis space simulators vacuum
based coating units for thin film deposition thermal evaporation sputtering process chemical vapor
deposition  metallurgical applications.
Plasma etching pulsed vapour deposition PE chemical vapour deposition.
9 Hours
Total 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Rao V.V, Ghosh T.B, Chopra K.L, Vacuum science and technology, Allied Publishers Limited,
2005.
2. Dorothy M. Hoffman, John H. Thomas, Bawa Singh, Handbook of Vacuum science and
technology, Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 1997.
Reference(s)
1. 1.David M. Hata, Introduction to vacuum technology, Pearson Printice Hall, 2007.
2. 2.John F. O'Hanlon, A users guide to vacuum technology, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
3. 3.Chambers.A, Modern vacuum physics, Chapman & Hall, CRC Press, 2005.
11O0PE SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS AND DEVICES
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To improve knowledge on semiconducting materials.
To develop the necessary understanding of semiconducting materials and their applications.
At the end of the course the students are familiar with various semiconducting materials and their
applications
Program Outcome
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understanding the mechanism involved in the semiconductors.
2. Knowing the current components and current gain of the material.
3. Implementing the above phenomenon for transistors.
4. Realize the special properties of the semiconductors.
252
Assessment Pattern
Model
Blooms Taxonomy
Semester End
S.No
Test I Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
Remember
1
25
25
20
20
Understand
2
25
25
25
25
Apply
3
20
20
20
20
Analyze
4
20
20
20
20
Evaluate
5
10
10
15
15
Create
6
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What properties are desirable in semiconductors?
2. Explain the KronigPenny model.
3. Define drift current density.
4. What is meant by breakdown?
5. Explain the minority carrier distribution in pn junction diode.
6. Define temperature effect.
7. What is the basic principle of bipolar junction transistor?
8. Define current crowding.
9. What are optoelectronic devices?
10. Describe the operation of a laser diode.
Understand
1. How does conductivity of a semiconductor change with rise in its temperature?
2. How does the thickness of the depletion layer in a pn junction vary with increase in reverse bias?
3. How does the energy gap in an intrinsic semiconductor vary, when doped with a pentavalent
impurity?
4. Explain the mobility effects on carrier density.
5. What do you understand by the term holes in a semiconductor? Explain how they move under
the influence of electric field.
6. What is the a.c response of the pn diode?
7. How is the solar cell functioning?
Apply
1. In general what is the relation between density of states and energy?
2. What is meant by the term, doping of an intrinsic semiconductor?
3. Give the ratio of the number of holes and the number of conduction electrons in an intrinsic
semiconductor.
4. Write the function of base region of a bipolar junction transistor.
5. Sketch the energy bands of a forwardbiased degenerately doped pn junction and indicate how
population inversion occurs.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. What types of chargecarriers are there in a ntype semiconductor?
2. What are the disadvantages of using laser diode?
3. What are the defect levels in semiconductors?
4. Consider an optical cavity. If N>>1, show that the wavelength separation between two adjacent
resonant modes is =2/2L.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
253
Unit I
Properties of Semiconductor
Energy bands allowed and forbidden energy bands Kronig Penny model electrical conductivity in
solids based on energy bands  band model electron effective mass concept of holes in semiconductor
density of states extension to semiconductors.
kspace diagram.
9 Hours
Unit II
Carrier Transport Properties
Carrier drift drift current density mobility effects on carrier density conductivity in semiconductor
carrier transport by diffusion diffusion current density total current density breakdown phenomena
avalanche breakdown.
Graded Impurity Distribution.
9 Hours
Unit III
PN Junction Diode
Qualitative description of charge flow in pn junction boundary condition minority carrier distribution
ideal pn junction current temperature effects applications the turn on transient and turn off transient.
Charge storage and diode Transients.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Bipolar Junction Transistor
Introduction to basic principle of operation the modes of operation amplification minority carrier
distribution in forward active mode nonideal effects base with modulation high injection emitter
band gap narrowing current clouding breakdown voltage voltage in open emitter configuration and
open base configuration
Frequency Limitations.
9 Hours
Unit V
Opto Electronic Devices
Optical absorption in a semiconductor, photon absorption coefficient electron hole pair generation  solar
cell homo junction and hetero junction  Photo transistor laser diode, the optical cavity, optical
absorption, loss and gain  threshold current.
Photoluminescence and Electroluminescence.
9 Hours
Total 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Donald A Neamen, Semiconductor physics and devices, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
2. Albert Malvino,David J Bafes, Electronic Principles, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
Reference(s)
1. Kevin F Brennan, The Physics of Semiconductors, Cambridge University Press, 1999.
2. Micheal Shur, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Prentice Hall of India, 1999.
3. Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics Physics and Technology, McGraw Hill Co., 1998.
11O0YA
CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES
POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND PROCESSING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of polymer science, chemistry of
polymers and its processing.
To make understand the principles and applications of advanced polymer materials.
Knowledge and application of different polymers and its processing.
254
Program Outcome
a.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understanding the various types of polymers and its industrial application.
2. Compute the efficiency of polymer materials.
3. Development of ecofriendly materials.
4. Realize the advantages of nano composites polymers.
Assessment pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
20
20
30
20
10
100
20
20
30
20
10
100
10
20
30
20
20
100
10
20
30
20
20
100
Remember
1. Define polymer and degree of polymerization.
2. What is functionality of a polymer? Give example.
3. What is the nomenclature of a polymer?
4. Discuss the addition and chain growth polymerization with example.
5. What is copolymerization? What are the different types of copolymers?
6. Write the mechanism of addition polymerization.
7. Explain briefly the various constituents of a plastic, with example.
8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics.
9. List the various additives in processing of plastics. What are their functions?
10. Explain homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization.
11. Write the differences between melt and interfacial polycondensation.
12. Briefly explain about emulsion polymerization.
13. Explain compression and extrusion moulding of plastics with diagram.
14. What is extrusion and injection moulding? Discuss with diagram.
15. Name any four compounding ingredients of plastics. Write their functions with example.
16. What is calendaring?
17. Write short account on reinforced plastics.
18. Outline the method of lubrication of plastic material.
19. Explain about crosslinking and blowing agents with examples.
20. Write an account of flame retardant polymers.
21. Write short notes on melt, dry and wet spinning process.
22. Give the classification of foaming polymers with examples.
23. Explain with examples the relationship between structure and properties of polymers.
24. Describe about coordination and ring opening polymerization.
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted
to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment
will be calculated for 50 marks.
255
Understand
1. Write the important of plasticizers and UV stabilizers?
2. Compare addition and condensation polymerization reaction with example for each type .
3. Give the classification of foaming polymers with examples.
4. Suggest different types of additives for preparing reinforced polymers?
5. What are the different types of polymeric resins?
6. Give the significances of antioxidants and antiozonants additives.
7. What are the functions of ingredients of polymers?
8. List the importance of cross linkers.
Apply
1. How polymers are classified based on source and application?
2. What are the polymers that can be calendared into sheets?
3. Give examples for thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers.
4. What are the polymers suited for compression and injection moulding?
5. What are the articles produced by blow moulding?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. What are the polymers suitable for insulations?
2. Write the special properties of teflon?
3. How the vinyl chloride is converted into polymer?
4. How nylon 6 is prepared?
5. What is the process involved in manufacturing cellophane sheets?
6. What are the different zones involved in simple extrusion polymer process?
7. Bring out the differences between thermoforming and vacuumforming process?
Unit I
Principles of Polymer Science
Polymerization reactions  types examples  degree of polymerization and average molecular weights.
Thermoplastics and thermosetting resins  examples. Electrical  mechanical  thermal properties related to
chemical structure. Insulating materials  polymer alloys  composites.
Importance of glass transition temperature.
9 Hours
Unit II
Polymerization Mechanism
Addition polymerization  free radical mechanism  cationic and anionic polymerization  copolymerization
 condensation polymerization nylon 6,6, ring opening polymerization nylon 6, coordination
polymerization . Preparation, properties and industrial applications of polystyrene and bakelite.
Application of industrial polymers.
9 Hours
Unit III
Polymerization Techniques
Homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization bulk polymerization PMMA,PVC, solution
polymerization  polyacrylic acid, suspension polymerizationpreparation of ion exchange resins, emulsion
polymerizationsynthetic rubber. Melt solution and interfacial polycondensation. Salient features,
advantages and disadvantages of bulk and emulsion polymerization.
Preparation of biodegradable polymers.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Additives for Polymers
Moulding constituentsfillers, plasticizers, lubricants, antiaging additives, antioxidants, antiozonants, UV
stabilizers, flame retardants, colorants, blow agents, crosslinking agents functionssignificance with
suitable examples and applications in industrial processing.
Ecofriendly sustainable additives.
9 Hours
256
Unit V
Polymer Processing
Compression injection  extrusion and blow mouldings. Film casting  calendering. Thermoforming and
vacuum formed polystyrene, foamed polyurethanes. Fibre spinning  melt, dry and wet spinning.
Composite fabrication  handlayup  filament winding and pultrusion.
Application of fibre reinforced plastics.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. V. R. Gowarikar, N. V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age
International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
2. Joel R. Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall of India (P). Ltd., 2005.
Refernce(s)
1. F. W. Billmeyer, Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007.
2. Barbara H. Stuart, Polymer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2002.
3. George Odian , Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2004.
4. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, Nelson Thornes Ltd., 2002.
11O0YB ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL CELLS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To make students understand the concept and working of different types of batteries and to
analyze batteries used in electric vehicles.
To make students learn about the concept of fuel cells, its types and to relate the factors of energy
and environment.
Students develop the skill of analyzing various energy storing devices and fuel cells at the end of
the semester.
Program Outcome
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome
1. Understanding the various types of cells and energy storage devices.
2. Compute the efficiency of cells.
3. Development of ecofriendly energy sources.
4. Realize the advantages of energy storage and fuel cells.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
20
20
30
20
10
100
20
20
30
20
10
100
10
20
30
20
20
100
10
20
30
20
20
100
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted
to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment
will be calculated for 50 marks.
257
Remember
1. What are dry cells?
2. What are alkaline batteries?
3. State Ohms law.
4. Write the functions of ultracapacitor.
5. Is lead acid battery thermodynamically reversible cell?
6. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells.
7. Name the electrolyte present in the Li battery.
8. Mention the role of heart pacemaker in cardiology.
9. Classify the types of fuel cell.
10. Differentiate between diode and electrode.
11. What is meant by redox reaction?
12. What are the advantages of H2O2 fuel cell?
13. Name the factors which are affecting the efficiency of fuel cell.
14. What are ecofriendly cell?
Understand
1. How do you assess the life cycle of fuel cells?
2. What is the role of impurities in photovoltaic cells?
3. How do you convert the chemical energy into electrical energy?
4. Suggest any two secondary storage devices for automobiles.
5. What types of cells are used in space applications?
6. Construct the alkaline fuel cell.
7. How do you harvest the energy from tides?
8. What are natural geysers?
9. Differentiate between photo electrochemical and photovoltaic cells.
Apply
1. What are passive solar heat collectors?
2. What are active solar heat collectors?
3. Lithium battery is the cell of future  Justify.
4. Write the anodic reaction and cathodic reactions of NICAD battery.
5. Is the dry cell follows thermodynamic reversibility rule?
6. What types of vehicles typically use methanol?
7. What are the economic impacts of using hybrid electric vehicles?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. How does a fuel cell differ from traditional methods of energy generation (like batteries)?
2. What are the feedstocks can be used to make biodiesel?
3. What is DuPonts experience in fuel cells?
4. How the biomass is converted into biofuel?
5. What are the effects of gasoline and ethanol emissions on the environment?
6. What are the effects of diesel and biodiesel emissions on the environment?
7. How do you obtain ethanol from lignocellulosic biomass?
8. What is meant by green technology?
Unit I
Batteries
Characteristics  voltage, current, capacity, electricity storage density, power, discharge rate, cycle life,
energy efficiency, shelf life. Primary batteries zinccarbon, magnesium, alkaline, manganous dioxide,
mercuric oxide, silver oxide batteriesRecycling/Safe disposal of used cells.
Document the various batteries and its characteristics used in mobile phones and lap tops.
9 Hours
Unit II
Batteries for Electric Vehicles
Secondary batteries Introduction, cell reactions, cell representations and applications lead acid, nickelcadmium and lithium ion batteries  rechargeable zinc alkaline battery. Reserve batteries: Zincsilver oxide,
lithium anode cell, photogalvanic cells. Battery specifications for cars and automobiles.
9 Hours
Development of batteries for satellites.
258
Unit III
Types of Fuel Cells
Importance and classification of fuel cells  description, working principle, components, applications and
environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid, solid oxide,
molten carbonate and direct methanol fuel cells.
Fuel cells for space applications.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Hydrogen as a Fuel
Sources of hydrogen production of hydrogen electrolysis photocatalytic water splitting biomass
pyrolysis gas clean up methods of hydrogen storage high pressurized gas liquid hydrogen type metal
hydride hydrogen as engine fuel features, application of hydrogen technologies in the futurelimitations.
Cryogenic fuels.
9 Hours
Unit V
Energy and Environment
Future prospectsrenewable energy and efficiency of renewable fuels economy of hydrogen energy life
cycle assessment of fuel cell systems. Solar Cells: Energy conversion devices, photovoltaic and
photoelectrochemical cells photobiochemical conversion cell.
Biofuels from natural resources.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan, Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications, University Press,
India, 2006.
2. F. Barbir, PEM fuel cells: Theory and practice,Elsevier, Burlington, MA, 2005.
3. M. R. Dell Ronald and A. J. David, Understanding Batteries, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001.
Reference(s)
1. M. A. Christopher Brett, Electrochemistry: Principles, Methods and Applications, Oxford
University, 2004.
2. J. S. Newman and K. E. ThomasAlyea, Electrochemical Systems, Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2004.
3. G. Hoogers, Fuel Cell Handbook, CRC, Boca Raton, FL, 2003.
4. Lindon David, Handbook of Batteries, McGraw Hill, 2002.
5. H. A. Kiehne , Battery Technology Hand Book,. Expert Verlag , Renningen Malsheim, 2003.
11O0YC CHEMISTRY OF NANOMATERIALS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of nanochemistry including synthesis.
To make students understand the principles and applications of nanomaterials.
Knowledge about the characterization and applications of nanomaterials.
Program Outcome
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome
1. Understanding the various methods of synthesis and characterization techniques of nanomaterials.
2. Compute new preparation methodologies.
3. Utilization of nanomaterials in various emerging fields.
4. Realize the importance of nanoscience and its applications in day to day life.
259
Assessment Pattern
Model
Blooms Taxonomy
Semester End
S.No
Test I Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
20
20
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What do you mean by nano?
2. Define nanotechnology.
3. Define nanoscience.
4. Define top down and bottom up approach.
5. Define nanostructured material. Classify nanomaterials and give examples for them.
6. List any four day to day commercial applications of nanotechnology.
7. Write down any four challenges that are faced by researchers in nanotechnology.
8. Define carbon nanotube.
9. Define bucky ball.
10. Define nanocomposite. What are the types of nanocomposites?
11. List any four material characterization techniques.
12. List any four bottom up approaches for the synthesis of nanopowders.
13. What is biomimetic approach?
14. Explain Feynmans statement.
15. What is the dimension of quantum dot?
16. Explain the principle behind lithography.
17. Mention the different types of lithography.
18. What is meant by photolithography?
19. Explain the principle behind vapour phase deposition.
20. What is meant by chemical vapour deposition?
21. Explain sputtering.
22. What is meant by plasma enhanced CVD?
23. What is meant by bubblers?
24. Explain the principle behind MOVPE.
25. What are colloids?
26. What is nanosafety?
27. What is meant by surface induced effect?
28. How are nanomaterials defined?
29. What are the uses of nanoparticles in consumer products?
Understand
1. What is the difference between nanoscience and nanotechnology?
2. When and where Feynman delivered his lecture on nanotechnology and what is the name of his
classical lecture?
3. What are the induced effects due to increase in surface area of nanoparticles?
4. What are the advantages and disadvantages in mechanical synthesis of nanopowders?
5. What are the characteristics of nanoparticles that should be possesed by any fabrication technique?
6. On what principle mechanical milling is based on?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
260
261
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge about the various types of corrosion and its mechanism.
To make students understand the various methods of corrosion control, corrosion testing and
monitoring.
Students acquire the basic knowledge about corrosion and its control.
Program Outcome(s)
a. able to demonstrate basic competence in electronics and communication engineering design
and analysis using applications of mathematics, physics and engineering principles.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understand why corrosion related problems are complex and interrelated in the engineering field.
2. Compare the mechanism of dry corrosion and electrochemical corrosion to support corrosion
minimizing techniques in metals and its alloys.
3. Characterize and analyze different forms of corrosion and its study techniques.
4. Classify and understand about the relationship between corrosion and its environment.
262
Assessment Pattern
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blooms Taxonomy
(New Version)
Remember
Understand
Apply
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Total
Test I
Test II
25
25
20
20
10
100
25
25
20
20
10
100
Model
Examination
15
25
20
20
20
100
Semester End
Examination
15
25
20
20
20
100
Remember
1. What is corrosion?
2. What are the types of corrosion?
3. Define dry corrosion. Explain the mechanism.
4. Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion.
5. What are the units to measure corrosion rate?
6. Galvanic corrosion. Discuss.
7. Describe the Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their limitations.
8. List out the different forms of corrosion. Explain.
9. What are inhibitors?
10. Explain the mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation and its types.
11. Write the working principle of Tafel polarization techniques.
12. How polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products?
13. Define cathodic protection. List its types.
14. What are nonelectrochemical and electrochemical methods of corrosion testing and monitoring?
15. What is Tafel linear polarization?
Understand
1. Explain why corrosion rate of metal is faster in aqueous solution than atmosphere air?
2. What are the factors influencing the corrosion rate? Explain.
3. Discuss the PillingBedworth rule.
4. Differentiate between electrochemical and dry corrosion.
5. How inhibitors are used to protect the corrosion rate of the metal? Explain.
6. What are consequences of PillingBedworth ratio?
7. List the difference between filliform corrosion and pitting corrosion.
Apply
1. Compare the effects of corrosion products.
2. Why pitting corrosion is localized corrosion? Explain.
3. Describe alternatives to protective coatings.
4. Identify different forms of corrosion in the metal surface.
5. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals.
6. What are the measures to be taken to reduce corrosion fatiques?
7. What are the major implications of enhanced techniques of corrosion product analysis?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. List reasons why it is important to study of corrosion.
2. How Tafel polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products?
3. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
263
Unit I
Introduction to Corrosion
Importance and cost of corrosion spontaneity of corrosion passivation  importance of corrosion
prevention in various industries  the direct and indirect loss of corrosion galvanic corrosion: area
relationship in both active and passive states of metals  Pilling Bed worth ratio and its consequences  units
of corrosion rate  mdd and mpy  importance of pitting factor  Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and
their advantages and disadvantages .
Corrosion of metals by other gases.
9 Hours
Unit II
Forms of Corrosion
Different forms of corrosion  uniform corrosiongalvanic corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion,
intergranular corrosion, selective leaching, erosion corrosion, stress corrosion high temperature oxidation,
kinetics of protective film formation and catastrophic oxidation corrosion.
Industrial boiler corrosion, cathodic and anodic inhibitors
9 Hours
Unit III
Mechanisms of Corrosion
Hydrogen embrittlement cracking, corrosion fatigue  filliform corrosion, fretting damage and microbes
induced corrosion. Mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation  thick layer and thin layer  insitu
corrosion scale analysis.
Analyze the rust formation in mild steel using weight loss method
9 Hours
Unit IV
Cathodic and Anodic Protection Engineering
Fundamentals of cathodic protection  types of cathodic protection systems and anodes. Life time
calculations  rectifier selection. Stray current corrosion problems and its prevention. Coating for various
cathodic protection system and their assessment inhibitors  corrosion of steels. Anodic protectionDesign
for corrosion control.
Role of paints and pigments to protect the corrosive environment
9 Hours
Unit V
Corrosion Testing and Monitoring
Corrosion testing and monitoring  electrochemical methods of polarization Tafel extrapolation
polarization, linear polarization, impedance techniquesWeight loss method  susceptibility test testing for
intergranular susceptibility and stress corrosion.
Analyze the instruments for monitoring the corrosion.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1.
2.
3.
Zaki Ahmad, Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control, Elsevier Science and
Technology Books, 2006.
R. Winstone Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control: An Introduction to
Corrosion Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Science, 2008.
Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
264
ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES
11O001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To gain knowledge on basics of Entrepreneurship
To gain knowledge of business entity, source of capital and financially evaluate the project
To gain knowledge on production and manufacturing system.
Program Outcome(s)
l. able to demonstrate an awareness and understanding of professional, ethical, and social
responsibilities.
m. able to cultivate effective interpersonal and teamwork skills.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Entrepreneurial thinking
2. Innovation techniques in developing business
3. Legal aspects of a business
4. Skills on finance and cash flow
5. Skills on planning operations
Assessment Pattern
Model
Blooms Taxonomy
Semester End
S.No
Test I
Test II
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
20
20
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What is entrepreneurship?
2. What are the factors that motivate people to go into business?
3. Define a smallscale industry.
4. Define tiny industry.
5. Who is an intrapreneur?
6. State functions of SISI.
7. What is serial entrepreneur?
8. What is Technopreneurship?
9. What is reversal method?
10. What is brainstorming?
11. What do you mean by term business idea?
12. Mention any two schemes Indian government provides to the development of entrepreneurship.
13. What is a project report?
14. What is project scheduling?
15. Mention any four techniques available for project scheduling.
16. What is contract act?
17. Define MOU.
18. What are al the types of sources of finance for an entrepreneur?
19. Mention any five external sources of finance to an entrepreneur.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
265
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Apply / Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Create
1.
2.
3.
Unit I
Basics of Entrepreneurship
Entrepreneurship Competence, Entrepreneurship as a career, Intrapreneurship, Social entrepreneurship,
Serial entrepreneurship (Cases), Technopreneurship.
Entrepreneurial Motivation
6 Hours
Unit II
Generation of Ideas
Creativity and Innovation (Cases), Lateral thinking, Generation of alternatives (Cases), Fractionation,
Reversal Method, Brain storming
Utilization of Patent Databases
8 Hours
Unit III
Legal Aspects of Business
Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act, Negotiable Instruments Promissory Note, Bills and Cheques,
Partnership, Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), Companies Act Kinds, Formation, Memorandum of
Association, Articles of Association (Cases).
Business Plan Writing
10 Hours
266
Unit IV
Business Finance
Project evaluation and investment criteria (Cases), Sources of finance, Financial statements, Break even
analysis, Cash flow analysis.
Calculation of Return on Investment
11 Hours
Unit V
Operations Management
Importance Functions Deciding on the production system Facility decisions: Plant location, Plant
Layout (Cases), Capacity requirement planning Inventory management (Cases) Lean manufacturing.
Project Planning
10 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Donald F. kuratko, Entrepreneurship Theory, Process & Practice, South western cengage
learnng, USA, 2009.
Reference(s)
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGrawHill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Projects Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews, Tata
McGrawHill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
4. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, Operations Management, Thomson Learning Inc, 2007.
5. Edward De Bono, Lateral Thinking, Penguin Books, 1990.
6. http://www.enterweb.org
7. http://www.internationalentrepreneurship.com/asia_entrepreneur/India_entrepreneur.asp
8. http://indiakellogg.wordpress.com
11O002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
The students on completion of the course will be able to
Evolve the marketing mix for promoting the product / services
Handle the human resources and taxation
Understand Government industrial policies / support provided and prepare a business plan.
Program Outcome(s)
l. able to demonstrate an awareness and understanding of professional, ethical, and social
responsibilities.
m. able to cultivate effective interpersonal and teamwork skills
Course Outcome(s)
1. Increase in awareness of the entrepreneurship Development for engineering decisions.
Assessment Pattern
Blooms Taxonomy
Model
Semester End
S. No.
Test II
Test I
(New Version)
Examination
Examination
1
Remember
30
30
30
30
2
Understand
30
30
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
10
10
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
05
05
Total
100
100
100
100
267
Remember
1. Who are Fabian Entrepreneur?
2. Explain the Views on Schumpeter on Entrepreneurship?
3. Mention the three functions of NSIC?
4. Narrate the role of IDBI in the development of Entrepreneurship?
5. What are Project Objectives?
6. What are the stages in a Project Lifecycle?
7. Give the meaning of Feasibility Report?
8. Explain the objective of Entrepreneurial Training?
9. What is Motivating Training?
10. Who is a Small Scale Entrepreneur?
11. How to develop Rural Entrepreneur?
12. What are the Social Problems of Women Entrepreneur?
13. Differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship.
14. What are the types of entrepreneurs?
15. Explain the various qualities of entrepreneur.
16. Briefly explain the different merchant castes in India.
17. What is entrepreneurship training?
18. Discuss any three programmes supporting women entrepreneurs.
19. Write a note on the role of NISIET.
20. What are the challenges and opportunities available in SSI's?
Understand
1. Narrate any six differences between a Manager and an Entrepreneur?
2. Explain briefly various types of Entrepreneur?
3. What are the elements of EDP?
4. What is the role played the commercial banks in the development of Entrepreneur?
5. How would you Classify Projects?
6. What are the stages in project Formulation?
7. What are the target groups of EDP?
8. What are the major problems faced by Small Entrepreneur?
9. What are the problems & prospects for women entrepreneur in India?
Apply/Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Create
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
268
8.
Discuss the role of the Government both at the Central and State level in motivating and
developing entrepreneurship in India.
9. Developing countries like India need imitative entrepreneurs rather than innovative
entrepreneurs. Do you agree? Justify your answer with examples.
10. What are the reasons of very few women becoming entrepreneurs in a developing country like
India? Whether Indian women entrepreneurs have now made an impact and shown that they too
can contribute in economic development of the country? Discuss with examples.
11. Discuss the Culture of Entrepreneurship and its role in economic development of a nation. What
factors contribute to nurturing such a culture?
Unit I
Marketing Management
Formulating Marketing strategies, The marketing plan, Deciding on the marketing mix (Cases), Interactive
marketing, Marketing through social networks, Below the line marketing, International marketing  Modes
of Entry, Strategies (Cases).
Five P's of marketing, SSI Policy Statement
10 Hours
Unit II
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Planning (Cases), Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, HRIS, Factories
Act 1948 (an over view)
Global Trends in Human Resource Management
10 Hours
Unit III
Business Taxation
Direct taxation Income tax, Corporate tax, MAT, Tax holidays, Wealth tax, Professional tax (Cases).
Indirect taxation Excise duty, Customs, Sales and Service tax, VAT, Octroi, GST(Cases)
Recent Trends for a Troubled Tax, professional tax slab
8 Hours
Unit IV
Government Support
Industrial policy of Central and State Government, National Institute and Agencies, State Level
Institutions, Financial Institution
Global Entrepreneurship Monitor, Excise Exemption Scheme
7 Hours
Unit V
Business Plan Preparation
Purpose of writing a business plan, Capital outlay, Technical feasibility, Production plan, HR plan, Market
survey and Marketing plan, Financial plan and Viability, Government approvals, SWOT analysis.
Small Industry Cluster Development Programme, National Equity Fund Scheme
10 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. S. S. Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi, 2010
Reference(s)
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.
3. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management Text and Cases, Tata
McGrawHill, 2007.
4. P. C. Jain, Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2002.
5. http://niesbud.nic.in/agencies.htm
ONE CREDIT COURSES
11L0XA RF ID
269
   1.0
Objective(s)
To understand the principle of RF ID
To know the different modes in RF ID
To understand the problems in the data transmission
Introduction, Definitions and Vocabulary, To Understand Radio Frequency, We Must Know about
Frequencies and Their Classification, RFID: Who Uses It and What For.History, Radio Frequency (or
Contact less) Identification and Its Range of Applications, The Concept of Contact less
Communication.Elements, Terms and Vocabulary of RFID, Vocabulary.
The Many Terms Used for
the Elements of RFID.Energy Transfer and Communication Modes, Forward Link and Return Link.
Data Communications, Principle of Communication, Concept of Operating Modes, General
Operating.Problems in Data Transmission, More Specific Problems Relating to Long Distance RFID
Systems.
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. DomaniqueParet, RFID At Ultra And Super High Frequencies Theory And Application,Wiley
Publications, 2009
11L0XB Sensor Networks
   1.0
Objective(s)
To study sensor network architecture and their applications
To understand modification in MAC and routing protocols
To explore new management techniques in sensor networks
To study the operating system for wireless sensor networks
BASIC CONCEPTS
Introduction to Wireless Sensor Networks (WSNs) and Their Applications  Constraints and
Challenges Collaborative Processing Basic Sensor Network Architectural Elements Basic Wireless
Sensor Technology Hardware and Software Operating Environment.
Introduction Propagation and Propagation impairments Modulation Basics Fundamentals of Medium
Access Control (MAC) Protocols MAC Protocols for WSNs: ScheduleBased Protocols and RandomAccess Based Protocols SMAC Protocol IEEE 802.15.4 Standard.
Data Dissemination and Gathering Routing Challenges and Design Issues: Network Scale and TimeVarying Characteristics Resource Constraints Routing Strategies: Energy Aware Routing, WSN
Routing Techniques, Flooding and its Variants LowEnergy Adaptive Clustering Hierarchy PowerEfficient Data Gathering. Network Management Requirements Network Management Design Issues
Issues Related to Network Management: Naming and Localisation. Operating System Design Examples
of Operating Systems: TinyOS, Mate and MANTIS
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, wireless sensor neteorks, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2005
2. KazemSohraby, Daniel Minoli and TaiebZnati, Wireless Sensor Networks Technology, Protocols
and Applications, Wiley, 2007
Reference(s)
1. Edgar Callaway, Wireless Sensor Networks: Architectures and Protocol, CRC Press 2004
2. Holger Karl and Anderson Willis, Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks:
Wiley, 2005
270
IntroductionOTcl Linkage: Class TclClass OTclClass Tcl ClassClass simulatorNodes and Packet
ForwardingSimple Links CreationDebugging NSTracing and Monitoring supportNetwork AnimatorInstallation of NS2.TCP and UDP Agents creation and analysisImplementation various routing protocols
(AODV, DSR, DSDV, TORA) through WLAN Standards and its analysisvarious error model and
Propagation model analysisAnalysis of various routing metrics of routing protocolsImplementation of
Wireless sensor networks through NS2.
Introduction : Overview Architecture Scenario based
network simulation: General approach Creating scenarios Files Associated with a scenario Using
Qualnet: System requirements Qualnet GUI Run settings Utility programs Command line interface
Modeling networks Architect in Visualize mode QualnetAnalyzer Qualnet packet Tracer Qualnet
File editor.Advanced Wireless  Cellular ALE/ASAPS Advanced propagation Multimedia enterprise
Network security Satellite Sensor networks UMTS. Simulations: performance analysis of various
routing protocols for IEEE 802.11 standard Battlefield monitoring application in ZigBee standard
Performance of Signal Strength variations and handoff in GSM mobiles under different mobility
conditions.
Introductionvarious editor toolsM/M/I Queue SimulationALOHA and CSMA
Simulations and its analysisTCP SimulationsFast Recovery and Fast Retransmit Simualtions and its
analysis.
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. The ns Manual, VINT Project,2009
2. QualNet 5.0Users Guide,Scalable Network Technologies, September 2009.
Reference(s)
1. Tommy Svensson, Alex Popescu, Development of laboratory exercises based on OPNET
Modeler,2003
2. www.opnet.com
3. www.scalable networks.com
271
11L0XE Biometrics
   1.0
Objective(s)
To study the need of biometrics
To improve the knowledge of various biometrics techniques
Introduction Benefits of biometric security Verification and identification Basic working of biometric
matching Accuracy False match rate False nonmatch rate Failure to enroll rate Finger scan
Features Components Operation Competing finger Scan technologies Strength and weakness. Types
of algorithms used for interpretation. Facial Scan  Features Components Operation Competing facial
Scan technologies Strength and weakness. Iris Scan, Voice scan  Features Components Operation
Competing iris Scan and voice scan technologies Strength and weakness. Other physiological biometrics
Hand scan Retinal scan Behavioral Biometrics Signature scan keystroke scan.
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Anil K ain, Patrick Flynn, ArunA.Ross, Handbook of Biometrics, Springer Science publications,
2008.
2. Samir Nanavati Michael Thieme Raj Nanavati ,Biometrics identify verification in a networked
world,a Wiley Dream Tech 2002
Reference(s)
1. R Cappelli. Handbook of Fingerprint Recognition, Springer, New York, 2003.
2. Biometrics for Network Security Paul Reid, Pearson Education 2004.
11L0XF Embedded Solutions Engineering
   1.0
Objectives
To focus on the implementation of Embedded Solution Architecture
To develop embedded system architecture
UnitI
Definition, Issues and challenges .Systems approach to solutions Development, Solutions Engineering
requirementsTypical challenges from the end market will be taken and discussed, Functional and Non
functional, Identification of various functions that need to be implemented
UnitII
Embedded Solutions Architecture, Analog Front End Processing functions Battery and power
Management functions Security functions Supervisory functions, Putting it all together System
integration issues and challenges.
UnitIII
Performance assessment and measurement, Learn By doing practice: system architecture development for
typical real world example, Review Examination.
Total: 15 Hours
11L0XG IE3D Software
   1.0
Objective(s)
Introduction to IE3D Features and Capabilities of IE3D softwareBasic Modeling Techniques in IE3D
softwareModeling of Microstrip Patch Antenna Using IE3DOptimization Techniques. FASTEM
Techniques using IE3D Different Importing Options Available in IE3D, Usage of IE3D Library for
272
General shaped structures, Usage of Filter Syn, Spiral Syn Techniques of Modeling of Antenna ArrayNodal Simulation Using IE3D software, Finite Ground and Finite Dielectric Structure Modeling,Wideband
RLC circuit Extraction Hands on Practice
Total: 15 Hours
11L0XH ARM CORTEXM0+ Processor Architecture and Programming
   1.0
Objective(s)
To focus on the implementation of ARM processors.
To simulate assembly language and C programs.
To implement low power embedded processor.
Introduction to Embedded Systems, Software Design Basics: Concurrency, Software Engineering and
CMSIS APIs, CortexM0+ Processor Core, C Code as Implemented in Assembly Language, InterruptsGeneral Purpose Digital Interfacing, Analog Interfacing, Timer/Counters, Serial Communication.
Improving System Robustness with Hardware and Software,Using Direct Memory Access to Improve
PerformanceProfiling and Improving Code Execution Speed, DSP Acceleration with Cortex M0+ and the
CMSISDSP Library, Modeling, Profiling and Reducing Energy or Power Use, Profiling and Reducing
ROM and RAM Memory Requirements, Advanced Debugging with Cortex M0+
Laboratory Exercises
1. Examine Toolchain output
2. Measuring Interrupt Timing
3. Basic User Interface with LED and switches
4. ADC voltage measurement
5. Serial Communication
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Steve Furber, ARM System On Chip architecture, Addison Wesley, 2000.
2. CortexM0 Technical Reference Manual, ARM limited, 2009
3. Embedded Arm Technology, Free scale Manual 2012.
11L0XI PLC and SCADA Programming
   1.0
Objective(s)
To focus on the implementation of PLC.
To implement the real time applications based on SCADA.
Laboratory Exercises
1. Traffic and elevator control using programmable logic controller
2. Control of bottle filling system using PLC
3. Start/stop motor control
4. Sequential motor starter
5. Parking lot controller using counter instruction
6. Parking lot controller using arithmetic and logical instruction
7. Startforwardstop reverse control
8. Forward and reverse control
9. Star to delta 3phase motor starter
10. Faulty occurrence timer
11. An industrial process control system
12. An industrial process control system with advanced features
13. Block transfer read and write for analog data
14. Analog input/out communication using ab plc5 for industrial control application
15. Development of Human Machine Interface using any SCADA package
16. Alarm management system using SCADA.
Total: 15 Hours
273
Reference(s)
1. Frank Petruzella, Programmable LogicController, Tata McGraw Hill Education.2010
2. Stuart A. Boyer , SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition,ISA,2009
SPECIAL COURSES
11L0RA PATTERN RECOGNITION &AI TECHNIQUES
   3.0
UnitI:
PATTERN CLASSIFIER
Overview of pattern recognition  Discriminant functions  Supervised learning  Parametric estimation Maximum likelihood estimation  Bayesian parameter estimation  Perceptron algorithm  LMSE algorithm
Problems with Bayes approach  Pattern classification by distance functions  Minimum distance pattern
classifier.
UnitII.
UNSUPERVISED CLASSIFICATION
Clustering for unsupervised learning and classification  Clustering concept  Cmeans algorithm
Hierarchical clustering procedures  Graph theoretic approach to pattern clustering  Validity of clustering
solutions.
Unit III.
STRUCTURAL PATTERN RECOGNITION
Elements of formal grammars  String generation as pattern description  Recognition of syntactic
description Parsing  Stochastic grammars and applications  Graph based structural representation.
Unit IV.
FEATURE EXTRACTION AND SELECTION
Entropy minimization  Karhunen  Loeve transformation  Feature selection through functions
approximation Binary feature selection.
UnitV
RECENT ADVANCES
Neural network structures for Pattern Recognition  Neural network based Pattern associators
Unsupervised learning in neural Pattern Recognition  Self organizing networks  Fuzzy logic  Fuzzy
pattern classifiers Pattern classification using Genetic Algorithms.
Reference(s)
1. Robert J.Schalkoff, Pattern Recognition: Statistical, Structural and Neural Approaches, John
Wiley &Sons Inc., New York, 2007.
2. Tou and Gonzales, Pattern Recognition Principles, Wesley Publication Company, London, 1974.
3. Duda R.O., Hart.P.E., and Strok, Pattern Classification, second Edition Wiley, New York, 2008.
4. Morton Nadier and Eric Smith P., Pattern Recognition Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New
York, 1993.
5. IEEE Transaction on Pattern Recognition Techniques 2006.
6. IEEE Engineering Medicine and Biology Magazine 2006.
11L0RB BIO SIGNAL PROCESSING
   3.0
Prerequisite: Digital Signal Processing.
UnitI:
Bio Signal Wave shapes and Waveform complexity: Introduction to Biomedical signalsoverview and
characteristics of ECG,ENG,EMG,EEG,ERPs,EGG,PCG,Carotid pulse,EOG, VMG,VAG, and Otto
acoustic emission signalsBio signal acquisitionconversion and analysis.Morpholigical analysis of ECGEnvelope extraction and analysis of PCGCorrelation and Cross spectral analysis of EEG Channels.
274
UnitII:
Time Series Analysis and Spectral Estimation: Time series analysislinear prediction modelsTime variant
systems Adaptive segmentationSpectral EstimationBlackman Tuckey methodPeriodogram and model
based estimation.
UnitIII: Removal of Artifacts: Noise sources in biomedical signalsReview of optimal filteringadaptive
filters LMS&RLS Adaptive filtersRemoval of Artifacts in ECGMaternalFetal ECGMuscle contraction
interferenceuse of adaptive filters for segmentation in ECG and PCG Signals.
UnitIV: Bio Signal Pattern Classification and Diagnostic Decision: Pattern classification as applied to
Bio signalssupervised pattern classificationunsupervised pattern classificationProbabilistic models and
statistical training and test stepsNeural networksmeasures of diagnostic accuracy and costReliability of
classifiers and decisions.
UnitV: Special Topics on Bio signal processing: Application of wavelet transformTFR representationECG Characterization wavelet networksdata compression of ECG and EEG signalsApplication of chaos
theory on Bio signals.
Text Book(s)
1. Rangaraj.M.Rangayyan, Biomedical Signal AnalysisA Case Study Approach,IEEE Press John
Wiley&Sons Inc, New York2002.
Reference(s)
1. ArnonCohen, BioMedical Signal Processing, Vol I&II,CRC Press.1995.
2. W.J.Tompkins, Biomedical Digital signal processing, Prentice Hall, New Jersey1993.
3. IEEE Transaction on Bio Medical Engineering.
4. IEEE Engineering Medicine and Biology Magazine.
275